The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB10-0105 permit set project manual divisions 1-14, 31-33 � , ' � . . . ' Town of Vail Fire and Emergency Serv�ces , Fire Station #3 � � 2399 North Fronta e Road West 9 ' Vail, Colorado � Permit Set Project Manual Divisions 1 - 14 & 31 - 33 � June 10, 2010 Project No. 09083 � ' 10 - G ! d�s' � (� ,�� I� i� MI� D , Jt��V 14 ZO�� .� � �, �� . �"C}��!� �� t��sL �. � :�� _ , {� � .� �� r� �� . ��A.� .. , , . ,�/ �-: j � + . ,... ?`Y. � �,_ro ls�:. !�` � v�f�- ' ��'� '� �:a •7 .n, � �5'.y '�` ,f 1 F'�^�',r'�f'��1 L'�I� n A, � '�,� r r ,,� ��' ,,, y ,�- . ,.�r ' � ` `< �� .,$ ,.., _ r n,..,,rtment : . ,, �T�� s � ., ..r,,., ., , ,��' �� s:� _ .. . . ; � c. n: . , .� , $„ . j� _ "� � P'- _ . _. v4 � _-. _. --� , .� , o,' _. _ '...;.. : , . �, � �� .., c � b:: x � s:- � �� - � � � th: "`� .�_. � 3�'� � o � ' pt_,,:�� u,.,..,..��_�,. Uk c a L m C'3 , Architecture Planning 1 /nterior� � .1 1 - � - Town of Vail Fire and Emergency Services � Fire Station #3 f�� .��;+ \ � � j � �L • �� Project Roster I� �. � _ � u � ��_D �J ' ,� � " '�'1`li�� : �' ,r� � c,,� ! y°� �O3� CLIENT CIVIL ENGINEER '+i ,N'�.,y, � ��'" ' Vail Fire and Emergency Services Marcin Engineering LLC 's r. �''}-�� -�`� �+ r` J � °�� 42 West Meadow Drive 101 Eagle Road .� Vail, Colorado 81657 Avon, CO 81620 4`�- �� .--�� ' 970.477.3474/Mark Miller 970.748.0274/Paul Anderson � � OWNER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER � ' Town of Vail Monroe and Newell Engineers Inc. � 1309 Elkhorn Drive 70 Benchmark Road Suite 204 Vail Colorado 81657 Avon Colorado 81620 t 970.479.2161 /Todd Oppenheimer 970.668.3776/Peter Monroe ARCHITECT MECH/ELEC ENGINEER , Belford Watkins Group, LLC Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers 231 South Howes Street 110 East Beaver Creek Blvd Suite 202 � , Fort Collins, CO 80522 Avon, Colorado 81620 � 970.212.1243 /Don Watkins 970.949.6108 /Marc Sacconi � , DESIGN/LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT LEED CoNSVLTaNT VAg Inc. Institute for the Built Environment 90 Benchmark Road, Suite 202 Guggenheim Hall � ' Avon, CO 81620 Fort Coliins, Colorado 80526 970.959.7034/Anne Gunion 970.491.4041 /Josie Plaut ' CONTRACTOR GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT ' Drahota Construction Koechlein Consulting Engineers, Inc � 4700 Innovation Drive, Bldg C 12364 West Alameda Parkway, Suite 115 ' Fort Collins, CO 80527 Lakewood, Colorado 80228 970.204.0100/ Scott Warner 303.989.1223 /Jessica Street ' CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SURVEYOR AEC Integrated Program Mgt, Inc Gore Range Surveying, LLC � O11 Eagle Park Drive 5129 Longsun Lane � , Eagle, CO 81631 Avon, Colorado 81620 � 970.471.5354/Adam Williams 970.479.8698 / Sam Ecker � � ' � � � � , � � , �, � � y. _ � ' AE .✓ ^., r ,l � f t?G a i f . p � ' �f r t . � ��a F� :., g .i�d '�� . �. } . �[ \ �� Y� �R,-.r� � � PROJECT: Town of Vail � �� ^�� '� "�� ` a � Vail Fire and Emergency Services i� � R� � � � �� Station#3 � � y y �,, � � � ' Vail,Colorado ,,��,,/� � Belford Watkins Group Architects Project No. 09083 'h '�x,*.,��,..��'``'� �`�fi7� � � � ' � � TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE � ' � A. Table of Contents 1-4 g B. Specifications � ' � DNISION 1 —GENERAL CONDITIONS � � � 011000 Summary 1-4 � ' 012100 Allowances 1-3 � 012200 Unit Prices 1-3 � ' 012500 Substitution Procedures 1-3 � 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 1-3 � 012900 Payment Procedures 1-4 � ' 013100 Project Management and Coordination 1-6 � 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 1-6 013233 Photographic Documentation 1 � � , 013300 Submittal Procedures 1-9 j 014000 Quality Requirements 1-7 � 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1-8 � ' 016000 Product Requireinents 1-5 017300 Execu�ion Requirements 1-8 � 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 1-5 � ' 017700 CloseoutProcedures 1-6 � 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data. 1-7 � 017839 Project Record Documents 1-3 �; 017900 Demonstration and Training 1-3 � ' ' 018113 Sustainable Design Requirements 1-4 � 019113 General Commissioning Requirements 1-3 � � ' DNISION 2—EXISTING CONDITIONS � � 024119 Selective Structure Demolition 1-4 � ' � DIVISION 3 —CONCRETE � € � � � . � �� '��. � . .�., �� a� � �� ;� . ., e _ �� t .,�� -.� �s�� rv. �Ayi, ��. � € � DNISION 4—MASONRY � f ' t 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 1-9 � „ ,. . _ zi � �� , .;",�. . : � _ �., �._ _ �. _ _. �� .�. . , .�_ M�_ . ,�� t � TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 � ' F � � t � ,' . DNISION 5—METALS �`� � s��' ''� ``��; � � �`� .� E 051200 Structural Steel Framing � °'°'��R ��4�. � �w� 1-6 052100 Steel Joist Framing �'� ` �� '' � � � �: : 1-4 � 053100 Steel Decking � � ° �� p � �� " �� 1_5 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing `` ' `m'� ,,.�,r ��;,� 1 6 055000 Metal Fabrications :�� -�'� x �� 1-6 � 055100 Metal Stairs `� 1-6 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 1-5 055300 Metal Gratings 1-3 � DNISION 6—WOOD,PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES � 061000 Rough Carpentry 1-6 061600 Sheathing 1-3 061753 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 1-5 � 061800 Glued-Laminated Construction 1-3 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry 1-2 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry 1-3 � 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1-5 066400 Plastic Paneling 1-2 DNISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION � 071326 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1-5 � 072100 Thermal Insulation 1-6 � • � „ � � t � � �.r��a. ': <.�� r�'ti �<„ t=g,. �� s��'�gt'„� �. #_ a�. �at � , . ... . .. .F .� 4'� 3;.35 � �� ..` .. . .��„i,.�-��` �� 074600 Sidmg 4 � �� , � f �`� . � �, . x � :�� 076100 Sheet Metal Roofing 1-9 � 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1-7 � 079200 Joint Sealants 1-7 DNISION 8—OPENINGS � 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1-8 � 081416 Flush Wood Doors 1-4 083113 Access Doors and Frames 1-3 083613 Sectional Overhead Doors 1-6 083614 Four-Fold Doors 1-4 � �� ,, ��,. ��-��1�� _�=�� 085113 Aluminum Windows 1-5 085314. Fiberglass Windows 1-5 � 086200 Tubular Skylights 1-5 087100 Door Hardware 1-11 1C�c�� :' r` �� .::�=� . .. .t_ = �-!� � 088300 Mirrors� � � .� �� 1-3 � 089000 Louvers and Vents 1-4 � TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 � � � � ' ' � � ' � DNISION 9—FINISHES � ' 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 1-4 � �092900 Gypsum Board 1-5 � > ' 093000 Tilin 1-7 �: � 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 1-5 � : � ' � � 099113 Exterior Painting 1-4 � 099123 Interior Painting 1-6 � ' 099600 High-Performance Coatings 1-6 � DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES � �. � 101100 Visual Display Surfaces 1-4 `' 101400 Signage 1-6 � 102600 Wall and Door Protection 1-3 �' ' 102800 Toilet,Bath and Laundry Accessories 1-7 y 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 1-3 g 104416 Fire Extinguishers 1-2 � ' 105112 Firefighter Lockers 1-2 ; 105500 Postal Specialties 1-3 � 107500 Flagpoles 1-3 , �; DNISION 11 —EQUIPMENT ` ; ' 114000 Stainless Steel Countertops 1-2 `�' 115213 Projection Screens 1-2 �; ' DNISION 12—FURNISHINGS � � 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 1-3 � 122413 Roller Window Shades 1-3 ` ' � DNISION 13 —SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION(Not Used) ' DIVISION 14—CONVEYING SYSTEMS R � ,: �: 141010 Chain Hoists 1-2 � ' .v.... .. . �'"��.tt �N� .k:�r. ... ..�.fi,��;`.�5.�`��.,��'.��k,'! �'s'��a"�t ,�'.3-^� ��.�5 �. ��i�S v .. . �� 4 � „s�^"'��"'�c�rw-' � '' °_ r e ✓'.` y. �! .. � .4'�!' �,i a� 7 s� ,�. � � �'`. +h � ,��°"�� ,ey..`^ : } � �:� � ��`�'��'�,�.. ��. � , ; �`.j s:,,., ' .., A ` �': � y. � e•..� -t t7 �"^..�-i y 'r� ... d'�.@i' � � ., g �fi '� / �. �.✓� s }r 4,, ��,t A�� ` � ' - °:.'.�.:�rs.. . . P. r-. �' TABLE OF CONTENTS — " , — � PAGE 3 � ' , e '€ ' � , DIVISION 21 -FIRE PROTECTION � 210010 Fire Protection General Provisions 1 ' 210050 Fire Protection B.asic Materials and Methods 1 � 210300 Fire Protection 1-10 DNISION 22 -PLUMBING � 220010 Plumbing General Provisions 1-17 220050 Plumbing Basic IVlaterials and Method 1-11 � 220080 Plumbing Insulation 1-36 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbtng 1-8 221116 Domestic Water Piping 1-13 � 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 1-11 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 1-11 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 1-8 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 1-10 � 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 1-5 221429 Sump Pumps 1-3 221513 General-Service Compressed-Air Piping 1-9 � DNISION 23 -HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230010 HVAC General Provisions 1 � 230050 HVAC Basic Materials and Methods 1 230080 HVAC Insulation 1 � 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 1-8 230593 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 1-13 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 1-5 231123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 1-13 � 232113 Hydronic Piping 1-14 232123 Hydronic Pumps 1-6 � ' 232300 Refrigerant Piping 1-9 233113 Metal Ducts 1-16 233300 Air Duct Accessories 1-12 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 1-7 � 233713 Diffusers,Registers and Grilles 1-5 235216 Condensing Boilers 1-8 235700 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 1-4 � 236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units 1-4 237200 Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment 1-6 238126 Split-System Air-Conditioners 1-6 � 238219 Fan Coil Units 1-4 238239 Unit Heaters 1-5 238316 Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping 1-5 � 238400 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 1-13 � � TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 � � ' � � 3; r � � � DIVISION 26 -ELECTRICAL � 260010 Electrical General Provisions 1-12 � ' 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 1-3 � 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1-5 � 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1-3 ' 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1-6 �: 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 1-4 � 260923 Lighting Control Devices 1-5 � ' 262416 Panelboards 1-9 ��' 262726 Wiring Devices 1-6 � 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 1-4 ; ' 263213 Engine Generators 1-11 � 263600 Transfer Switches 1-4 `' 265100 Interior Lighting 1-4 � ' 265600 Exterior Lighting 1-5 � . � � DNISION 27—COMMUNICATIONS � � ' 270528 Pathways for Communication Systems 1-7 � 270544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals For Comm.Pathways and Cabling 1-4 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 1-7 � t 271500 Communication Horizontal Cabling 1-14 �'. 274000 Audiovisual Systems 1-8 ; � , DNISION 28—ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY �; � 280513 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security 1-8 � ' 280528 Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security 1-5 r: 280544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic and Security Pathway � And Cabling 1-3 � ' 282300 Video Surveillance 1-6 3 , DNISION 31 -EARTHWORK � { � ' 311000 Site Clearing 1-4 � 312000 Earth Moving 1-9 � E ' DNISION 32 -EXTERIOR IlVIPROVEMENTS ;.; �TT� e� � +� "°� �'�a S t�N �k..' t y - . p �5�t, . � � S'� .3�':.`v. 321216 Asphalt Paving ,� � 1-5 � � 321313 Concrete Paving �� „� `"�"� 1-8 � 322800 Miscellaneous Site Ixn rovem'�' „ 1 � �� a � �`w.�� - s '��, ` �� '��` ;� � >��.,�` . .,., ;�-,�� € . . ..�. -. ��`��*��` �; ' - ' m. f,, ,.. .�. , ' e � 329200 Turf and Grasses "`�``'4,, ,��:�� A 1-9 � � 329300 Plants ��:,;;� , 1-10 4' , � DNISION 33 -UTILITIES � �` 334600 Subdrainage 1-3 g! ' � � TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 � , � S: � � ' � �, � � ' � SECTION 011000- SUMMARY � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � , � 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section Includes: � � 1. Project information. � 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. � ' ' 3. Work under separate contracts. � 4. Access to site. � 5. Work restrictions. 6. S ecification and drawing conventions. � ' p k' � ¢ B. Related`Requirements: �', ' � 1. Division O1 S�ction "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures � governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. � � ' � 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION ` > �: ', ' A. Project Identification:' Vail Fire and Emergency Services Fire Station#3 � �: 1. Project Location: 2399 North Frontage Road West,Vail,Colorado. � ' B. Owner: Town of Vail, 1309 Ellchorn Drive,Vail, Colorado. . � 1. Contact: Fire Chief Mark Miller � , C. Architect: Belford Watkins Group,231 S.Howes St.,Fort Collins,Colorado. ' 1. Contact: Don Watkins � � D. Construction Manager: AEC Integrated Program Management, Inc., O11 Eagle Pazk Drive, � Eagle, Colorado � , 1. Owner's Representative: Adam Williams � < �. E. Contractor: Drahota Construction, 4100 Inovation Drive, Bldg C, Fort Collins, Colorado has � � ' been engaged as Contractor for this Project. � 1. Contact: Scott Warner � . � ' , � � �: ' � . � � a ' � � SIJMMARy 0 i 1000- 1 � ' � � � � 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS � A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. A new fire station to accommodate two fire fighting companies, Engine and Aerial. The building � will consist of an approximate 15,000 s.f. two-story building that will include an apparatus azea, shift quarters for four firefighters, resident firefighters dorm for:twelve residents, and a administration/training area. The occupancy types housed in the building will include residentidal � (R-2), business (B) and Storage (S-2) occupancies as defined in, the 2009 IBC. Building construction type will be Type VB(non-rated). Major building assemblies will.be as follows: Exterior Walls: Concrete masonry.and concrete walls at the apparatus area with � stone veneers and metal siding. Steel stud walls at the administration azea with thin stone veneers � and metal siding. Wood studs with metal siding at shift(duty)quarters and resident firefighters quarters. Exterior walls insulated with blown-in insulation at stud cavities � and R-13 continuous insulation at the exterior face resulting in to- tal assembly R values of R21 (steel stud)to R-32(wood stud). � Floor Systems: Concrete slab-on-grade at the lower level. Concrete topping on steel deck and steel joists at the upper leveL Radiant barrier insulation installed under Apparatus Bay slab and � at bottom side of upper level structural slabs to facilitate upward migration of radiant floor heat. Radiant barrier at bottom of struc- ; tural floors will be fiberglass board insulation(R6.5). Radiant bar- rier under apparatus bay slab will be expanded polystyrene(R-10). � Roof Systems: Sloped roofs of prefabricated wood trusses and plywood web joists ; with,plywood deck and metal roofing.There will also be limited low slope roofs of baz joists and metal deck with single ply mem- � brane roofing. Trussed roof systems insulated with blown-in insulation at bottom of. Joist framed and low slope roof systems insulated with blown- � in insulation at joist cavity and continuous insulation at the roof surface. Interior Partitions: Steel stud with semi-gloss painted gypsum board at administration, � shift quarters and resident firefighter's quarters. Epoxy paint on concrete and concrete block at apparatus azea. Glazing: Window units will be a combination of insulative, thermally � broken metal and fiberglass units to reduce thermal conductivity. � � � SUMMARY 011000 -2 � � � ' �; � 5 �- �. ' � � � � � " , : B. Type of Contract. � 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. � E ' � 1.4 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS � �' ' A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried � out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. � Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. �; ' � B. Concunent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction ` operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under � , ' this Contract. � � 1. Radio Equipment: For installation of radio equipment and radio antenna. � ', , �: C. Subsequent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following additional work to ° be performed at site following Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on � successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. � , e= 1. Furnishings: For all non-fixed furnishing items. �; ' . a � 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE � � ' ' A. General: Contractor sha11 have full use of Project site for construction operations during � construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited onlyby Owner's right to perform � work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. � ' ' �:. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of � Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. � � � � 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS � � ' A. Work Restrictions,General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. � � 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of � ' authorities having jurisdiction. � B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by others � unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility � ' services according to requirements indicated: �; �.. 1. Notify Owner and utility provider not less than two days in advance of proposed utility � � interruptions. � 2. Obtain utility providers written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. � � ' � �; SUMMARy O 11000-3 � ' � � � � C. Noise,Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and � vibration, odors, or other disruption to surrounding properties with neighbors. D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet(8 m) of � entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substance on Project site � is not permitted. 1.7 SPEGIFICATION AND DRAWII�iG CONVENTIO�NS � A. Specification Content: The Specifications use eertain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. � These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The � words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, aze implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated � otherwise. B. Division O1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division O1 apply to the Work � of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to � identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in � the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on � Drawings. � 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual: � PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) � END OF SECTION 011000 � � � � SLiMMARy 011000-4 � �' � � � ' � £ SECTION 012100-ALLOWANCES � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � �. ' � � 1.1 St1NIlVIARY � � ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. _ � � B. Types of allowances include the following: �' ' 1. Unit-cost allowances. � 2. Quantity allowances. � � � ' C. Related Sections: � � l. Division O1 Section"Unit Prices"for procedures for using unit prices. � € ' ' � 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE � � § �: ' A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when fmal selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed � � to avoid delaying the Work. � ' � B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making fmal selections. � Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. ;' ' C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. € �, � ; , R 13 SUBMITTALS = ; � A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form � ' specified for Change Orders. � a, B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for � ' use in fulfillment of each allowance. � � C. Coordinate and process submitta.ls for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of � the Work. � ' � x d- 1.4 COORDINATION � , , � A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to � coordinate installation. � ' ` �.. � , � �: ALLOWANCES 012100- 1 � ' � � � � 1.5 UNIT-COST AND QUANTIT'Y ALLOWANCES � A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight,and delivery to Project site. � B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under � allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.6 ADNSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES � A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,multiplied by fmal measurement � of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses,tolerances,mixing wastes,normal product imperfections,and similar margins. � 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of � overhead costs and other margins claimed. : 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. � 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure,or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance � described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation,overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost � ; amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. � 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. � PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) � PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Retum � damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. � � ALLOWANCES 012100-2 � � , � � � , � 3.2 PREPARATION � � � ' A. Coordinate materials and their insta.11ation for each allowance with related materials and � installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with �'; related wark. � , ' � 33 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES # � ' A. Allowance No. One Quantity Allowance: Include import and placement of 450 cubic yards of �' topsoil as specified in Division 32 Section"Plants". x' � �, ' 1. This allowance includes material cost,receiving,handling,and installation. �, 2. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustrnent with corresponding unit price requirements of = Division O1 Section"Unit Prices." � ' �' B. Allowance No. Two Unit-Cost Allowance: Include Two Hundred Fifty Dollars ($250) per � fixture for BB light fixtures at locations indicated on the electrical drawings. � ' � 1. This allowance includes material cost only. Receiving, handeling and installation to be � included in Contract Sum and not included in the allowance. � 2. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with corresponding unit price requirements of � ' Division O1 Section "Unit Prices." _ � t ' END OF SECTION 012100 � � ' �' �` ' �: � � � ' � � , ' � � � ' � � � � ' � g � � ' ` � � �: ' � � i ' ALLOWANCES 012100-3 � 4' �; E � ' � � � ' � SECTION 012200-LJNIT PRICES � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. � � B. Related Requirements: � ' � 1. Division O1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting � and handling Change Orders. � � � � 1.2 DEFINTTIONS � A. Unit price is[an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the � ' Work as] a price per unit of ineasurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of ' the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope � ' of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or � decreased. � � ' 13 PROCEDURES � A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, �', ' [applicable taxes,]overhead, and profit. � �' B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires s establishment of unit prices. Methods of ineasurement and payment for unit prices are specified � ' in those Sections. °` �! ' C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use � of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an � independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. � ' � D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections �, referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each umt price. � � ' �� PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) �' � � ' � F 2" ' �. � ' �. i: � � ' UNIT PRICES 012200- 1 � � . � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 SCHEDULE OF LJNIT PRICES � A. Unit Price No. 1 -Unrequired Topsoil . 1. Description: Credit for providing quantities of topsoil less than allowance according to � Division 1 Section "Allowances". 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard. 3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements in � Division Ol Section "Allowances." B. Unit Price No.2-Import of Topsoil � 1. Description: Import of topsoil material according to Division 32 Section "Plants" in quantities more than allowance according to Division 1 Section "Allowances". � 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard. 3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements in Division O1 Section "Allowances." � END OF SECTION 012200 � � � � � � � . � LJNIT PRICES 012200-2 � � ' � � � � ' � SECTION 012300-ALTERNATES � � �; f: PART 1 -GENERAL � � � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for altemates. �: ( �: 1.2 DEFINITIONS g 1 � A. Altemate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined � in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if � ' Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be � completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described � in the Contract Documents. � , � 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the � Agreement. = 2. The cost or credit for each altemate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract �' ' Sum to incorporate altemate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the � Contract Sum. � ' �: � 1.3 PROCEDURES t � ' A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate � work of the altemate into Project. � � � 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similaz � items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part � of alternate. � 1 � B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if altemates have been accepted, rejected, or � ' deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to � alternates. �' �; � C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. � ' `° D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections � referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work � , described under each alternate. � � � : ' � £. � g�! ' q � ALTERNATES 012300- 1 � , � � � PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES � A. Alternate No. 1: Flooring at Exercise Room 1. Base Bid: Carpet as indicated on Sheet A-2.3 and as specified in Division Nine Section � "Tile Carpeting." 2. Alternate: Rubber Athletic Sheet Flooring as indicated on Sheet A-2.3 and as specified in Division Nine Section"Resilient Sheet Flooring." � B. Alternate No. 2: Stainless Steel Countertops at Shift and Resident Dorm Kitchens 1. Base Bid: Plastic-laminate countertops as specified in Division Six Section "Interior � Architectural Woodwork." 2. Alternate: Stainless Steel Countertops as specified in Division Eleven Section "Stainless � Steel Countertops." C. Alternate No. 3: Fiber Cement Siding � 1. Base Bid: Ribbed metal siding and trim as indicated on Sheets A-3.0 thru A-3.2 and as specified in Division Seven Section"Metal Wall Panels.° 2. Alternate: Fiber-cement siding and trim at extent indicated on Sheets A-3.0 thru A-3.2 � for ribbed metal siding and as specified in Division Seven Section "Siding." D. Alternate No.4: Four Fold Bay Doors � 1. Base Bid: Sectional overhead doors as indicated on Sheet A-6.0 and as specified in Division Eight Section "Sectional Doors." � 2. Alternate: Four-Fold Doors as indicated on Sheet A-6.0 for doors 123C, 123D and 123E as specified in Division Eight Section"Four-Fold Doors." E. Altemate No. 5: Roof Ice-Melt System at Eave locations(eaves of 5.5/12 sloped roof only) � 1. Base Bid: Roof Ice-Melt system at valleys only as specified in Division Seven Section "Sheet Metal Roofmg." � 2. Alternate: Roof Ice-Melt system at eaves of 5.5/12 roof in addition to valley locations as specified in Division Seven Section "Sheet Metal Roofing." Include necessary electrical circuiting. � END OF SECTION 012300 � � � ALTERNATES 012300-2 � ' � ' , ��,�� 5 a �� "�_.''�� . ..�x�� e�,� -� ; ; � ' ' � ,_ � �� '� � �� #_ �'y .� . � � x ...�Y . ., �r ' . ��o�'� �'%. .f.s ��y. �. �I ! a . �v t'��G-ac..- ..ti.� w m.. ..f� � . �, , .. ....i6t.a..i a':.t�e .-. , r.:. K .-.0_ ._ n em : +v, — .. . e'^�......•»e . .. . a�.a . _.. ._.e ..:.'.'�.�,w > ' �, 3u� j END OF SECTION 012300 ' � I ' I 1 ' � � '� i � ' ' " . � � ' � 1 � � ' � ' � � � ' � � � �' ' �. .: � a ' � � i � ' � � ALTERNATES 012300—3 � ' � � , � SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ` � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � SUMMARY 1.1 ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: � tl. Division Ol Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable � product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. � � ` ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS � � A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from � " ' those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by�ontractor. � � � '; ! 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS g A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product � or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. � , 1. Substitution Request Form: Use Contractors standard form � 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, � , as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be ' provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other � parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. , � c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, ' durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. � � d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. � f. Certificates and qualification data,where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. ' SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500- 1 ' � � � h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test � results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. � j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided � within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. � k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials,and is appropriate for applications indicated. � m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently • become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. � 3. Architect's Action: - If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. � Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. � a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. � b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed � substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. � PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS � A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for � change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the � following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce � indicated results. � SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-2 � � : , , � b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. ' � d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. ' . f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution . � has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products,and is acceptable to all contractors involved. � � B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if recerved within 60 days after commencement of the Work. ' � 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy , � conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of ' other construction by Owner,and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. ' � c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. � d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified ¢ � product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. � f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having , jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. � i. Requested substitunon provides specified warranty. � , j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is � compatible with other products,and is acceptable to all contractors involved. � � PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) ' � � END OF SECTION 012500 � ! � � � � � , SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-3 � � � � . ' � : � SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ; � PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY � '; , A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. '; i 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN TI�WORK A. Architect will issue, with copy to Construction Manager, supplemental instructions authorizing ' ! minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project Manual. ! , 1.3 PROPOSAL REQLTESTS ' � A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. ' t 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. � 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days,when not otherwise specified, after � receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with � , total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data �: to substantiate quantities. � b. Indicate applicable ta�ces, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade � I , discounts. a Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. � d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of �' � the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and ; finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. L e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. � � B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require � modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a � � change to Architect and Construction Manager concurently. �: � � 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the � Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. � ,: ' � �. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600- 1 � � 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total � amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade � discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the � change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. � 6. Comply with requirements in Division O1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. � 7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.4 ADMINISTRATNE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Division O1 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs � of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Division O1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for � preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a � Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTNE � A. Construction Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a Construction Change � Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It � also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. • B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the � Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to � substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. � � CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-2 � � '� � ; � PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) � iPART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) � END OF SECTION 012600 .: � � � !�� e , � ' � ; � f+ � � ; � : � ; � .i� � : � � � � CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-3 � t � � � �. � ; � SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES �; � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � , � l.l SUMNIARY � A. Section includes administrative and rocedural re uirements necess to re are and rocess � � P 9 �' P P P Applications for Payment. � B. Related Requirements: � � 1. Division O1 Section "Allowances" for rocedural re uirements overnin the handlin µ P q g g g and processing of allowances. � 2. Division Ol Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Division O1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures � for handling changes to the Contract. � 4. Division O1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction � � schedule. �, 5. Division O1 sustainable design requirements Section for administrative requirements governing submittal of cost breakbown information required for LEED documentation. � � � 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALLTES � � A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. ,; � 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: � � a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. � : , b. Submittal schedule. . c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction � schedule. � � 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect Construction Manager concurrently at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of � initial Applications for Payment. � � � � � � r � PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900- 1 � � B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for � the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: � a. Project name and location. ; b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. � d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. � 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project � Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum. � 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed. � 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. � Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. � 8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual � work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option. � 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result : in a change in the Contract Sum. � 13 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT � A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Construction Manager concurrently and paid for by Owner. � 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. � � PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-2 � � ,; � B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. ' � C. Pa ment A lication Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 25th day of Y PP the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the � � last day of the month. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form � � for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete i applications without action. � 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. � � Use updated schedules if revisions were made. � 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. � F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of � � lien and similar attachments if required. � 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. � � , G. Waivers of Mechanic s Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of inechanic s lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and ! � related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after � � deduction for retainage, on each item. � 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full � waivers. � 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. � H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: � '! � 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. � 3. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. � � 4. Contractor's construction schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. LEED action plans. � 6. Schedule of unit prices. � i � 7. Submittal schedule(preliminary if not final). � 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. � 9. Copies of building permits. � � PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3 � � � � 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for � performance of the Work. 1 l. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. � 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of � Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. l. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a � statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued ' previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. � J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted � and accepted,including,but not limited,to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that t�es,fees,and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. � 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavrt of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. � 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. � PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Used) � PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) � END OF SECTION 012900 � � � � � PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 -4 � ; � � SECTION 013100 -PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ! � � PART 1 -GENERAL ' I 1.1 SUMMARY ' � A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Requests for Information(RFIs). , 2. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division O1 Section 'Bxecution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and ' ' � field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. � � 1.2 DEFINITIONS � � � A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager,Architect, or Contractor seeking information � � required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. � � 13 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' � A. Subcontract List: Pre are a written summa identi in individuals or firms ro osed for each P rY fY g P P portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a '. � special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. � ! � 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate,covered by subcontract. : � 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES !, ' A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper : ' installation, connection,and operation. ' � 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where . � installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maacimum performance and � accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. � ; � � PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 1 � � B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures � reyuired for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their � Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative � procedures with other construction activities and materials and equipment to be provided by the Owner to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following: � 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. � 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. � 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. � 1.5 REQLTESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFIs) � A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional mformation or mterpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by � Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's � work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or � interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. � : 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. � 6. RFI number,numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. � 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time � or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. . 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop � Drawings,coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. � PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-2 � � ; � � � ; � C. RFI Forms: Soflware-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. � D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect[or Construction Manager]and to CM after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. , � � l. The following RFIs will be returned without action: � ; � a. Requests for approval of submittals. � b. Requests for approval of substitutions. ,� ' c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. � d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. '; � £ Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. � � 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case � Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to ' Division O1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or ' � the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within 10 , days of receipt of the RFI response. � � ; E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. :s � Submit log bi-weekly. Soflware log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. � ',; � 2. Name and address of Contractor. � 3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. � 'ti � 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. , ' F. On receipt of Architect's action,update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect and Construction Manager within � seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. � ' � 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and � Proposal Request, as appropriate. � 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as � appropriate. � � � � � r PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3 � � � � 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS � A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. � 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled � meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, � including Owner,Construction Manager,and Architect,within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, and � their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall � be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: � a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. � d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. £ Procedures for testing and inspecting. � g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. � j. LEED requirements k. Preparation of record documents. 1. Use of the premises. � m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Procedures far moisture and mold control. � q. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. r. Construction waste management and recycling. s. Parking availability. � t. Office,work, and storage areas. u. Equipment deliveries and priorities. v. First aid. , � w. Security. x. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting � minutes. � PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4 � : l � C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each ` construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. � ; � � 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or � affected by the installation and its coordination or integation with other materials and � installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise � � Architect, Construction Manager of scheduled meeting dates. � � 2. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including � required corrective measures and actions. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. " ; t Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the � Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. � D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. �; 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, and ;: � Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities ' shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar il �, with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review ` other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as � ' � appropriate to status of Project. t a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, i in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and '` � subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. y � b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: � 1) Interface requirements. � .� � 2) Sequence of operations. ; 3) Status of submittals. 4' ' 4) Status of LEED documentation. 5) Deliveries. � 6) Off-srte fabncation. 7) Access. ! 8) Site utilization. = 9) Temporary facilities and controls. � 10) Progress cleaning. j � 11) Quality and work standards. $ ± 12) Status of correction of deficient items. ? 13) Field observations. ; � " PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 5 � � � � 14) Status of RFIs. � 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. � 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the �, , meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress � meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. � PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) � PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) � END OF SECTION 013100 � � � � � � � � . � ' � PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6 � I � � ,, � SECTION 013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION , �. PART 1 -GENERAL .; � 1.1 SUMMARY f ;; � A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: � 1. Contractor's construction schedule. , � 2. Construction schedule updating reports. � 3. Daily construction reports. k 4. Site condition reports. � � 1.2 DEFINITIONS ; � A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume '". � time and resources. f 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. : � 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activiTy in the network. � B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. � C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. ' � � D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner. � : � 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � � A. Format for Submittals: Submit re uired submittals in the followin format: ° 9 g 1. PDF electronic file. ;; � 2. Two paper copies. : � � : � :r CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 1 � 3 � � B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. � 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) � and date on label. C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. D. Dail Construction Re orts: Submit at weekl intervals. � Y P Y E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION � ` A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. � B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports,payment requests,and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities � involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule � them in proper sequence. PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL � A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. � 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. � B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: � l. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,purchasing, fabrication,and delivery. � 2. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. � 3. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. � CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-2 � a ` � � C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule,and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: � a. Uninterruptible services. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including,but r � not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion,and final completion. � E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or ' � � commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. ' , 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. ' � h dul : When eriodic u date indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar da s F. Recovery Sc e e p p y behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by � which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has ; � been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. � 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node)format. LB. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. . � 1. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 2. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking , � days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. � C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical � paths. � 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: ' � a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. � c. Purchase of materials. � d. Delivery. � e. Fabrication. ; � CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -3 ' � £ Utility interruptions. � g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. � j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim �. completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract : milestone dates. � 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled netwark. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate � paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical � path. D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its � submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating � straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: ' 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activi . � � 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. � 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. � 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the schedule of values). F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: � 1. Identification of activities that have changed. � ` 2. Changes in early and late start dates. � 3. Changes in early and late fmish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. � 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. � � � CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -4 � b 8 !+ � t � � ; � 2.3 REPORTS � A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following � information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. � � 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. � ', � 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. ' ' 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. � 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. � 13. Change Orders received and implemented. � 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. � 16. Equipment or system tests and startups. i � 17. Partial completions and occupancies. 18. Substantial Completions authorized. � B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and � � the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for ; Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with � � recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ' � A. Contractor's Construction Schedule U datin : At monthl intervals, u date schedule to reflect P g Y P actual construction progress and activities. � � ' � 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each � such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not � ' � limited to chan es in lo ic durations actual starts and finishes and activi durations. � , g g , , , tY � 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. �, , � �: � � � �' � � CONSTRUCTION P1rOGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 5 � � � B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by � Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field off'ices. � 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. � END OF SECTION 013200 � � � � � � � � � � � � � CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-6 � � � � � � � 0 ; � = � v� r N U � C � ; � '� A r c h i t e c t u r e PROPOSAL REQUEST � � d � � � PJanning m C9 z � Interrors i � � �t PROJECT: Vail Fire and Emergency Services Station #3 ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: 09083 DATE: � ` � PROPOSAL RE UE T N : Q S O � OWNER: Town of Vail CONTRACTOR:Drahota Construction � � � 1309 Elkhorn Drive 4700 Innovation Dr. Bld. C ' Vail, CO 80657 Fort Collins CO 80527 :' � CONTRACT FOR: General Construction CONTRACT DATED: � f � � Owner � Architect ❑ Other ; � � Contractor � Construction Mgr � Consultant BY: Don Watkins i � ;; � Proposal Request � Please submit an itemized quotation for changes in the Contract Sum and/or Time related to proposed modifications to the '�! � Contract Documents described below. Submit proposal within 10 days,or notify the Architect in writing of the date on which you anticipate submitting your proposal. THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER OR A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED HEREIN. � Description: � � � � � � � � Attachments: � � � Issued By: Don Watkins � � � � � � � � � � Contractor Response ' The work will affect the project as summarized below. Backup attached includes all costs of labor,materials,taxes, overhead,profit and all other changes andlor charges involved as required by the Contract Documents. � NO CHANGE: ADD: � DEDUCT: The Contrad Time wili be(increased)(decreased)(unchanged)by( )days. This information shall be valid for thirty(30)calendar days from the date of the signature below. Contractors Signature: Date: I Architect/Owner Review and Approval � ❑ Approved O Rejected Suggested Amount Date Architeds Signature: Date: � Comments ❑ Approved ❑ Rejected Suggested Amount Date � Owners Signature: Date: Comments: � End of PR# � � � � � : � �I � � � � ; � � � ¢ � E SECTION 013233 -PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION � .,; �� e PART1 -GENERAL � M ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: ' � 1. Preconstruction photo a hs. �' P � 2. Periodic construction photographs. � 'i � 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' � A. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within seven days of taking photographs. � � , � � PART2-PRODUCTS ` 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA � � A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format. � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS �. � A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly �' show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. � B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without � ` alteration,manipulation,editing,or modifications using image-editing software. �' � 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. � � � C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and ' surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage � points. � � 1. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to ' � coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to � show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. � � � �'� END OF SECTION 013233 � g-: � G � � � PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 � � i , , t SECTION 013300- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ' _ PART 1 GENERAL � ' � 1.1 SiJMMARY ', ' A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: ' 1. Division O1 Section "Construction Pro ess Documentation" for submittin schedules S�' g and reports,including Contractor's construction schedule. ' 2. Division O1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division O1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record ' Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Division O1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS ' A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. ' B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' �: A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making ' corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. , 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATNE RE UIREMENTS Q A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings � 1 will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. � 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract � ' Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. � � ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1 ' � a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital � data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. � B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. � l. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity. � 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring � coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processin Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. � g Time for review shall commence on Architect's and Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit � submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time � if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor and Construction Manager when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner � as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for � identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. � 2. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. � b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. � e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. � h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a � decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., � 061000.01.A). � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2 � � i i t C � ; ' j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. � k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. , ' m. Other necessary identification. 3. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and � ' ' unless Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. �. ' a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect and Construction Manager. ' 4. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and � appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect and Construction Manager will return without review submittals ' received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: General Contractor's form. � E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: ' 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling � navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier,including revision identifier. � , a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). ' Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., ��' LNHS-061000.01.A). � � , 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor s review. � 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use soflware-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner. , F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. _ �; ' G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittaL � ' 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. � 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action �; stamp. �` ' I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, � fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of � construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. � ' � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-3 � , � J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final � action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Submrt electro nic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. � a. Architect will return annotated file and copy Construction Manger. Annotate and � retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies and copy Construction Manger. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies. � 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be , ; signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that � entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. � b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of conshuction and � type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data � are not suitable far use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: � a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. � c. Standazd color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. . . e. Testing by recognized testing agency. � £ Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. � 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above,as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. � b. Printed performance curves. � : SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -4 � i '' ' ' c. Operational range diagrams. d. Cleazances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. � t5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Sam les. � P � 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: � , a. PDF electronic file. � C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base � ' Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. � , 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. � , b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. , e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. � g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. � ' 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop �: Drawings on sheets at least &-1/2 by 1] inches(215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by , 42 inches(750 by I067 mm). 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. Four opaque copies of each submittal (five if review by architect's consultants is required). Architect and Construction Manager will retain two copies (three if five ' copies submitted);remainder will be returned. � D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these � , characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together � ' in one submittal package. �` 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: � ' � a. Generic description of Sample. �: b. Product name and name of manufacturer. ' c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. � 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic � ' submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and � identification information for record. � 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- � ' control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be ; used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. ¢ F: t: ' � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-5 t � � � a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual � Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's � property,are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or � sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from � manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared � from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use,and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the � following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color,texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing � and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one � Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other chazacteristic is inherent in � material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary � indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: � '. 1. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. � F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." � G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." � H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Payment Procedures." � I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Quality Requirements." � �/,� SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-6 L � � '' ' i � � , ' � J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements ' specified in Division O1 Section "Closeout Procedures." � ;; ' K. Maintenance Data:��Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Operation and � � Maintenance Data. � ' ' L. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 sustainable design � requirements Section. ''? ' M. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. '! , N. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel � ` comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and � ! ' personnel certified. � � O. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that � , Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. } � ; ' P. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying � ; that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of � manufacturing experience where required. 'f ' Q. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that � product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. i , R. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that ; material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. i t ' S. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ; ' T. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by ; manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on ! , evaluation of tests perfoimed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. � ; , U. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,that product complies with building code in effect for Project. E E ' V. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section ' "Quality Requirements." � � E W. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation a ' of product,for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 3 1 � , � � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-7 , t � � X. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing � agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. � Y. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, � for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Z. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, � performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used far calculations. Include page numbers. � 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES � A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide � products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit � a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and ' other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the � responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractar to be designed or certified by a design professionaL l. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the � Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with � other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and � Construction Manager. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division O1 � Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name � and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 8 � i � i � � -' ' of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, ; and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. ' � 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION � ',j ' A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. ; , B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: � , ❑ No Exceptions taken ❑ Note Markings ' � ❑ Contractor Confirm ❑ Rejected i , ❑ Contractor Resubmit ❑ Attached ,; ' C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to I appropriate party. ' D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. ' E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. ' , END OF SECTION 013300 � � µ , ' � . � � ' � � � � � 4 � , � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-9 � ' ' , ' ' SECTION 014000-QUALITY REQUIIZEMENTS � ' PART 1 -GENERAL � �: ' �. 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. , B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. �' � ' 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- �' assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. �' ' 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required � by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. �. ' C. Related Requirements: ' 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. � � � 1.2 DEFINITIONS � ' � A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during � execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed �' ' construction will comply with requirements. � B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after � , execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. � � ' C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed � to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where � indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to � , show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified �' installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. � � � D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing �: agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to � ' establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. � f � E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the spurce, e.g., plant,mill, factory, or shop. � ' � � QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1 � ' � � �. � F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation � of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing � laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an � employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,erection,application,and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that � certain constructiori activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or . that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). " erienced" means havin successfull � ; I. Experienced: When used with an enhty or mdividual, exp g Y completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of � authorities having jurisdiction. 13 CONFLICTING RE UIREMENTS � Q A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards � establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or qualrty level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. � ; To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. � 1.4 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS � A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. � 2. Project title and number. 3. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency. � 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. . 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. � 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. � 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. � QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-2 � y, � ' � ' 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. ' ' 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections ' specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address,and telephone number of representative making report. , ' 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability far installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,if not,what corrective action was talcen. ', ' 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. � 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. E , C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's recards, submit copies of permits, licenses, � certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for ; , compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. i 'i , 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE r ! A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels !'l ' required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. E i B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar � to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as ': , well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. i � C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated ' for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient ; production capacity to produce required units. � , ' D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling ; work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has < resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. � '; ' E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to � � practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing ' engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed a for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and ; extent to those indicated for this Project. i ' F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be � performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. '' ' 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for � specialists. ' � � '` QUALITY REQUIltEMENTS 014000-3 k ' S G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the � experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities. � 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary � Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer � who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design,and extent to those indicated for this Project. � I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: � l. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. � 2. Notify Architect fourteen days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. � 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication,or construction. a. Allow fourteen days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. � 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. � { ,� �, ,,, �� '�:i: i ,ip� ,, � �; � , ,� �� 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Res onsibilities: Where uali -control services are indicated as Owner's res onsibili � P q h' P h', Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing � agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. � � QUALIT'Y REQUIREMENTS 014000-4 � � � '; ' 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,and the � ' Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that ' the Work complies with requirements,whether specified or not. € � 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing � ' agency to perform these quality-control services. � a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in � ' wriNng by Owner. _ 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires � testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a � certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. � 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract � , Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, � when they so direct. � � � � C. Manufacturer s Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer s representative to �: observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. �! D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's � ' responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. ' E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and �. inspections. ' � 1. Notify Architect,Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or �' deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. � � 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests � are conducted. � 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and �: ' inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. � 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similaz � quality-control service through Contractor. � ' S. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. � 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. � � � � � ' � QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-5 � ' �' � � F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify � agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. � 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and � inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. � 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project � site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and � replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples,and similar activities. � 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS � A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: � 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. � 2. Notifying Architect,Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control � service to Architect and Construction Manager concurrently,with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, � which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. � � � � QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 6 � � ' �. � � , r PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) � i � � ' � PART3 -EXECUTION � €' � ' 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION � F A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair � , damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. �: � Y 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other � ' Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched � areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible � as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching # ' in Division Ol Section"Execution." �' � B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. ; , C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of € responsibility for quality-control services. �: � ' � END OF SECTION 014000 � $ , � � � � � � � ' � � F � � g ' �: � ' � k � ' �(� � s � 1 � � ' � it,� t � k 3 � ' � t: � ' ` 3 t: 2: ' 1 � �. ' QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-7 � � � � � � � SECTION 015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS � , � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � ; � A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and � ', ' protection facilities. � B. Related Requirements: � , � 1. Division O1 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility � interruptions. ' � � 1.2 USE CHARGES � � ' � A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included � in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,testing agencies, and authorities having � ' jurisdiction. � � � B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is � ' available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections � and extensions of services as required for construction operations. � � ' C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is � available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections � and extensions of services as required for construction operations. � : ' � € 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � � � A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for � construction personnel. � ' B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA � Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent. � � ' , C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having � jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention � program. � r � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ; A ". ' � A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary � electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. � � ' � � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 1 � ' � 3 � B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each � temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume � responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (SU-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, � galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (l.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-} OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner � and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES � A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature � controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, � Architect[, Construction Manager], and conshuction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division O1 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. � C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. � 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by � locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, � self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating � units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location � and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: Use of permanent ventilation systems is not allowed. � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-2 � � � � � � , � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � � , ' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � � A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference � ' with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the � Work. � � 1 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division Ol Section "Summary." � � B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities � are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. � � � 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION i � � A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. � � � 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be � mterrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. � � B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. � � 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having � ' jurisdiction. � C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution pipmg m sizes and pressures adequate for � construction. � ' z D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water � service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these � ' facilities to condition existing before initial use. � E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of � ' construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, �; number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. � F. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of � ' completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low � temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on g completed installations or elements being installed. � , � G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction � activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction � , from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on � completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to � produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. � , � H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain � equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. ' g P # � ' TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-3 � � � � � I. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient � size, capacity,and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service underground unless otherwise indicated. � 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source,as directed by Owner. J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination � for construction operations,observations, inspections,and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements � without operating entire system. K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s)for each field office. � 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. � 2. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers. � a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. � c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers'offices. � g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when � away from field office. L. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office � adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: � 1. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning,and faxing,or separate units for each of these three functions. � 2. Internet Service: Broadband modem,router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall.. 3. Internet Security: Integrated sofiware, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing,and spam protection in a combined application. � 33 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: � l. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction � area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. . � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -4 � � � � � �' � � 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. � Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial , Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to �; Owner. �: � ' B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas � in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads � and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, � within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. �: � £ 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and � paved areas. � ' 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas � according to Division 31 Section"Earth Moving." �: 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, � � regrading,proofrolling,compacting,and testing. � 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until � immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course � , pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." � � � C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � � � 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs,pavement, and utilities. �. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. � � � D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. � � ' E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � Maintain Project site,excavations,and construction free of water. � � 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or � ' adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. � 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. � � ' F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. � � � 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. � ' 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and � individuals seeking entrance to Project. _ z: , a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. � � 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. � � , G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section � "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." # � , H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle � waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having � jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division O1 Section"Execution." � , � � � , TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 5 �; � � � � I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. � 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. � J. Temporary Elevator Use: See Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators. : K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders � are not adequate. L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be � permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. � 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, � and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. � B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible � air,waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent � properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. � D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of � stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line � of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root . systems from damage,flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and � harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. � G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by � entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. � � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-6 � , � � , 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized � personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. � � � H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, � and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. � ' I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. ' J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. � � � K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in � progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather,other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. � � 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. � ' L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with , ' NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. � ' 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel � , at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be � ; � followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. � � 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL � � � A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document � ,; ' visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. � s B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers,when materials are subject � to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and � ; � keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. � r C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full � , enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: � 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with � ` , high organic content, into partially enclosed building. � 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. � � 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. � � 4. Discard,replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. � � � ' � � TEMPORARY FACII,ITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-7 � ' � � � 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before � enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building � enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems,maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. � 2. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL � A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and � abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. � 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated � results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than � Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. L Materials and facilities that constitute temparary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. � 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 � � � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 8 � � � � � � � ' � SECTION 016000-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � �' � € 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section includes administrative a.nd procedural requirements for selection of products for use in � Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on � products; special warranties; and comparable products. � ' � B. Related Requirements: � � < ' 1. Division Ol Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. � � � P' 1.2 DEFINITIONS � ' � A. Products: Items obta.ined for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or � taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," , "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or � ' model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product � literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. �: 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been mcorporated mto another pro�ect or � facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new � iproducts. � 3. Com arable Product: Product that is demonstrated and a roved throu submittal F P PP � � process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service � � performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or � exceed those of specified product. � B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's � � product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, � � function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other � characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers � named in the specification. � � , � 13 ACTION SUBMITTALS � � � ' A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. � Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification � Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. � � � � � � � ' K � � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 1 � � � � 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or � documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor with copy to Construction Manager of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, � or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division O1 Section "Submittal Procedures." � b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of�Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division O1 � Section Submittal Procedures. Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more � products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. � � 1.5 PRODUCT DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, � deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: � 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent � overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. � 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original : sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,protecting, and installing. � 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: � 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. � 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. � 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. � PRODUCT REQUIIZEMENTS 016000-2 � � � � ' S. Com 1 with roduct manufacturer's written instructions for tem erature, humidi , � P Y P P tY � ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. � ' 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. � � � 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES ' � A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other ¢ warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on e � product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract � � Documents. � � � ' 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a � particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. � 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide � � specific rights for Owner. � ; B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and � identification,ready for execution. � ' 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and � properly executed. � , 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a � written document using indicated form properly executed. � 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and ` particular requirements for submitting special warranties. � ' � C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division O1 Section "Closeout Procedures." � � � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � � � d 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES k � A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, � are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. � � 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items � � needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. � 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are � � specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used � successfully in similar situations on other projects. � 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with `' requirements of the Contract Documents. � � 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make � selection. � 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications � � establish salient characteristics of products. _ � � �; t ' s � � � � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-3 � � � � � � B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the � named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. � 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be � considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both � manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience : will be considered. � b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in � "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: � a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with � ; requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered. ' b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed � manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. � 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or � indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable � Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", � provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other � specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division O1 Section "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. � � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-4 � �' , � � ' D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by � Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with �' , requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's � product line that includes both standard and premium items. �' � � ' 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS °' i A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable � ' product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not �, satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with � these requirements: � ' � 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, �' and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. � ' 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the �! Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, � durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. � , 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and � names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. � , 5. Samples, if requested. � � � � ¢ '�' ' PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) � # �: � END OF SECTION 016000 � 1 4 � "s ' �' i � � � � 1 � � � � � � � € � � 1 � 4 E z � � � � § � . , ! � � 9 , d � 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 5 � ' i l � � ' � €' � SECTION 017300 -EXECUTION � t � PART 1 -GENERAL � ; � ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � , A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the � Work including, but not limited to,the following: � � � ' l. Construction layout. � 2. Field engineering and surveying. �. 3. Installation of the Work. � 4. Cutting and patching. � ' S. Coordination of Owner-installed products. � 6. Progress cleaning. � 7. Starting and adjusting. � , 8. Protection of installed construction. � 9. Correction of the Work. �- � ' B. Related Requirements: � � 1. Division O1 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. � , 2. Division O1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with � Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,and final cleaning. � � , � 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � E. ' � A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of � improvements comply with requirements. � � � k , B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept � hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposaL � � t ' C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. � h D. Final Property Survey: Submit 2 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. � E ' � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � ' A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice � in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying � services of the kind indicated. � ' € � , � � EXECUTION 017300- 1 � , � i r � € � � � B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of � construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of � locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or � increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in � increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or � components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended,or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety � 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner � that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS � A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. � 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements of Division O1 sustainable design requirements Section. � B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed ' surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent � possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used,use materials that,when installed, � will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. � � � EXECUTION 017300 -2 � � ' � � � ' PART 3 -EXECUTION � � , 3.1 EXAMINATION � �: � A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and t , construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate � and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting a the Work. � ; ' 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of � sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, � ' and other utilities. � 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public � utilities serving Project site. � � t , ' B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the � Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where � indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions ' affecting performance. Record observations. � � l. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of � " ' connections before equipment and fixture installation. � 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are � to be installed. g 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with � , ' existing finishes or primers. � � C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding � ' with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. � } i ' 3.2 PREPARATION � A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, � move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility � ; ' appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coardinate with authorities having � jurisdiction. : ' B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to � other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before � i ' fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the � Work. � � C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown � ' diagrammatically on Drawings. g € � ' � � � � ' 6 � EXECUTION 017300 -3 � , � . � � � D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for � clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division O1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." � 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before roceedin to la out the Work, veri la out information shown on � P g Y fY Y Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly. � B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of � ; construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. � 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Wark progresses. � 6. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. ' 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established � by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill � and topsoil placement,utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. € : D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building � foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. � E. Record Log: Mamtam a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log � available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING � A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference � points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. � � EXECUTION 017300-4 � � ' � � , . � B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, � referenced to data established by survey control pomts. Comply with authorities having � jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. � ' � l. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record � Documents. � ' ' C. Certified Surve : On com �letion of foundation walls,ma'ar site im rovements, and other work � Y P J P � requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, � ' ' angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. � � � D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final properiy survey showing � �: significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by $' � land surveyor,that principal metes,bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned � as shown on the survey. � � ' � 3.5 INSTALLATION � ',; , A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and � elevation, as mdicated. � � '' ' 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. ` 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance � and ease of removal for replacement. � 3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. � ; ' k B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in � applications indicated. � ' . C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. � Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. � : ' � D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or ,, loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. _: ; ' � E. Sequence the Wark and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction �. items on site and placement in permanent locations. � � ' F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. � € G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be � � factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that � adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated � requirements. � '; , � H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size � and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with � ' other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size � and type required for load conditions. �. � , � � EXECUTION 017300-5 � ' 4 � � � 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at � heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and � directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver : such items to Project site in time for installation. � I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. � J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and mstallation materials that are not considered . hazardous. � 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. � Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance � of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existin Warranties: Remove re lace atch and re air materials and surfaces cut or dama ed � g , P , P , P g during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. � C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. � Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. � E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling,breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar ' operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply � with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not � hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. � 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 � Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls ar partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent � entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. � EXECUTION 017300 - 6 � � , � s � ' � F. Patching: Patch construction by filling,repairing,refmishing, closing up,and similar operations � following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as � practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other � ' Sections,where applicable. r � 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to � ' demonstrate physical integrity of installation. � 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed fmishes of patched areas and extend finish � restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence � ' of patching and refinishing. � 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area � into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even � surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall 3 , coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and } appearance. � 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane � ' surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a � weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. �. , G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching aze performed. Remove paint, � mortar, oils,putty,and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. E' ' ; 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING � � '; , . . . � A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce � requirements stnctly. Dispose of matenals lawfully. �, € €: , 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and � debris. � 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if � , the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg C). } 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. � Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally,according to regulations. � , � B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. � � � C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for ` ` ' proper execution of the Work. ; : 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. "' , , � 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the ; entire work area, as appropriate. � ' � D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written ' instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials � specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning � ' materials that are not hazardous to health ar property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. � E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. E , � � EXECUTION 017300- 7 < ' Y � � � F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure � freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials � down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining � ' materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through � the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the � construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,dangerous, damaging, or otherwise . deleterious exposure during the construction period. � 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING � A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,replace with new units, and retest. B. Ad�ust e uipment for proper operation. Adjust o erating com onents for proper operation � J q P P without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. � Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. ' D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division O1 Section � , "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION � A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage � or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. � END OF SECTION 017300 � � � � EXECUTION 017300- 8 � � � , � � € ' � SECTION 017419-CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL ; ' � 1.1 SUMMARY ` � r � ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: k �' 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. �' i3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Requirements: ; ' � 1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting € from demolition site improvements. � 2. Division 04 Section"Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. � ' 3. Division 04 Section "Stone Masonry" for disposal requirements for excess stone and > stone waste. � 4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing � ; , and removal of above-and below-grade improvements. � � �. , 1.2 DEFINITIONS € A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting �: ' from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition ar � , selective demolition operations. i � � C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, � . ' recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having � jurisdiction. ' D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in �' preparation for reuse. � � ' k 13 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS £ A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total f ', ' non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of � materials. � � � � , � CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 1 � ' � : � � � � 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS � A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work. � 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: On a monthly basis review waste reduction progress. Include the following information: � 1. Matenal category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons(tonnes). � 4. Quantity of waste salvaged,both estimated and actual in tons(tonnes}. 5. Quantity of waste recycled,both estimated and actual in tons(tonnes). 6. Total quantity of waste recovered(salvaged plus recycled)in tons(tonnes). � 7. Total quantity of waste recovered(salvaged plus recycled)as a percentage of total waste. B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage,recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. C. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste � by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,receipts,and invoices. D. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills � ' and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. � E. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that � requirements for the credit have been met. F. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator. � 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by � USGBC. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with � requirements in Division O1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." . � � � CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 -2 � � ' � � � k � � � ' � 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN � 9 ' A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in � this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate � quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of ineasure throughout waste management � ' plan. � � B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-cleaxing and � , ' construction waste generated by the Wark. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for k � estimates. � ; ' . . � C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, � or disposed of in landfill or mcmerator. Include pomts of waste generation, total quantity of ': � each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation � procedures. � ' ' 1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled ` materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. ', ' 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include s name, address,and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. � 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating � recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location �' ; ' where materials separation will be performed. � � � [ ' PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) � � �: ' PART 3 -EXECUTION � � � E ' , 3.1 PLAN IIvIPLEMENTATION � s € - A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, � signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan � ' during the entire duration of the Contract. � 5 3 B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management g , procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. � � 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal � ' return. � 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review � 4 plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. ; ' ' _ � ' � � � � CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-3 � ' � � � � C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and� other adjacent occupied and � used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that � are to be salvaged,recycled,reused, donated,and sold. 2. Comply with Division O1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection,and noise control. � 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE,GENERAL � A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for � recycling waste materials shall aaccrue to Contractor. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate � recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. _ 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until � they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. � a. Inspect contamers and bins for contammation and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, � grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of � remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or � processor. 33 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE � A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. � � � � CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-4 � �; i � �: � 1 � � � � � 1 � � 3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE � �: ' A. Packaging: � � 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry � ' ' location. _ 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. � 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from � Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood � ; ' pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. � 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements � for recycling wood. ' ' � B. Wood Materials: � ; ' � 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood � ' ' C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry � � location. � � � 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper r „ ' or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. � € � £ ' ' 3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE � f � A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove �' ' waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator ; acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � � � 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of ; accumulate on-site. �' 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces # r ; ' and areas. w � B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. € � 1 C. Burnin Burnin of waste materials is ermitted onl at desi ated areas on Owner's ro e � g� g P Y � P P rtY, � provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials � until fires are extinguished. � , � D. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 4 � , � END OF SECTION 017419 � , � P � CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-5 � ' � , i � � � � i �: SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES � # ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � �: 1 � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, � ' but not limited to,the following: ` � � 1. Substantial Completion procedures. �; ' 2. Final completion procedures. � 3. Warranties. . � 4. Final cleaning. � ' S. Repair of the Work. � � � B. Related Requirements: , 1. Division Ol Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion ` construction photographic documentation. � ' � 2. Division O1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance � manual requirements. � 3. Division O1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record � Specifications,and record Product Data. � ' 4. Division Ol Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing � Owner's personneL � 5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements � ' ' for the Work in those Sections. ¢ E � ' ' 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. f ' � B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. � � � C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. ' � 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS , A. Certificates of Release: From authorities havin 'urisdiction. - gJ B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. _ , z: C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. r ' � ' 4: � � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- 1 � ' � � � 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS � A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. � 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES � A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. !:� B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below � that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction � permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division O1 Sections, including project � record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation,damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar ' final record information. � 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds,maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 � Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. � 5. Submit testJadjust/balance records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division O1 sustainable design � requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. � C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below � that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's � personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. � 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustrnent, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division O 1 Section"Demonstration and Training." � 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-2 � � � ' s: ' �, 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency G responders. ; 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, � , construction tools, and similar elements. : 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. � 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual �: ' defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a � ' minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and � tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with � inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the � � Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either � on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or � corrected before certificate will be issued. g , ' ` l. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as � incomplete is completed or corrected. ; 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. � ' � 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES i p A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: � ' & 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division O1 Section "Payment �: Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial = ' Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed £ and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been �: completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. � � 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage ': complying with insurance requirements. : 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. � ' S. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, _ equipment,and systems. ' � , B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of ;: request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify � Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment ; � after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected ; before certificate will be issued. � 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as � jincomplete is completed or corrected. y � � s � � � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-3 ° , # � � 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) � A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by ' construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if � necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order by room number and proceeding from lowest � " floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors,equipment, and building systems. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: � a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy with copy to Construction Manager. � 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of � the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. � B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the � Project Manual. � 1. Bind warranties and bonds m heavy-duty, three-nng, vmyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-l/2-by-1l-inch � (2l 5-by-280-mm)paper. � 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone � number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"Project name, and name of Contractor. � 4. Wananty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of � document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. � � � � � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-4 . � � k ' � C � ' � i t �: � � i F PART 2 -PRODUCTS � �, � # 2.1 MATERIALS � � ' A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or � fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially ° hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. ; � ' £ 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not � applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maaLimum �. � allowable VOC levels. � ' � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION g, � � � � 3.1 FINAL CLEANING � , � � A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply � with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution � regulations. � ' � B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each � surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and � ' � maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. � � , � 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification � , ' of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: � � a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, � including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other q ' foreign substances. �' b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other ° � foreign deposits. � ', � c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured � � surface. � d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from s ' Project site. � e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. E f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, � ' � free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural > weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original ` � condition. ' g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults,manholes,attics, and similar spaces. 'r h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. � , ' � � � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- 5 � � � � � i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean � according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. � Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. � 1. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. � m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills. � o. Clean light fixtures, lamps,globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. ; p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division O1 Section "Temporary � Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. � 3.2 REPAIIZ OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of � Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective � parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. � Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified : condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other � damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. � Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "iJL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede � operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for � new fixtures. � END OF SECTION 017700 � � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-6 � � �: , � � � � t SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA � � , � PARTl -GENERAL � �; , � 1.1 SUMMARY � A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and � ' maintenance manuals, including the following: �. � � 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. E ' 2. Emergency manuals. � 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. � 4. Product maintenance manuals. z � 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. � 7 E B. Related Requirements: � ' � : 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual � � requirements for the Work in those Sections. ; � ' � 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ` ' ` A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual � Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed � manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. & � � 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are ` acceptable. � ' ' 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions � and field conditions. 4 � B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: � ! , ;: l. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. � Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. � � � a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable � � item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance � ' � directory. � b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. � ' � 2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose � title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect,through Construction Manager,will return two copies. ' � � C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for , Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. � � Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. � ' � � OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 � � � � � � � � 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's � comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. � PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 REQUIlZEMENTS FOR EMERGENCY,OPERATION,AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS � ` A. Direc tory: Prepare a sing le, compre hensive direc t ory o f e m e r g e n c y, o p e r a t i o n, a n d maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to ' desired information. � B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. � Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. � 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. C. Title Page: Include the following information: � 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. � 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittaL 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. � 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. � 9. Names and contact infortnation for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. ntents: List each roduct included in manual identified b roduct name indexed � D. Table of Co p , y p , to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. � E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, � equipment,and components of one system into a single binder. F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic � PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable � file size. � OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -2 � � � $ � � � � } � �. � � G. Manuals,Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy,bound and labeled volumes. � � 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness � ' necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-]/2-by-1 l-inch (215-by-280-mm) � paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with � pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. � ' � a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND � MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name,and subject matter of � ' � contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. �' � 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. � ' Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components € of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification � Section number and title of Project Manual. � 3. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. k ' E � a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and � use as foldouts. � ' b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled �� envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in ` � manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, � � and drawing locations. =. � `}. g , 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS ` � A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in � individual Specification Sections and the following information: � ' ' 1. S stem subs stem and e ui ment descri tions. Use desi ations for s stems and � Y � Y � q P P �► Y # equipment indicated on Contract Documents. g ' ' 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 4 3. Operating standards. � . 4. Operating procedures. � ' � 5. Operating logs. � 6. Wiring diagrams. � � 7. Control diagrams. � 8. Piped system diagrams. � : � 9. Precautions against improper use. a 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. ¢ '; � � B. Descriptions: Include the following: � � � l. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract � � Documents. ; 2. Manufacturer's name. � 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. ` ' 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. _ 6. Limiting conditions. � ' # � � OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -3 � � � � � 7. Performance curves. � 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: � 1. Startup procedures. � 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. � 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. � 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as � installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for � identification. 23 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS � A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and � sources,and warranties and bonds,as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and � arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. � C. Product Information: Include the following,as applicable: 1. Product nane and model number. � 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color,pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. � 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: � 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. � 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. � � OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -4 � � , � � � � � E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and � related services. n � � � F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and � conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. � � , f i` 2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS r � ' � A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include � source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, � maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service � � contracts,and warranty and bond information, as described below. � B. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation � including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: � ' � 1. Standazd maintenance instructions and bulletins. t � 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly g ' and component removal,replacement, and assembly. � 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. � 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. � ' � C. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential ; � maintenance procedures: � � � 1. Test and inspection instructions. � 2. Troubleshooting guide. { ; 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. � � 4. Disassembly; component removal,repair,and replacement; and reassembly instructions. � 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. �. 6. Demonstration and trainin video recordin , if available. �' g g � , ' � D. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of £ required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine 3 3 � maintenance and service with standard time allotment. E. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with � parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local �' � sources of maintenance materials and related services. � � � ,•. F. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and � �;'.. � telephone number of service agent. � G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and � , conditions that would affect validity of warranties ar bonds. € � � � � � � F : ' � � OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -5 � ' � � G � � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS � A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. � 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide � information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be � difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. ' 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recarding graphic information in production of marked-up record � ' prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. � 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD � DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into � manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. � 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. � b. Date. c. Designation"PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. � 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS � A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications,addenda, and contract modifications. � 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. � 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. � PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -2 � � � � � � , e 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. ` 4. Note related Change Orders,record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. � ' t B. Format: Submit record Specifications as one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of � marked-up paper copy of Specifications. � t ' � 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA � ' � A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation � varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. ' 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that t cannot be readily identified and recorded later. f 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in ' ' ' manufacturer's written instructions for installation. � 3. Note related Change Orders,record Specifications, and record Drawings where � applicable. � � ' ` B. Format: Submit record Product Data as one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of � marked-up paper copy of Product Data. ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION { �; , � 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE - r : � t A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project fi record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they � occur; do not wait until end of Project. � ' B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the � field office aparE from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record £ ' documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, =' dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record £ documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. � � � END OF SECTION 017839 € , � � � � , � �: � ' � � , � � PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-3 € ' � � � � ' ` � � , Y , t SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � ' 1.1 SUMMARY � A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, _ , ' including the following: ' 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. ' 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. � 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. � ' � 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ; 3 , A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional progam for demonstration and training, _ including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of � instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective � , and outline for each training module. i 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and ` : training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording °` ' of live instructional module. ; ; �: , 13 COORDINATION r � A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to # '�! ' minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. Do not = conduct instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and ; approved by Architect. ' *` PART 2-PRODUCTS � � ' � 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM ,. A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules � ' for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification � Sections. '' , � l. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. ' , b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. F c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. ' z � DEMONSTR.ATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1 f' , � f � � e. Equipment function. � £ Operating characteristics. r� g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. � 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Operations manuals. � b. Maintenance manuals. c. Project record documents. : d. Identification systems. � e. Warranties and bonds. £ Maintenance service agreements and similar contmumg commitments. 3. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: � a. Stariup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. � c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. � f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. � i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem,or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. � m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Adjustments: Include the following: � a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. � c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. : 5. Troubleshooting: Include the following: � a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. � 6. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. � b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. a List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. � d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. £ Procedures for routine maintenance. � g. Instruction on use of special tools. � DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-2 � � � � § � �: , ' 4 7. Repairs: Include the following: � r a. Diagnosis instructions. � , b. Repair instructions. � c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly � instructions. �' ' d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. E e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. � � � , PART 3 -EXECUTION � � , 3.1 PREPARATION � � ; A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation. � ' € 3.2 INSTRUCTION � ' � A. Instructor's shall include, at a minimum, the person responsible for supervision and installation � � of the system being demonstrated. Provide other instructors, such as manufacturer's � , representative, as needed to fully discribe the operation of the system being demonstrated. � 1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. � ; 2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. ` � ' B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires � seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at start of each season. � ' 1. Schedule training with Owner,through Construction Manager, with at least seven days' � advance notice. � � ' ' C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully ? operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation } and maintenance data submittals. ? � ' � END OF SECTION 017900 T ' _ k j: i , � , � T , , g DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-3 ' � , � � � , � � , � SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIltEMENTS � � ' , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � �I ' � l.l SiJNIlVIARY � � A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC � ' LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Silver certification based on ` LEED-NC,Version 2.2. : r. � ' B. Related Sections: � � 1. Divisions O1 through 33 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of � ' , these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED. � � � ' ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS � � �: A. LEED: Leadership in Energy&Environmental Design. � ' , B. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as � manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or � material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage � ' ' (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value. � e � C. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by � ' , weight. � � 1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by ' commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, � which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. � 2. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the � manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or � ' scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that � generated it. ' � ' ' � 13 ACTION SUBMITTALS � } � ' A. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for building materials used � for Project, excluding mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components, and specialty items ; such as elevators and equipment. ' , B. LEED Documentation Submittals: 1. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Product data and certification letter indicating � percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products � t having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having £ recycled content. �� ' E £} 3 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 1 � ' � � � 2. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating location � and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. � , 3. Credit EQ 3.1: a. Construction indoor-air-quality management plan. � b. Product data for temporary filtration media. c. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. d. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach � employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-air-quality management , measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive ' : materials. � 4. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L � , calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 5. Gedit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing , system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L � calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 6. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin. � 1.4 1NFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 60 days of date established for � commencement of the Work indicating how the following requirements will be met: 1. Credit MR 4.1: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post- � consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. � 2. Credit MR 5.1: List of proposed regional materials. Identify each regional material, including its source,cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. B. LEED Progress Reports: Once per month, provide updates comparing actual construction and � purchasing activities with LEED action plans. PART 2-PRODUCTS � : 2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS � A. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Provide building materials with recycled content such that � post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project. � � SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 -2 � � . , � � � � ': , � 1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing � weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and = multiplying by cost of the item. � , 2. Cost of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content � of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content plus � one-half of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and � ' multiplying by cost of the item. � 3. Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculation. � r � ' � 2.2 REGIONAL MATERIALS ;` � A. Credit MR 5.1 and MR 5.2: Provide 20 percent of building materials(by cost)that are regional � ' materials. p � ' 23 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS � k � A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives � , and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according �, to SCAQNID Rule#1168 and Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36: ,: � ' 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. � 2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. � 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials(Except Wood): 50 g/L. � ' 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. �' 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. �, 6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. � 7. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. � ' 8. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. ` 9. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. � 10. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. � ' 11. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. � 12. Fiberglass t�dhesives: 80 g/L. � 13. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. � ' 14. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. � 15. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. � 16. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L. � ' 17. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L. 4 18. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. �, 19. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. � , 20. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L. � 21. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 22. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. � 23. Aerosol Adhesive,General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. � ' 24. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive(All Types): 70 percent by weight. � 25. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. x 26. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. � � 27. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. � 28. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. � � 29. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. � , � SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIlZEMENTS 018113 -3 � , � � 30. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. � 31. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 32. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and � coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24) � C. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products or adhesives that contain urea- formaldehyde resin. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 REFRIGERANT REMOVAL A. Prerequisite EA 3: Remove CFC-based refrigerants from existing HVAC&R equipment � indicated to remain and replace with refrigerants that are not CFC based. Replace or adjust existing equipment to accommodate new refrigerant as described in Division 23 Sections. � 3.2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT A. Credit EQ 3.1: Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings � under Construction." 1. Use of permanent cooling and ventilating systems during construction period is not � allowed. � END OF SECTION 018113 � � � � � � � SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIItEMENTS 018113 -4 , � � a ' � k � � , ' � SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIltEMENTS � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS � � � '' ' A. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only. � � �: � ` ' 1.2 SUMMARY � � A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without � regard to specific systems,assemblies, or components. � ' � B. Related Sections: � 1. Division 22 Section "Commissioning of Plumbing" for commissioning process activities � ,', ' for plumbing systems, assemblies,equipment,and components. � 2. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for � HVAC&R systems, assemblies,equipment, and components. � ' 3. Division 26 Section "Commissioning of Electrical Systems" for commissioning process � activities for electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. � � � ' 13 DEFINITIONS � � � A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product � ' ' selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standazds, � and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items � that support the design process. � ; ' � B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of � € resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. � 1 � C. C�cA: Commissioning Authority. � � � D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a � ; ' project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, � measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and � supporting information. � ': ' � E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or � separately,they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components. � ' s Y 3 t � � s � ' � � F GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIlZEMENTS 019113 - 1 � , � � � � � 1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM � A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals,each having the authority to act on behalf of � the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, � suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA. B. Members Appointed by Owner: � 1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract. � 2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personneL 3. Architect and engineering design professionals. � 1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use. � B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities. � C. Provide the BoD documentation,prepared by Architect and approved by Owner,to the CxA and Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and � maintenance training plan. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES � A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not � limited to,the following: 1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with � entity responsible for system and equipment installation,recommend corrective action. 2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. 3. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a variable basis. � 4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 5. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CacA. 6. Complete paper construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the � Commissioning Authority on an ageed upon basis. 7. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the Commissioning Authority. � 8. Complete commissioning process test procedures. � GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 -2 ' � i � ' � � . � , ' � 1.7 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES ` `z 'r A. Organize and lead the commissioning team. � , , � B. Provide commissioning plan. ' C. Convene commissioning team meetings. � � D. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures. � ' ' ¢ E. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The � sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, � ' and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the � requirement,the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log. K � ' F. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log. � � G. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log. � ' ' H. Witness systems, assemblies,equipment, and component startup. � � � ' ' I. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and � commissioning process report. � ; , ' � PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) , PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) � $ ' END OF SECTION 019113 � � % � ' ` � ' � � � , � � � , � � � ' � � ' � � � GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 -3 � � � � r � ' � , � SECTION 024119- SELECTNE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION � � , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SUMNIARY � � ' ' A. Section Includes: ¢ � � , ' 1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. � � � 1.2 DEFINITIONS ± , ; A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless � indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. � ' � B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and � that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and : ' reinstalled. � ; r. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS � ' � � A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. �' , � �: 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS ` ' i A. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding � with selective demolition. � � � B. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the � Work. � �: ' � 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. € 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify � Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate ; � contract. `' � � C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 4 , � D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them � against damage during selective demolition operations. : , _ � ' z � � SELECTNE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119- 1 �: , � � � � � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities � having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSUASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition � operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of � selective demolition required. C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction � photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Photographic � Documentation." 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS � A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and � protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division O1 Section "Summary." � B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services to be selectively demolished. � 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain � continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. � � � SELECTNE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-2 � � � ' � � s , � F. k , 3.3 PREPARATION � � � A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal ; � operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other �' adjacent occupied and used facilities. �: � ' ' 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division O1 Section � "Temporaty Facilities and Controls." � � �: , B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent � injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. _ � �: C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required �. . , to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement,or collapse of adjacent structures. ' 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION,GENERAL � � A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new � ' � construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of ; governing regulations and as follows: � t 1. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in � ' Division O1 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." � � B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling � � ' during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, t: protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations � after selective demolition operations are complete. z � ' � 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS � ; , A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled,reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or �' otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project � site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved IandfilL � ' � 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. � 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces � , and areas. �. 3. Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Construction Waste � Management and Disposal." r � � ' B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. � C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. � ' z � t ' 4 �: S SELECTNE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119—3 � ' � � � � 3.6 CLEANING � : A. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. � END OF SECTION 024119 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � SELECTNE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-4 � t � ' � � �: ' ;' SECTION 033000-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 3 ' � PART 1 -GENERAL ` , � 1.1 SUMMARY � , A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, � mixture design,placement procedures, and finishes. ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS �. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � ' � B. LEED Submittals: '' { ' 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation e. indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. �: a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. ` , � 2. Design Miartures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a � replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements, and for � ' equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. �. z- C. Design Mu�tures: For each concrete mixture. i , � D. Steel Reinforcement 3hop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and k placement. � ' . � E. Welding certificates. � t � F. Material certificates. � ' � G. Material test reports. � � ' H. Floor surface flatness a.nd levelness measurements. ;' � ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE z f A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete � products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and � ' ' equipment. ¢ 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete � ' Production Facilities." � � ' � �- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 1 �, , : � � B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,acceptable to authorities having � jurisdiction,qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, � "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel." � D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract � Documents: l. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." � E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. � F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and � smooth concrete surfaces. Fumish in lazgest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. � Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT � A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel � products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420),deformed. � C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. � D. Bar Supports: Bolsters,chairs, spacers,and other devices for spacing, supporting,and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel � wire,plastic,or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice. � � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-2 � � ' & � � � ' � � � ' � 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS � �: r ' A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and � source,throughout Project: � � l. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type UII. Supplement with the following: � ' ' a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Class F or C.� � � E ' b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33,graded. � ' 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch(19 mm)nominal. � 2. Fine A�gregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. � ,; � ' C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. � � . � f- � t2.4 ADMIX'TURES � A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. �` i , B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer tb be compatible with � other admuctures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those � permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium � ' chloride. ;: 3 1. Water-Reducing Admucture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. � ' 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B. x 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D. � 4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F. � ' S. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, ;;;: Type G. � 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 101'7/C 1017M,Type II. � � ' � 2.5 WATERSTOPS � � , A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of �. fluids througln joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. � � { ' B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572,[with factory-installed metal eyelets,] for � embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, } intersections,and directional changes. � � ' k € ' � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 � ' � � � � 2.6 CURING MATERIALS � A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. � B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m}when dry. � C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. . � D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, � dissipating. F. Clear, Waterbome, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating,certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of � floor covering. : G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, � Type 1,Class A. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS � A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber � or ASTM D 1752,cork or self-expanding cork. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES � A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of � . laboratory trial mixture or field test data,or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement,which would otherwise be used, � by not less than 20 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,or other adverse placement conditions. D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per structural notes. � 2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT � A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 � � � � ' f � ' t 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING � � A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ' ' ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. � 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 3�deg C), reduce mixing and � ' delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 � deg C�reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. � �- k � ' � �:�� .;�� , ��r��_��j � � _ � , , , � �' � � � � ' _ - � s �� ° �� i �'{ � f '�� }( Y l r t � � �# � �h._. _._. ��. o,.,... .9 ... Y_�.....,.s..s�_ .,:... .. „n�,.. u ,�Y...... . .._.. . ....�.__ F .::. ..::�� ,..: . �. .. . . �. . ` . `s; ��' � Gr ._:�': Y ��'SIfrV �� E. , � °F,._. . ..... °�. ... � e ... -.:�n. k..- .... , r.. _...... s. .. �. ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' 3.1 FORMWORK � �: A. Design, erect, shore, bra.ce, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, _ ' lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure � can support such loads. -' �; ' B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, ` elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 4, � ' C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. � � � � , 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS e. A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that � is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, � ,, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. ; f} ' F. 33 STEEL REINFORCEMENT � 4 A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. � , � � ' �', � ' � � % f CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 5 � ' � E; £ R � � 3.4 JOINTS � A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. � B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at , locations indicated or as approved by Architect. ' C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened- lane contraction 'oints sectionin � P J � g concrete into areas as indicated. Co�nstruct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- ' fourth of concrete thickness as follows: � 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fmishing each edge of joint to a radius of lf8 inch(3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints • � after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-)wide joints into concrete � , when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab � junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations,as indicated. E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to � manufacturer's written instructions. � 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded � ; items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new � concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. � 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating eyuipment according to ACI 301. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. � D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. � � ` � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 � � � , � � � ., , � 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES � � � A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes { ' and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified � limits on formed-surface irregularities. � ' , 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. $ F B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in ' ' an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and i defects. Remove fins and otl�er projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface t irregularities. , , 1. , Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.. ; C. Related Unformed Surfaces; At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces � ' adjacent to formed surfaces, strilce off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent ; formed surfaces. Continue fmal surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. � ' � 3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS � ' � A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and � finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. , B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small � or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. _ Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular : , texture. � 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. � ' � C. Trowel Finish: After applying float fmish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by � hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of = ' trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that � would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. ' 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, �. ' carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film- i finish coating system. � ' 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an t unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.-(3.0�-m-)long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch(6 mm). � ; ' D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces_where ceramic or quarry � tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, _ slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. � ' 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. ' � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 �� ' � � E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and � elsewhere as indicated. PR TECTING AND CURING � 3.8 CONCRETE O A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot � temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI301 for hot- weather protection during curing. Evaporation Retard�r: Apply evaporation reta�der to unformed concr.ete surfaces if.hot, dry, or � windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h(1 kg/sq.m x h)before and during fmishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float fmishing. � B. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1,by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. � 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped � at least 12 inches(300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. � 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instFUCtions. Recoat azeas subjected to heavy rainfall ' within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair � damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound � manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a � continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial � application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 CONC RETE SURFACE REPAIRS � A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove � and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. � � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 � � � ' ' �; � � ' 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � ' A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform � field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. z � ' � END OF SECTION 033000 ; b � ' f S ' � [ F tp 7 ' � j. � ' � � ' � f �: � ' � � F f ' � P: ' � � ' �' c h � P ' } [ f s ' � � e , "s � ' � � � ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 033000-9 F � � � � � � � � � � ' F F £ SECTION 042200-CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � { � ' ' 1.1 SUNIlVIARY � i g A. Section Includes: � ' � 1. Concrete masonry units(CMU's). � 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. � ' 3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. � 4. Steel reinforcing bars. � 5. Masonry-cell insulation. � i � � 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING � ' � A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to � perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with � specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. � ' � 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 � for compressive strength. k , , 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to � ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength �. 3. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. � , � � 13 SUBMITTALS � . ' � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � �. , B. LEED Submittals: � 1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1: For products and materials required to comply � with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of x „ ' material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. � Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight � that is considered regional. : ' ' � C. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry � reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete � ' , Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. ° �: � D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include � ' ' data on material properties or material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. F' e � , § � � x � � CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200- 1 � ' �' � � � � E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of � ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with properiy specification. Test � according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention,and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with � compressive strength requirement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/T'MS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. � B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division O1 Section "Quality � Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical interior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches(1200 mm)high by full thickness. � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost "�'� or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in � ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in � ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 MASONRY UNITS,GENERAL � A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units � where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. ; 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS � A. Regional Materials: Provide CMLTs that have been manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of � Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,within 500 miles($00 km) of Project site. � CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 -2 � � � ' �I ; , ' � B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,bonding,and other special conditions. ' 1 � C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. � , 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive : , strength of 2800 psi (l 9.3 MPa). � 2. Density Classification: Medium weight unless otherwise indicated. } �. � ' 2.3 MASONRY LINTELS ' � A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMLJs � j ' with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. � , ' fr 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS } A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and gout,cement, and lime that have been � , extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of � Project site. � � ' B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather � construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color F indicated. _ � , C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. �: � D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing � , no other ingredients. � E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. ' ' F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. � � ' G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.. H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. � 3 ' ' �; I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with � ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar �. � of composition indicated. , 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' a. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Accelguard 80. t � b. Grace Construction Products,W. R. Grace&Co. -Conn.; Morset. � ' c. Sonneborn Products,BASF Aktiengesellschaft;Trimix-NCA. �� J. Water: Potable. � E , � � CONCRETE iJNIT MASONRY 042200-3 ; ' � � � 2.5 REINFORCEMENT � A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). � B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement,General: AST'M A 951/A 951M. 1. Interiar Walls: Mill-or hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. � 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized,carbon or stainless steeL 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: O.l 48-inch(3.77-n�m)diameter. � 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77amn)diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch(3.77anm)diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs,and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches(4U7 mm) o.a 7. Provide in lengths of not less than l 0 feet(3 m),with prefabricated corner and tee units. � 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS � A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. � 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. � 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Partition To anchors: 0.105-inch- 2.66-�r►m- thick metal late with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) � P � ) P diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube ' fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip � galvanized after fabrication. C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A � (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. � 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Com ressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; � P compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying � with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in � masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, � Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt). � CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 -4 � � ' � � ' � 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES �: �. A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, : , retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise � indicated. � � , 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. � 2. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise � indicated. � ' 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement �; mortar. _ 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement � , mortar. �: 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to � view,regardless of weather conditions,to ensure that mortar color is consistent. f ' B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. � Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients � before delivering to Project site. � ' C. Mortar for Unit Maso : Com ly with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the € �' p ,. following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. � ' �. � 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth,use Type M or Type S. � 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. s 3. For morta.r parge coats, use Type S or Type N. � ' � 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for � interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other � ' applications where another type is not indicated,use Type N. � 5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions,Type O may be used instead of Type N. � � � ' D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. � €: 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type(fine or coarse)that will � comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces � ' and pour height. E 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for � specified 28-day compressive strength indicated,but not less than 300U psi (21 MPa). � ' 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to l l inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to � ASTM C 143/C 143M. � � � ' Y � i Z , s. t S' 3 ' #} Z ' �: � �' , CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 5 , � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 TOLERANCES � A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 � mm)or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch(12 mm). � 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch(12 mm)total. : B. Lines and Levels: � 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than l/4 � inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than l/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m}, l/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 � m),or ]/2 inch (12 mm)ma�cimum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(l2 mm)maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and � expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in l U feet(3 min in 3 m}, lJ4 inch i.n 20 feet(6 mm in 6 tn), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)ma�cimum. 5. Far lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in � 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm)maximum. C. Joints: � 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm),with a m�imum thickness limited to l/2 inch(12 mm). � 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch(9 mm)or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm). � 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS � A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. � Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous � pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, � CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-6 � � � � c : ' unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install � cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible,cut edges concealed. � � , C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in � running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (]00-mm) horizontal face . dimensions at corners or jambs. � , �: D. Built-in Work: As construction progesses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. �: Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. � ' � E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. � F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of � ' metal lath,wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or gout into core. � G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,beams, lintels, � , posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. s E ' 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING r � A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: � r , 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. � 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns,and pilasters. ( 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on � , footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. � ' * B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient � mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head = ' joints. a C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint ' thickness unless otherwise indicated. a � D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)unless otherwise indicated. 1 F l 7: 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT , A. General: Install entire len h of lon itudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 � � g inch (16 mm} on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (l 3 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a , minimum of 6 inches(l 50 mm). ' � 1. Space reinforcement not more than ]6 inches(4q6 mm)o.c. ' 2. Provide reinforcement not more than $ inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings = and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous � reinforcement. � ' � � CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-7 f ' � � € � B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. � C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. � 3.5 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION � A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. � l. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as ' : indicated. Make forms suff'iciently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, � tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened � sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. � C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. � 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout ' placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. � 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches(1520 mm). 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections � and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Ins ections: Leve12 s ecial ins ections accordin to the "International Building Code." � : P P P g l. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- � prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,and locations of reinforcement. � 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. � D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 2000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m} of wall area or portion thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for � compressive strength. ' � CONCRETE LJNIT MASONRY 042200 - 8 � � � , � � � ' t F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to E ASTM C 780. � ' � G. Mortar Test(Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test � mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. �;' � , H. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. � ;: � � ' 3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING � � A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove � � mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. � � B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: � ' � 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned far � comparison purposes. � 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to ± ' type of stain on exposed surfaces. � ; � � � � 3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL � � A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- � � contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill ; material as fill is placed. � �. � ' 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within l 8 inches(450 mm)of finished grade. � � B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as z described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. � ' p: � END OF SECTION 042200 � ' ` ; � � ' ' g. � L ' £ � � f , �: `€ ! € [ ' g i � , � i � ' CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-9 � i � � i � ' F } �: , ' SECTION 044300 THIN VENEER STONE �: � � # , PART 1 GENERAL � � l.l SUMMARY � ' � A. Section Includes: � , 1. Thin cut veneer masonry construction of natural stone set in cement mortar � ' over a structural wall backing of: � � a. Plywood sheathing. ` ' � b. Concrete masonry ? 2. Special decorative sawn thin veneer stone shapes for trim. ' ` 3. Installation of built-in accessories. � # f` ' B. Related Sections = 1. Section 042200-Unit Masonry: Masonry supporting wall. � �: � ' 2. Section 054000-Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Formed steel framed � supporting wall. � y ' 3. Section 061000-Framing and Sheathing: Wood frame supporting wa1L � � 4. Section 072500-Weather Barriers ' S. Section 072100-Building Insulation: Composite nail base insulated sheathing. � �, 6. Section 076200- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. ' 7. Section 079200-Joint Sealers: Sealant for perimeter and control joints. q> 1.2 REFERENCES � i , A. Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute-Adhered Natural Stone Veneer Installation ; Guide � � t ' B. ASTM C 97- Standard Specification for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of � Dimension Stone. � ' C. ASTM C 99- Standard Specification for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. � D. ASTM C 144 -Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. a` �: ' E. ASTM C 150- Standard Specifica.tion for Portland Cement. ;' F. AST'M C 170-Standard Specification for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. � ' G. ASTM C 207- Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. i � � H. ASTM C 270-Mortar for Unit Masonry. , � THIN STONE VENER 044300-1 � ' i � � I. ASTM C 568- Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone. � J. ASTM C 780-Preconstruction Evaluation of Mortar for Plain&Reinforced , Masonry. � K. ASTM C 847- Standard Specification for Metal Lath. L. ASTM C 1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to � Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster. M. ASTM D 226- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in � Roofing and Waterproofmg. N. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402-Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. O. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 -Specifications for Masonry Structures. � P. PCA-Portland Cement Plaster(Stucco)Manual � 13 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 � Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures,ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures and the applicable Building Code. B. Design,fabricate,and install stonework to withstand normal loads from wind,gravity, ,� movement of building structure,and thermally induced movement,as well as to resist deterioration under conditions of normal use including exposure to weather,without � failure. C. Design to include provisions to prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with non-compatible � materials, or by suitable coating. 1.4 SUBMITTALS � A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Delegated Design: Design attachment of inetal lath through composite nail base � insulated sheathing to underlying steel studs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, in accordance with 2009 IBC Section 1405.11 and wind criteria indicated on structural drawings. � C. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: . 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. � 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Cleaning methods. D. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C 270 is to be � used,with required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. E. Selection Samples: For each stone product specified, submit two samples,minimum � . size 48 inches(1216 mm)square,representing actual product, color,and texture. � THIN STONE VENER 044300-2 � € � ' � � : � , �: F. Samples: Submit samples of mortar representing actual mortar color and color range. G. Quarrier's Certificate: Certify stone properties conform to specified requirements. ' � H. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify mortar and accessory products meet or exceed � specified requirements. ' 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS g � � A. Stone Quarrier: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this € , section with minimum five years documented experience. � � B. Stone Masonry Company: Company specializing in performing Work of this section � with minimum five years documented experience. � 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE � x ' A. Preconstruction Meetings:Conduct preconstruction meetings including the Architect, � Contractor, stone masonry subcontractor,and the flashing subcontractor to verify � project requirements, substrate conditions,manufacturer's installation instructions �: ' and other requirements.Comply with Division 1 requirements. 4' i B. Construct sample panel at location indicated or directed,and as follows: � 1. Size: 8 feet by 8 feet(2.4 m by 2.4 m)or a size that satisfies the architect. � t 2. Include all stone unit types and sizes to be used including a typical corner �. condition, special shapes and mortar joint treatment. Clean the sample panel � x ' using the same materials and tools as planned for the fmal stone masonry � construction. � 3. Obtain architect's acceptance of sample panel before beginning construction ` activities of this section. t 4. Do not remove sample panel until construction activities of this section have ;` been accepted by the Architect. ` 5. Remove sample panel at the completion of the work. � ' 6. Sample panel may be incorporated into the work. � 1.7 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � � ' A. Store products on pallets,under cover and in manufacturer's unopened packaging � until ready for installation. � , B. Store stone materials on pallets on a dry level surface.Pallets shall not be stacked and � shall be covered with tarps. �` E , C. Store mortar under cover and in an area where temperature is maintained between 4 = degrees C(40 degrees F)to 43 degrees C(110 degrees F). �` � 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS t � A. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/'TMS E 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures. � � ' B. Ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees F(4.4 degrees C)or above during erection � of stone masonry.When ambient temperature falls below 50 degrees F,mortar mixing water shall be heated. ' ' � < � THIN STONE VENER 044300-3 � ' �: � � � PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer:Robinson Brick Co, 1820 East Lincoln Ave,Fort Collins, � CO 80524,970-484-1292,robinsonbrick.com. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section � 012500. 2.2 VENEER STONE � � A. : Sawed Face T e: Robinson Rock Natural Thin Rock Kiamichi sawed face Y� � 1�. �Lengths: Random 5 to 36 inches. � 2. Heights: 1 3/4 to 11 1/2 inches bedface. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inches(19 mm). 4. Material shall conform to ASTM C 568 with the following properties: � a. Maximum absorption rate of 2.70 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 97. 2 to 9 inches(51 to 229 mm)machine cut veneer,6 to : 14 inches(152 to 356 mm)bedface. � b. Minimum density of 156 lbs/cubic ft when tested in accordance with ASTM C 97. ' c. Minimum compressive strength of 13,270 average psi when tested in � accordance with ASTM C 170. B. Rough Face Type: Robinson Rock Natural Thin Rock Kiamichi natural cleft faced. 1. Lengths: Random 5 to 36 inches. � 2. Heights: 1 3/4 to 11 1/2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/4 to 1-1/4 inches(19 mm to 32 mm). 4. Material shall conform to ASTM C 568 with the following properties: � a. Maximum absorption rate of 2.70 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 97.2 to 9 inches(51 to 229 mm)machine cut veneer,6 to 14 inches(152 to 356 mm)bedface. � b. Minimum density of 1561bs/cubic ft when tested in accordance with ASTM C 97. c. Minimum compressive strength of 13,270 average psi when tested in � accordance with ASTM C 170. 23 SPECIAL SHAPES � A. Provide special sawn veneer shapes as indicated on the Drawings and as follows: 1. Watertables 2. Sills. � 3. Banding/Belt Course. B. Stone shall be furnished in sizes indicated plus or minus 1/2 inch(12.5 mm).Materials � shall conform to the properties specified for the materials specified. � � THIN STONE VENER 044300-4 � � ' � � k ' fl � � � C. Color sha11 be: � � � L � �� as manufactured by Robinson Brick. _ D. Finish shall be: � � ' ' 1. Bottom and side edges- Sawn. � 2. Top and front edge- Split face � 2.4 ACCESSORIES � , A. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C 847,galvanized, self-furring,minimum 2.5 lb or 18 � gauge. � ' B. Anchorage: Tie wire,nails, screws and other metal supports, galvanized,of type and � size to suit application and to rigidly secure materials in place. � , C. Setting buttons or shims: Lead or plastic. D. Weather-resistive Barrier: Water resistive barrier specified under Section 072500 at � ' plywood substrates. � E. Concrete Bonding Agent:Thorobond water-based polyvinyl acetate type as approved � � ' by the stone quarrier at CMLJ or concrete substrates.. � � 2.5 MORTAR � A. Masonry Cement: Complying with ASTM C91: � ' 1. Type N. � � ' B. Portland Cement: Complying with ASTM C150: � 1. Type I. C. Mortar Aggregate: Complying with ASTM C144, standard masonry type. ' D. Hydrated Lime: Complying with ASTM C207: � � 1. Type S. � ' � E. Water: Clean and potable. � � � 2.6 MIXES � ' � A. Mortar Mixes: � 1. Mortar for Structural Masonry: Complying with ASTM C270,using ; ' Proportion Specification. � a. Type N. � � � B. Mortar Mixing: � , �' 1. Mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270.Mix only in quantities x needed for immediate use. � 2. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. � ' � x E � ' � r, � ' THIN STONE VENER 044300-5 � $ � s: �' � � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Do not begin installation until backing struchue is plumb,bearing surfaces are level and substrates are clean and properly prepared. � B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location,and ready for roughing into stone masonry. : __ _ � C. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 STONE PREPARATION � A. Stone must be water saturated, surface-dry when placed. Water down the stone 24 hours prior to placement until saturated. Reapply water to keep stone saturated as � required by weather conditions. B. Coordinate placement of flashings and other moisture control products supplied by other sections. � C. Clean all built-in items of loose rust, ice,mud, or other foreign matter before incorporating into the wall.All ferrous metal built into the wall shall be primed or � galvanized. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR 1NSTALLATION OVER PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Cover sheathing with two layers of weather-resistive barrier with all joints lapped � shingle style a minimum of 4 inches(102 mm). � B. Install metal lath m accordance wrth ASTM C1063. Apply metal lath ta.ut,wrth long dimension perpendicular to supports.Lap ends minimum 1 inch(25 mm) Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. � C. Attach metal lath through composite nail base insulative sheathing to metal stud supports using Atlas Roofmg Corporation Atlas Nail Base Fasteners or equal at maximum 6 inches(152 mm)on center verticaliy and'16 inches(406 mm)on center � horizontally. Stop lath 1 inch(25 mm)from finished edges.Fasteners shall penetrate a minimum of 3/8 inch(0.9525 cm) into the metal stud support members. Provide 1 fastener per SF of surface area and do not exceed 6 inches(152 mm)on center in any � one direction. D. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh. � E. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door and glazed frames. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OVER CONCRETE OR CONCRETE � � MA�ONRY A. Clean or sandblast concrete masonry to assure a proper mortar bond.Verify no � bituminous,water repellent,or form release agents exist on concrete surface that are detrimental to mortar bond. � THIN STONE VENER 044300-6 � � ' � �. � ' B. Apply bonding agent in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. � � C. Install metal lath in accordance with ASTM C 1063.Apply metal lath taut,with long € ' dimension perpendicular to supports.Lap ends minimum 1 inch(25 mm) Secure end � laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. � � ' D. Attach metal lath to concrete using galvanized concrete nails at maximum 6 inches � (152 mm)on center vertically and 16 inches(406 mm)on center horizontally. Stop � lath 1 inch(25 mm)from fmished edges. � ' � � E. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh. � F. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door and glazed frames. � ' � 3.5 APPLICATION OF BASE COAT STUCCO � � ' A. Apply scratch coat in accordance with PCA Plaster(Stucco)Manual. � B. Apply scratch coat to nominal thickness of 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch(13 mm to 19 mm) � ' over metal lath surfaces at concrete or concrete masonry substrate and 3/8"to 1/2" at � plywood substrate. � �; ' C. If weather is hot or surface is dry, dampen previous coat before applying mortar and � r: thin stone veneer. � D. If scratch coat is done in advance,use notch trowel to create texture for better bond. �. ' Smooth surface is not acceptable for bond. � � 3.6 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF THIN VENEER STONE � ' A. Stone must be water saturated, surface-dry when placed. Water down the stone 24 � hours prior to placement until saturated.Reapply water to keep stone saturated as � required by weather conditions. �: ' � B. Coordinate placement of reinforcement,anchors and accessories, flashings and other �; moisture control products supplied by other sections. : ' � C. Clean all built-in items of loose rust, ice,mud,or other foreign matter before � incorporating into the wall.All ferrous metal built into the wall sha11 be primed or � , galvanized. � � D. If required,provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work.Maintain � bracing in place until building structure provides permanent support. � ' �; 3.7 INSTALLATION OF THIN VENEER STONE A. Install thin veneer stone and mortar in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 � ' Specifications for Masonry Structures. � � B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension(s).Form vertical and horizontal � ' joints of uniform thickness. � � ' � THIN STONE VENER 044300-7 � ' � � � � � � C. Pattern Bond: 1. At rough faced application,lay stone with the bedface, splitface or weather � edge exposed.At sawed face application,lay stone with sawed face exposed. If a color blend is being used,take care to avoid a concentration of any one color to any one wall surface. � 2. Maintain an appro�cimate 1/2 inch(12.5 mm)joint, as stone allows. 3. Do not use stacked vertical joints. 4. Lay out work in advance and distribute color range of stone uniformly over � total work area. D. Placing and Bonding: 1. Dampen substrate as required to reduce excessive suction. � 2. Apply mortar in accordance with PCA Plaster(Stucco)Manual to a thickness of 1/2 to 3/4 inch(12.5 mm to 19 mm)Do not spread more than a workable area of 5 to 10 SF(.46 to .93 SM)so that mortar will not set before stone is applied. � 3. Lay thin veneer stone in a full bed of mortar with full joints. 4. Work from the bottom up laying corner pieces first. 5. Remove excessive mortar as work progresses. � ; 6. Do not shift or tap veneer stone after mortar has achieved initial set.Where adjustment is required,remove mortar and replace. ; 7. Isolate top of veneer stone from horizontal structural framing members and � slabs or decks with compressible joint filler and sealant in accordance with Section 079000. E. Joining Work: Where fresh masonry joints partially set masonry. � 1. Remove loose stone and mortar. 2. Clean and lightly wet surface of set masonry. 3. To avoid a horizontal run of masonry rack back 1/2 the length of stone in each � course. 4. Toothing is not permitted. F. Joints: � 1. Lay stone with an approlcimate 1/2 inch(12.5 mm)mortar joint,as stone allows. � 2. Tool joints when "thumb-print"hard with a jointer slightly larger than the width of the joint. 3. Trowel-point or concave tool exterior joints below grade. 4. Flush cut joints to be finished with a soft brush only. � 5. Retempering of mortaz is not permitted. 6. Use non-corrosive stone shims as required to maintain uniform joint thickness. G. Flashing: � 1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and remove any projections,which could damage flashings. � 2. Place flashing on a bed of mortar. 3. Cover flashing with mortar. 4. Provide weep vents at head joints placed every 16 inches(406 mm)along the first course immediately above flashing or as recommended by weep vent � manufacturer. � THIN STONE VENER 044300-8 � � ' . � ' � F ' � H. Control and Expansion Joints:Keep joints open and free of debris.Coordinate control � joint in accordance with Section 079000 for sealant performance. � ' I. Sealant Recesses: Provide open joint 3/4 inch(19 mm)deep and 1/4 inch(6 mm) � wide,where masonry meets doors,windows and other exterior openings. Coordinate � sealant joints in accordance with Section 079000 for sealant performance. � ' � J. Cutting And Fitting:Cut and fit for chases,pipes,conduit,sleeves,grounds,and other � penetrations and adjacent materials.Coordinate with other sections of work to provide � ' correct size, shape,and location. � 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � � ' A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 014000. � � � B. Testing of Mortar Mui: In accordance with AST'M C 780,Annex A4,for mortar c aggregate ratio and ASTM C 780,Annex A5,for mortar water content. � ' 3.9 PROTECTION � � ' A. Protect installed products until completion of project. � � � B. Cover the top of unfinished stone masonry work to protect it from the weather. � ' � C. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place. � � D. Prevent staining of stone from mortar,grout,sealants,and other sources.Immediately � p ' remove such materials from stone without damage to the stonework. � �: ' E. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. � ' � F. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar and sealants. � ' G. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. � 3.10 CLEANING ' t ' A. Keep the face of stone free of mortar as the work progresses. If residual mortar is on � the face of the stone, allow to dry partially and brush the mortar off the surface and � sponge off the residue. � ' B. When the work is completed and the mortar has set for 2 to 3 days the surface may be � cleaned from top to bottom using a mild masonry detergent accepta.ble to the stone � ' manufacturer.Do not use metal brushes or acids for cleaning. � � END OF SECTION 044300 � � ' � x � � , � � x ' � � THIN STONE VENER 044300-9 � ' � t � ' � , � SECTION 051200- STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING , � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � , � 1.1 SUNIMARY � � ' A. Section includes structural steel and grout. � 1.2 DEFINITIONS � , �� A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, Code of � Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." � , � � 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � � � � A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents � to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and � comply with other information and restrictions indicated. � ' � 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. � � 2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load leveL � B. Moment Connections: Type PR,partially restrained. � � , ' � 1.4 SUBMITTALS . � ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � � B. LEED Submittal: � '; i 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation � indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. g ! ' � C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. � � ! ' D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator and testing agency. � � E. Welding certificates. � ' � F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. � G. Source quality-control reports. � ' � � , � � STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200- 1 � ' � � � � 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant,Category STD. � B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISGCertified Erector, Category CSE. � C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." � , D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: l. AISC 303. � 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS � A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not � less than 25 percent. B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. � C. Channels,Angles[, M] [, S]-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pi e: ASTM A 53/A 53M T e E ar S Grade B. � P , YP , G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. � 2.2 BOLTS,CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS � A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A. 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon- � steel nuts; and ASTIVI F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), � compressible-washer type with plain finish. � STRUCTiJRAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-2 � �� ' � B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy- � hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon- � � steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. � � � 1. Finish: Plain. � � ' � C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-fmished carbon steel; AWS D 1.1/D 1.1 M,Type B. � � � D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554,Grade 36. � � 1. Configuration: Hooked. ` 2. Finish: Plain. � � � E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. � � ` 1. Finish: Plain. � � � F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � � � 1. Finish: Plain. _ � � ' � 23 PRIMER � A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. � �: , 2.4 GROUT � � Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic � � aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. � � (- , � 2.5 FABRICATION � � Y ti � A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate � according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and � AISC 360. � i � B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear r connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to � AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. � ' � 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS � ;: � � A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for �i Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint � � specified. � � STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-3 � ' � � � 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. � B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications,weld quality,and methods used in correcting welding work. � 2.7 SHOP PRIMING . � A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded � members to a depth of 2 inches(50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded.. � 3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials(applied fireproofing). 4. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and � spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." � C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's � written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. � 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform � shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. l. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being � fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the � Contract Documents. C. �Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's � Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested � and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. ii 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: AST'M E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. � 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. � STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-4 � � ' � � c ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � �: � ' 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and � ' locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with � requirements. � ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � � 3.2 ERECTION � t �. A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to � AISC 303 and AISC 360. � ' �. B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- � reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. ' � 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. � 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. � 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. ' Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before � � packing with gout. � , 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. � ' C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for � Steel Buildings and Bridges." ' 33 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for � , Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint : specified. � 1. Joint T e: Snu ti tened. � � YP g � �B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/Dl.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, � ' appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. � � , 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary � connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. ¢ � � , � �: � � f R , ' � , � ' ' STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200- 5 � � � 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. � B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." � C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to � AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. � b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. � c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the � Contract Documents. � � END OF SECTION 051200 � � � � � � � � � STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-6 � � ' � � � ' � � SECTION 052100- STEEL JOIST FRAMING � � ' � PART 1-GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY € r � ' A. Section Includes: � � l. K-series steel joists. g � 2. Joist accessories. # � � 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS ` , � A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory,and product. � � ' B. LEED Submittals: k � 1. Product Data for Credit NIR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation � ' indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. � 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that � products comply with the testing and product requirements of the Califomia Deparhnent � ' of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from � Various Sources Usiqg Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." = � � , ' C. Shop Drawings: � 1. Include layout, designation,number,type, location,and spacing of joists. � � 2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and � connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. ¢ � - � , � 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � � � '�! ' A. Welding certificates. # � B. Manufacturer certificates. � �. � ' � C. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. � � � ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � � A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying � ' with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications." � � l. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for � ' designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. � � STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100- 1 � ' � � � B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to � AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." 1.5 DELNERY STORAGE AND HANDLING � , , A. Deliver, stare,and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Rec cled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer rec cled content lus one-half of � y Y P preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. � 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web � Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members,underslung ends,and parallel top chord. � 2.3 PRIMERS A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product � requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental � Chambers." B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance � requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES � A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, � and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit � of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within l/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated. C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTNI A 307, Grade A (ASTM F Sb8M, Property � Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. � 1. Finish: Plam,uncoated. � STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100-2 ' � � ' � � � ' fi D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex t steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and � ASTM F 436(A.STM F 436M)hardened carbon-steel washers. � ' � 1. Finish: Plain. � , � E. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist � manufacturer to complete joist assembly. �. Q ' � 2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING � � � ' A. Clean and remove loose scale,heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and � accessories. � � � B. Apply one coat of shop primer. � , � � �_ � PART 3 -EXECUTION � ' k 3.1 INSTALLATION � : ' � A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. � � � B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting � ' ' construction according to SJPs "Specifications,"joist manufacturer's written recommendations, � and requirements in this Section. � ' 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. � 2. Space,adjust,and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. � 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that ¢ ' joists are stabilized during construction. � � � C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding � , sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and � procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting � welding work. i { ' � D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts. � E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with } , Research Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using � ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and � tightening requirements. � ' £ F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are � applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or � : ' beams. r � � � , i � STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100-3 � � � � � � 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and � prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 052100 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 -4 � � � � � ' � SECTION 053100- STEEL DECKING � � ' PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' � 1.1 SUNIMARY � � � , A. Section Includes:. � 1. Composite floor deck. � 2. Noncomposite form deck. � ' � � � 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS � '! ' A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. � � B. LEED Submittals: � ., ' � l. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation � indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � ' ' Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that € products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department � of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from � i Vazious Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." � � C. Shop Drawings: � ' � 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, � cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. � ' � � 13 1NFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � � : ' � A. Welding certificates. � � B. Product certificates. � ' � C. Evaluation reports. • � , D. Field quality-control reports. � � � 1.4 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE � � � A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. � ' ' B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D13, "Structural � _ Welding Code- Sheet Steel." ° ; � i � � STEEL DECKING 053100- 1 � i � � � 1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � A. Protect steel deck from conosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. � B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according � to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." � B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. � C. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the � Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company. � ' 2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 3. CMC Joist&Deck. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.;Metal Dek Group. 5. Cordeck. � 6. DACS, Ina ' 7. Epic Metals Corporation. 8. Marlyn Steel Decks,Inc. � 9. New Millennium Building Systems,LLC. 10. Nucor Corp.;Vulcraft Group. � 11. Roof Deck, Inc. � 12. Verco Manufacturing Co. 13. Wheeling Corrugating Company;Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. � � � : STEEL DECKING 053100-2 � � � ' � ' � � � B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integally embossed or raised pattern ribs and � , interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite ,� Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, � and with the following: � , � 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 � (230)minimum,with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop ti ' ' 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. � 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. � € � ' � 2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK � � , A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � #F 3 1. ASC Profiles,Inc.;a Blue Scope Steel company. � ' 2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. f 3. CMC Joist&Deck. � 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group. � ' S. Cordeck. � 6. DACS, Inc. 7. Marlyn Steel Decks, Ina � , 8. New Millennium Building Systems,LLC. � 9. Nucor Corp.;Vulcraft Group. � � 10. Roof Deck,Inc. � 11. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries,Inc. � , 12. Verco Manufacturing Co. � 13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. � � ' B. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel-sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to � comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI � Publication No. 31,with the minimum section properties indicated,and with the following: � ' ' 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 �� (230) minimum, with top and underside surface shop primed with manufacturer's ` standard balced-on,rust-inhibitive primer. � ; ' R a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. � f � ' , 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. � 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. p � - t ' 2.4 ACCESSORIES � � � A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. � ' ` � � , � � � STEEL DECKING 053100-3 � , � , � � B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically � driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel � screws,No. 10(4.8-mm)minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. � E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (23� MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same � material and finish as deck;of profile indicated or required for application. F. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (].90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. Far drains,cut holes in the field. � G. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in � SDI Publication No. 31,manufacturer's written instructions,and requirements in this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned � and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. � D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessaries around openings and other work projecting � through or adjacent to deck. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. � F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds,and methods used for correcting welding work. � G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. � H. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel-sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. � I. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel-sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and � sides of deck. � STEEL DECKING 053100-4 � � � � ' � � , 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. � , B. Field welds will be sub'ect to ins ection. � J P � � ' C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and � Architect. � � ' D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. � � E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of � , corrected work with specified requirements. � � 3 3 PROTECTION � ' � A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of � prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. � , � � END OF SECTION 053100 � � ' � � � ' � � � � ' � � � � ' � � ' �: � ' n � � ' � g f � ' � � 3 � : ' € � c t � � , � � STEEL DECKING 053100-5 � , � � � ' � � , SECTION 054000-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING � ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' , 1.1 SiJMMARY � � ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. � ' � ' 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � s A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design � , loads within limits and under conditions indicated. � l. Design Loads: As indicated. � , 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: , � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � ! ' A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. � B. LEED Submittal: ' 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � ' � a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal � ' ` framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. � 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural � ' analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for � their preparation. � ' � D. Welding certificates. � � E. Qualification data. � ; ' F. Product test reports. � s G. Research/evaluation reports. � ' � � � � , COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000- 1 � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. � B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." � C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and � inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel � Framing-General Provisions." PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS � A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel � products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and � coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. � 2. Coating: G60 (L18U). 2.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING � A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard Gshaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: � 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. 2. Flange Width: As indicated. � 3. Section Properties: As indicated. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track,of web depths indicated, unpunched, � with unstiffened flanges,and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating � upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, � with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads. � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-2 � F � ' �, � � , � E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting � of nested inner and outer tracks;unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. � , �. � � 23 FRAMING ACCESSORIES � r R ' A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural � Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, �: unless otherwise indicated. � ' } B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to � ASTM A 123/A 123M. � �: ' C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts or headless, � hooked bolts and caxbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip � process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. �: ' � D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, � without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 � ' conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. � t E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated s , from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 � times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified � independenttesting agency. ° � � t F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping � steel drill screws. � � � 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing,manufacturer's standard elsewhere. � � � � 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 or ASTM A 780. � � , � B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. � Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for � placement and hydration. � ' , � C. Shims: Load bearing,high-density multimonomer plastic,nonleaching. � � ' D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, l/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from � manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. � � � ' a � � k 4 ' � � : � � � ' � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-3 � � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 PREPARATION � A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface � on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of � foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL � A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent � requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with � connections secwely fastened. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. � D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent � connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. � Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior � framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard � punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a � maximum allowable tolerance variation of]/8 inch in ]0 feet(l:960)and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from � plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. � � � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -4 � � � � � � � � � � � 33 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION � F � , A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to � supporting structure as indicated. � � , B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as � follows: a � 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. � ' � C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or � warped surfaces and similar requirements. � ' , D. Isolate non-load-bearin steel framin from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical � g g �. loads while providing lateral support. � ': � � 1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. � 2. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. � � 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to primary building structure. � � E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not � , ' more than 48 inches(1220 m.m}apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. � 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 � inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet � istraps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and � thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to � stud webs or flanges. � ' � a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch(2440-mm) centers. ; � � ' 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of � punched studs. � 3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated � and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to s ' � stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. � 4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written � , instructions. � � � F. Install miscellaneous frammg and connections, mcluding stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip � angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable � ' � curtain-wall-framing system. � : � � } � , F � � � , � � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000- 5 � ' � � � � � 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform � field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. � C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and m wrrtmg to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified � requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine � compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION � , A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and � manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and � Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal ftaming is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. � END OF SECTION 054000 � � � � � � � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000- 6 � ! x � 1 � � SECTION 055000-METAL FABRICATIONS � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: � � � 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. � 2. Miscellaneous steel trim. �. ' 3. Metal bollards. � 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. � � ', ' B. Products furnished,but not installed, under this Section: � � � f 1. Loose steel lintels. � � 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated � to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. g 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. � , � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � ' A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,failure of connections,and other detrimental effects. � ' � 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (b7 deg C), ambient; I 80 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. � , � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � ; , A. Product Data: For the following: � 1. Paint products. � 2. Grout. � ,, � � B. LEED Submittals: � , � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and � preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Iriclude statement � indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � , � C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. � � 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of inetal fabrications and their ` ' connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. � � � ' METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 1 ' � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 METALS, GENERAL � A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. � 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel � products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276,Type 304. � D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500,cold-formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight(Schedule 40)unless otherwise indicated. � F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels(struts)complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/$inches(41 by 41 mm). � 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel,ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,commercial steel,Type B; 0.0966- inch(2.5-mm) minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive,baked-on, acrylic enamel. � 2.3 FASTENERS � A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 : (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. � 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steeL � B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise � indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. � C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with � ASTM B 633 or AS'TM F 1941 (AS`TM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. � 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 � (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F $36M). � � METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 � ; � � ' � � �: � � 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � �: � ' A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25,Type II,zinc oxide,alkyd, linseed oil primer. � B. Galvamzmg Repair Pamt: High-zmc-dust-content paint complymg with SSPC-Pamt 20 and � compatible with paints specified to be used over it. � ' �. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. � �i D. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for � interior and exterior applications. � �: , E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for ` normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 � � psi (20 MPa). � � � �: 2.5 FABRICATION,GENERAL � � A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections � that maintain structural value of joined pieces. � i � B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove � sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. `' � , C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: � �; 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion � � resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. � 3. Remove welding flux immediately. , 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. :! � D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or � t welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. �; � E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude � � water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. . . � F. Where units are indicated to be cast mto concrete or built mto masonry, equip wrth mtegrally � welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches(6U0 mm)o.c. � ' � �' 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS � ' � A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to �; complete the Work. f � � B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise '` indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent � � construction. � � METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 � i � � � �. � � 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM AND FABRICATIONS � A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed � field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with � other work. C. Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. � D. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and trim at Hose Tower. E. Prime exterior, apparatus bay and adjacnet apparatus bay anciliary spaces miscellaneous steel � trim with primer specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings." 2.8 METAL BOLLARDS � A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. � B. Galvanize bollards. � 29 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES : A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete � construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS � A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and � recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with primer specified in Division 09 Section � "High-Performance Coatings." � 2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from � concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. � 2.12 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for � recommendations for applying and designating finishes. � METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4 � � � ' � � � � � B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. � ' 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES � � � A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize exterior items and items at Hose Tower to comply with � ' ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other � steel and iron products. � f t , B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded � in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. [ � , 1. Shop prime with primer indicated. � C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: � b � 1. Exterior Items: SSPGSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." � 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPGSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial � � Blast Cleaning." � ' 3. Other Items: SSPGSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." ; � � D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification � � No. 1: Shop, Eield, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � ' � � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � i � A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing ; metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with � ; ' edges and surfaces level,plumb,true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and � levels. � � � B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. � Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after � ; � fabrication and are far bolted or screwed field connections. � � C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: � F , � 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion � resistance of base metals. � , 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. � ' 3. Remove welding flw�immediately. � 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. � D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal � � fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. � � � r � � METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5 � � � � E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, � masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS � A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before � installing. B. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes. Fill annular space around bollard � ' solidly with nonshrink,nonmetallic grout. C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete,mounding top surface to shed water. � 3.3 INSTALLING BEARiNG AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to � improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have � been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. � � C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remam. 3.4 ADJ�JSTING AND CLEANING � A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and � abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded azeas and repair � galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 � � � � � � METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-6 � § � F{: 8: � � � SECTION 055100-METAL STAIRS � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � 1.1 SUMMARY � � 1 A. Section Includes: � 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. � � � 2. Industrial-type stairs with steel grating treads. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. � t � � � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � � A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. � B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and � � the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. � � 1. Uniform Load: l 00 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). � , ' 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf(133 kN)applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq.mm). � 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. � 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition � � to loads specified above. � 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or l/4 inch (b.4 � mm),whichever is less. � � � C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the � following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. � � � � 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: � � a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m)applied in any direction. � t b. Concentrated load of 2001bf(U.89 kN)applied in any direction. � c. Ma�cimum deflection of L/180 between supports. � d. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. � ' , 2. Infill of Guards: � � ' a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf(0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of l sq. ft. � (0.093 sq. m). � b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. ; � 4 � � , t � METAL STAIRS 055100- 1 � � � � 13 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For metal stairs. B. LEED Submittals: � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and � preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections,details, and attachments to other work. � D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance � requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 UALITY ASSURANCE � Q A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for � Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. � 2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class. PART 2 -PRODUCTS � � 2.1 METALS � � A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise � indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks,roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel � products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not lessthan 25 percent. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500(cold formed)or ASTM A 513. � E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: AST'M A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1O11M or , ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. � F. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,either commercial steel,Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170}, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. � � METAL STAIIZS 055100 -2 � � ' � � � � � G. tiJncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1O11M,either commercial steel, Type B, � or structural steel,Grade 30(Grade 205),unless another grade is required by design loads. � f ' � �: 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � , A. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard � � with manufacturer. � � t � B. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or � ASTM F l 941 (ASTIVt F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for Training/Hose Tower use, and � Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class � , required. � � � C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer � complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. � � � `': D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. � � ' E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- � Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day � compressive strength of 3000 psi(2U:MPa)unless otherwise indicated. � � � � 23 FABRICATION,GENERAL i � � A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,railings, clips, �, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and # platforms on supporting structure. " ' � 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. � 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. � : ' � � B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units � only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. � ' � � C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove � sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. � � tD. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. � � x E. Weld connections to comply with the following: �' , e' 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion g resistance of base metals. � � 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. � 3. Remove welding flux immediately. � 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. � � 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary �: Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint (central stair), Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay(east stair � � and Training/Hose Tower stair) � � � METAL STAIRS 055100-3 � � t � � , � � F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners � where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep � holes where water may accumulate. 2.4 ABRASNE NOSINGS FOR STEEL-PAN CONCRETE-FILLED STAIRS AT STAIR � 1 S2/2S2 A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron or aluminum,with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of � aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requ�rements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: � � a. American Safety Tread Co., Ina b. Balco Inc. � c. Barry Pattern&Foundry Co.,Inc. d. Granite State Casting Ca e. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc. � £ Wooster Products Inc. 2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units,3 inches(75 mm)wide without lip. B. Provide anchors for embeddin units in concrete either inte ral or a lied to units as standard � g , g PP � with manufacturer. C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. � 2.5 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS � A. Stair Framing: � 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels or tubes. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel or tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. � 3. If using bolts,fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. � B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than � 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." � � 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel gratmg wrth 1-1/4-by-3/16-cnch (32-by-5-mm} bearing bars at ]5/16 inch(24 mm)o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches(1.OU mm) o.a � METAL STAIlZS 055100-4 � � , 2. Fabricate grating treads with cast abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate � carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. �` € € ' � 2.6 STAIR RAILINGS � � � A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, � dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, � and anchorage,but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. � � l. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter handrails and 1-ll2-inch- (3$-mm-} � square top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- (3$-mm-)square posts. � ' 2. Picket Infill: 3/4 inch square pickets spaced less than 4 inches(1.00 mm)clear. � 3. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-l./2-inch- (38-mm-) square intermediate rails spaced less than 2l inches(533 mm)clear. � � . . . � B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at � connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. � � ' h welds to com 1 with NOMMA's "Volun Joint Finish Standards" for T e 1 � 1. Fmis p y tary yp � welds: no evidence of a welded joint (central stair), Type 2 welds: completely sanded � � • joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay(east stair and Training/Hose Tower stair). � � � C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. � i D. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. � � � � E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. � ' � F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. � � , , G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, � miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other � work. � ' � 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. � „ � H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, to � transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. � � f2.7 FINISHES � A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for � � recommendations for applying and designating finishes. � � � B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. # ; � C. Galvanizin Trainin Hose Tower stair : Hot-di alvanize items as indicated to comply with � g � � ) Pg � ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other � ; � steel and iron products. � � METAL STAIRS 055100- 5 � � D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- � SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of inetal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, � "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. � PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION � : A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing � metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete � or CMIJ unless otherwise indicated. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are � not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. � D. Field Weldmg: Comply with requirements for weldmg m "Fabncahon, General"Article. E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast- � in-Place Concrete." F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for � concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt at central stair, with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage at other stairs. � 3.2 ADNSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and � abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair � galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. � END OF SECTION 055100 � � � METAL STAIRS 055100-6 � .. � � � �' � � � � SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS � � , � PART 1 -GENERAL � € 1 � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � A. Section Includes: � � 1. Steel pipe railings. �: , B. See Division OS Section "Metal Stairs"for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. � � � , 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � ; a' A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a � � qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. r B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following � loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: � � � � 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: � � � a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m)applied in any direction. � b. Concentrated load of 200 ]bf(0.$9 kN) applied in any direction. �; c. Maximum deflection of L/180 between supports. � ' d. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. � t � 2. Infill of Guards: � , � g a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf(022 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. � (Q.093 sq. m). � ` ' b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. � C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals � and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. � � � � � 1.3 SUBMITTALS a , � A. Product Data: For the following: � � ' � 1. Manufacturer's product lines of inechanically connected railings. � 2. Railing brackets. $ 3. Grout,anchoring cement, and paint products. i ' � � � � ¢ , � � � PIPE AND TLTBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 � 1 � r � � B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicatin ercenta es b wei t of ostconsumer and � gP g Y P� P preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work. D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. � E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified � professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified � testing agency,according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � 2.2 METALS,GENERAL � A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. � 23 STEEL AND IRON � ' A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Prov�de products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. � . B. Tubing: ASTM A 500(cold formed)or ASTM A 513. � C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight(Schedule 40), unless � another grade and weight are required by structural loads. D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � � � � PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -2 . � � ' • � � � t � � i � , � � � 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � �' � A. Fasteners: Provide the following: i s � 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ;; � ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. �: 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel � r fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. � , � B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy � � welded. � �: ' C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. � � D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and � ' � compatible with paints specified to be used over it. � � E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer � � complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat � i F. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for � , interior and exterior applications. � � k � � 2.5 FABRICATION � � � A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of � , � approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on � exposed surfaces. � � g �! � B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. _ C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings � designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. � � � l. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion � resistance of base metals. _ � 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. � 3. Remove flux immediately. � 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness � ! � shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. � D. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. � ; � E. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming � exposed surfaces. � � � � � PIPE AND TUBE RAII.,INGS 055213 -3 � ' � i � � F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. � G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. H. Brackets,Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets,flanges,miscellaneous fittings, � and anchars to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- � resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes. 2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES � A. Galvanized Ra.ilings: � 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware,after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. � 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- � SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: � Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Set railmgs accurately m location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. � 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. � 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 � mm in 3 m}. B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, � concrete,masonry,wood,or dissimilar metals,with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. � D. Weld posts directly to metal supports. � PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -4 � � ' � � � ' �: E. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed � anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. � ' F. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: � � 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or , lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. � ' Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. � � � 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING � ' A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and ' abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop � painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. t � �: B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair � ' galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. � � END OF SECTION 055213 � ' � � , � s � � t � � � ' � ' � � � � � � ' � � � �� , � � � � , � � t PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5 � � ; � ' � �. � � , � � SECTION 055300-GRATINGS � � ' � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � , d: 1.1 SUMMARY � � , A. Section Includes: � 1. Metal bar gratings. � 2. Metal frames and supports for gratings. � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Delegated Design: Design gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a � qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. � ' B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following � loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. � ' 1. Apparatus Bay, Subject to Trucking: Uniform load of 250 Ibf/sq. ft. (1.1.97 kN/sq.m) or �, concentrated load of 8000 lbf(35.60 kN),whichever produces the greater stress. � ' . � � 13 SUBMITTALS � ' A. LEED Submittals: f , 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and ¢ preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. ' B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. � � C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance � ' requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified � professional engineer responsible for their preparation. , � ' � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual" � , � and NAAMM NIBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual." � � � � ' � � � � ' � � GRATINGS 055300- 1 � � � � � PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 FERROUS METALS � A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not � less than 25 percent. B. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1O11M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. D. Wire Rod for Bar Gratin Crossbars: ASTM A 510 ASTM f1 5l OM). � g � 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and � compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 23 FABRICATION � A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm)unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on � exposed surfaces. B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to � support indicated loads. 2.4 METAL BAR GRATINGS � A. Welded Steel Grating 1. Bearin Bar S acin : 1-3/8 inches(35 mm)o.c. � g P g 2. Bearing Bar Depth: As required to comply with structural performance requirements. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements. � 4. Crossbaz Spacing: 4 inches(l 02 mm)o.a 5. Tra�c Surface: Plain. 6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.$ oz./sq. ft. (55U � �;/sq. m)of coated surface. � � � GRATINGS 055300 -2 � � , , � ' ; , 2.5 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS � A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of , welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. ' ' 1. Unless otherwise indicated fabricate from same basic metal as atin s. , � g � 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded , anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches(600 mm)o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-l/4 inches (32 mm)wide by 1/4 inch. (6 mm)thick by 8 inches(20q mm)long. ; ' B. Galvanize steel frames and supports. ' 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. ' ' B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for � steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. � , � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' ' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � � ' ' A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established � lines and levels and free of rack. � ' 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS , A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances � and standard anchoring details. � ' � 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING � � , � A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair � galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. � � � � END OF SECTION 05530 � , � GRATINGS 055300-3 , � - - � , � � � � { � : ' � � � SECTION 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY ° , � PART 1 -GENERAL � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section Includes: � : � 1. Framing with dimension lumber. � ' 2. Framing with engineered wood products. ; 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. � 4. Wood blocking and nailers. � 5. Wood furring and grounds. _ ' 6. Wood sleepers. � 7. Plywood backing panels. ;; ' � 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS � � , A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. � � 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and � certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements � ' 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and � certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. � ' . . . . . �. B. LEED Submittals: � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composrte wood products, documentation mdicatu�►g � that product contains no urea formaldehyde. � ' � I'; 13 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � ' j A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit ' stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the � , ALSC Board of Review. � � B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: ' § 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. �. 2. Engineered wood products. � 3. Power-driven fasteners. � , 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. � 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. � ' `; i � � , � � � � �. � � ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 1 � � � � PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL � A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency � certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. � 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. � 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38anm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless � otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities � having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design � stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a � qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATNE-TREATED LUMBER � A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior � construction not in contact with the ground,Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground,and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no � arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a ma�cimum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use � material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatrnent quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board � of Review. D. Application: Treat the following: � 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, sttipping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. � 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. � ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 � � ' ' � � � � ' , � 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior � masonry or concrete walls. � ' 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. � � � 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING � , � A. Framing: No. 2 grade. � � ' l. Application: Framing for exterior and interior load bearing partitions. � 2. Species: � a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. � ' b. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. � c. Douglas fir-larch(north);NLGA. � � € ,. ' 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS � � A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. � , ;: B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain � primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and � ' manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. � 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12-inch nomi.nal- � ' (286-mm actual-)depth members. � 2. Modulus of Elasticity,Edgewise: 2,000,004 psi(13 700 MPa). � C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural � ' composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. � Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established � � and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. $ , ` l. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or � r DOC PS 2,Exposure 1. � ' 2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. � 3. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factoty marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and � ' compliance with APA standard. � �. D. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I joists � ' at bearin g ends, com pl yin g with research/evaluation re port for I joists. � � � ' 1. Material: Product made from any combination solid lumber,wood strands, and veneers. � 2. Thickness: I-l./4 inches(32 mm). r 3. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board plus grade, ` factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with � ' APA standard. � t' t'. � , �y� 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 � ' � �: � 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER � A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: �'°� 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. � 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. � 6. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size,provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. � C. For concealed boazds, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and [any of]the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern ine;No. 2 ade; SPIB. � P �' 2. Northern species;No. 2 Common grade;NLGA. 3. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. � 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS � A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior,C-C Plugged in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm)nominal thickness. � 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified � in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative � treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. � B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307,Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); � with ASTM:A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. � � � � ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4 � � , � � � . ' � � � ' � � 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS � ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � 1. Cleveland Steel S eci 1 � ' p atyCa � 2. KC Metals Products,Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. � � 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. � 5. USP Structural Connectors. � � B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by � ' manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's � published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis f and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing � , agency. � � C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zino-coated steel sheet complying with � , ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)coating designation. � � 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. � �; ' ¢ D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high- � strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B � , (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 in.ch (�.9 mm) � thick. � � 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. � � � � � 29 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � � A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from � manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members mdicated. � , � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � � � A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and � fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. � Locate furring,nailers, blocking, grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for � ' attaching other construction. � s B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame � ' Construction,"unless otherwise indicated. � � ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-5 � , � � � � C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with � manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing � agency exposed to view. E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written � instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. � G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. � H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. I. Securel attach rou c entry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, � Y � �P complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. � 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. � 3 2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite � protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, � apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. � END OF SECTION 061000 � � � � � � ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-6 � � � � � � , G a SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING � ' k PART 1 -GENERAL � � , ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � � A. Section Includes: � � � l. Wall sheathing. � , 2. Roof sheathing. � � B. Related Sections: € � ' � 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for composite nail base sheathing. � � �' ' 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS � C A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component � ' materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. ; � a 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and � . certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. _ , 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and � certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. � � ' B. LEED Submittals: � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed � statement of VOC content. � ' 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite wood products,documentation indicating �. that product contains no urea formaldehyde. R ;. � � , ; 13 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � � A. Evaluation Reports: For following products,from ICC-ES: � � �' l. Preservative-treated plywood. � � , . 3 PART 2-PRODUCTS � � �. , � 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS � � �: ' A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California � Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic : Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." � ' ? � w � SHEATHING 061600- 1 � � � � B. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated. � C. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. � 2.2 PRESERVATNE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior � construction,Use Category UC3b for exterior construction. : B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to � authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, i``� vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING � A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. � B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. � 2.4 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. � B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure l, Structural I sheathing. � 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified � in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with � ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 and � ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to � 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). � � SHEATHING 061600-2 � � , � � � � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � , ' 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL � � � A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to � ' use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that � pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. � � ' B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting � construction unless otherwise indicated. �' � � C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: � 1 t 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. � 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICCs "International Building Code." � ' � D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so � these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing � ' through completed assembly. � � � E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of � ' structural support elements. $ � � # � 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION F' � A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood �; Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. � ' � B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: � ' 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: � � � a. Nail to wood framing. � ' b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. { a Space panels l./8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. � � L � ' be END OF SECTION 061600 � ' � �: � � F � k' � j` , ( 4 � � ' � � � � � SHEATHING 061600-3 � t � �: - � � � � � � ' � SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES � � ' � PART1 -GENERAL � 4 ' � � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � A. Section Includes: � � 1. Wood roof trusses. � 2. Wood girder trusses. � ' , 3. Wood truss bracing. x 4. Metal truss accessories. � � , B. Allowances: Provide wood truss bracing under the Metal-Plate-Connected Truss Bracing � Allowance as specified in Division O1 Section "Allowances." � �: ; ' � 1.2 ACTION SUBA�IITTALS €. � � A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors,metal truss accessories, and fasteners. � � B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. � , l. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss � required. � 2. Indicate sizes, stress grades,and species of lumber. � ' 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss � members due to design loads. � 4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent � , buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. � 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of inetal � connector plates. � ' 6. Show splice details and bearing details. � C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with � performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the �: ' qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. ff � � , � 13 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � �: e: A. Product certificates. � ' �' B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: � � � � � 1. Metal-plate connectors. � 2. Metal truss accessories. � € � ' �: � � � SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1 � � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. � 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. � 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that � complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an . independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having � jurisdiction. 1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing � Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division O1 Section "Quality Requirements,"to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses. � B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 � unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER � A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency � certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. � B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous � lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." � � SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 -2 � � � � � � � � 23 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES � � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � ; , products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following. � s � 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company. ; ' 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.;Masengill Machinery Company. � 3. CompuTrus, Inc. � 4. Eagle Metal Products. �' � 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company. � 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Ina � 7. Robbins Engineering,Ina � , 8. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company. � �, ,, B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. � � � C. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength � low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS F Type B); G60(Z 180)coating designation;and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)thick. � � � 2.4 FASTENERS �: � $ A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified � in this article for material and manufacture. � �_ ' � 1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of inetal framing manufacturer. � ' 2. Where trusses aze exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure- z' preservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with � hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless � steeL � ' �. B. Nails,Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. � � # ' ` 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES ' �. ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering �. products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: � : � � � 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. � ' 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. � 3. Phoenix Metal Products,Ina � 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. � ' S. USP Structural Connectors. s � � � � � r z � �: � � SHOP-FABRICAT`ED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 -3 �; � � � � � � B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's � published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. � C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zino-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60 (Z180)coating designation. � 2.6 FABRICATION � � A. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. � 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. B. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded � simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. � PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. � B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, � exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. � E. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as � ' applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. F. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. � G. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. � 1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated. � H. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. � ` SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 -4 � � � � � � � , � I. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut,drill,notch, or remove truss members. � � J. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. > ' � END OF SECTION 061753 � � � � � � � � � � ' � � � , ' � � � � � ;: ' € � �' � � ' � � 8. � } & � � �: ' ¢ � 3 € � s � � z � ' � � �: ' � � �t ' � � k e z a � P S f � � � SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 -5 � � � � � F � � � � � � � SECTION 061800 -GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION � � . ' r � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � �: ' ' A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. ` � � f 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � i ' � B. LEED Submittals: � � � � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For laminating adhesive used for structural glued- � � laminated timber, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. � � C. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that � , ' structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. � � 3[ S � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' � A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or � APA-licensed firm. � � � 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or � APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed � ' Work. � � B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A 1901. � ' � C. Forest Certification: Provide structural glued-laminated timber produced from wood obtained � from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, � "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." �: , �; � 1.4 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � � � A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. � � � B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. A �. � � ; � ; � ' �' � ' GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800- 1 G°: � � �� PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER � A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � 1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. � 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with ' AITC A 190.1. a. Use adhesive that contains no urea-formaldehyde resins. � B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Douglas fir-larch that complies with structural properties indicated. � C. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins: 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: [Alaska cedar, 20E-1.SE] [Any species, 20E- � 1.SE] [Any species, 24F-1.7E] [Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E] [Southern pine, 24F-1.8E] <Insert species and beam stress classification>. � 2. Lay-up: [Balanced] [Either balanced or unbalanced]. D. Appearance Grade: Architectural,complying with AITC 110. E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, trans arent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in � P retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. � F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. - � 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS � A. General: Unless otherwise mdicated, fabncate from the followmg materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes,plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. � 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. � B. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. � C. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. � � GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 -2 � � � ' � � � � , ` 2.3 FABRICATION � � A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and � � drilling bolt holes. � i � B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular � ' or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. � � C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation E coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not � , less than 10 minutes. � � � ' D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of f penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. � � ! PART 3 -EXECUTION � � � ; � 3.1 INSTALLATION � � � � A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close- } ; � � fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent ; supporting members are in place. � 1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. � , � B. Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match � specified surfacing. � ' �. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. � 2. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. � � 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. �' ; C. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with � � requirements for shop fabrication. ` € D. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued- laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. , i E. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful �' purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other � i � trades. � � 1. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. � � ; � e END OF SECTION 061800 � � _ i i a. � � GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800-3 � � � � ! � ' �g d � t , � � SECTION 062013 -EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY � � � PART1 -GENERAL � � ' � � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � A. This Section includes the following. � 1. Lumber Soffit paneling. � � �' ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � s A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. �. � . B. Samples: For each type of siding indicated. � � � � � PART2-PRODUCTS � � � � 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL � � A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's � , Board of Review. � � � ' 2.2 PANELING �; � k A. Board Paneling: � � 1. Species and Grade: Douglas Fire, Clear Vertical Grain, WWPA. � 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. ; 3. Pattern: V-joint,tongue-and-groove,WWPA WP 4. k , � 4. Net Coverage Width: Not less than 5-lJl.6 inches(128 mm). � � � � 23 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � � A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to � penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) into wood substrate. � 1. For applications not otherwise indicated,provide sta.inless-steel or aluminum fasteners. � � �, B. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable � � requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer � and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. � � � � ' '' � � � � � � EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 1 � ' � � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. � 1. Scribe and cut exterior fmish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. � 3.2 PANELING INSTALLATION � A. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random- width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width. 1. Install in full lengths without end joints. � 2. Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-and-groove)joints within each field of paneling. � 3. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain chazacter and color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards. � 4. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues. END OF SECTION 062013 � � � � � � � � � EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 -2 � � ' � � � � � � � SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY ' ' � PART1 -GENERAL � . � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. This Section includes the following: � ' � 1. Interior standing and running trim. � � 2. Board paneling. � 3. Shelving and clothes rods. � 3 � B. See Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified � , ' in this Section. � � � , 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � 4� A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. � � � B. Samples: For each type of paneling indicated. � � C. LEED Submittals: �' , � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and glues used at Project site, including �. printed statement of VOC content. � , 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite-wood products, documentation indicating � that product contains no urea formaldehyde. �' � ' � PART 2-PRODUCTS � � 4 � � � 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL � � A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's � t Board of Review. � � � B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. � � � C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. �` � ' D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde � resin. � � � E. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, �, ' finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying # with LMA SAT-1. � F i � � INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1 � ' �. � �: � 2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM � A. Softwood Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar � pine. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. � 23 PANELING � A. Board Paneling: Interior wood board paneling complymg with WMMPA WM 9. 1. Species: Locally obtained beetle-kill pine, lx6 shiplap. � 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS � A. Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.Do not use particleboard � or MDF that contains urea formaldehyde. 1. Melamine-faced particleboard with applied PVC front edge. B. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102;powder-coat finished steel. � C. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9,B04112;powder-coat finished steel. D. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051;prime-painted formed steel. � E. Clothes Rods: 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-}diameter,clear,kiln-dried hardwood. � 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Glue: Aliphatic-resin,polyurethane,or resorcmol wood glue. 1. Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to � 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). � � - � � � INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -2 � � ' � � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � � , � 3.1 PREPARATION � � A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in � ' installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. � � � ; , 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � �: � A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use �: ' � concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 3: � 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. � Y 2. Countersink fasteners,fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. € ' � 3. Install to tolerance of ll8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. � Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch(0.8-mm)maximum offset. � � � � 33 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION � 4` ' ' A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum �; lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints. � Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. � � p » 3.4 PANELING INSTALLATION � � , � A. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random- � width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width. E � � l. Install in full lengths without end joints. � 2. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall. g' 3. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain � � character and color between adjacent boards. �: 4. Fasten paneling with oval head screws and finishing washers. Vertical and horizontal � line of fasteners to be consistant. � � � i 3.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION � � � A. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 � inches (90U mm) o.a Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle � bolts or hollow wall anchors. �' I x B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. Install shelves,fully seated on brackets, and supports. � � - END OF SECTION 062023 � & � t � F � � 1NTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -3 . �' � � � �� SECTION 064023 -INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK � � , , p PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' � l.l SUMMARY � � ' A. This Section includes the following: � � 1. Interiar standing and running trim. � ' ' 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. � 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. � 4. Shelving and clothes rods. � 5. Solid-surfacing-material window stools/aprons and shower enclosures. � ' � B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips ` unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � � A. Product Data: For solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing � x materials and processes. � � � B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale � details, attachment devices,and other components. � � , 3, C. Samples: � 1. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color,pattern,and surface finish. �; 2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each type,color,pattern, and surface finish. � 3. Solid-surfacing materials. � � � D. LEED Submittals: � � � � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: � s a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the bonding � � agent contains no urea formaldehyde. � b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no � urea formaldehyde. �. ' � E. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program � certificates. � , � S � � � i, � i ` � � s 1NTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1 � � � � � � � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. � B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.". � l. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates for woodwork, including installation. � 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet � work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood Products: � 1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products � with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 100 percent. 2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. � 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade NID,made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with � thermally fused,melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-L C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as � required by woodwork quality standard. D. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with � , ISSFA-2. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: � a. Avonite, Inc. b. Formica Corporation. c. LG Chemical, Ltd. � iNTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -2 � � � � � � � � � d. Nevamar Company,LLC; Decorative Products Div. � e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International,Inc. � � � 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES � ' A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural � woodwork, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." � � .,; � � B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from O.Q95-inch- (2.4-mm-) � thick metal,and as follows: � ' 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9,B01521. � � C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B0201 L � � � f D. Bar Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 6 inches(150 mm} long, 1/2 inch (13 min) in diameter at � drawers, 8 inches(200 mm)long, 1/2 inch (13 mm} in diameter at doors. � � E. Catches: Magnetic catches,BHMA A156.9,B03141. a ; � F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. $ � � 1. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted and extending under � bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers. �' � 2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; � zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. � 3. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1 for drawers not more than 6 inches (]50 mm) high and 24 �: inches(600 mm)wide. � � 4. Pot Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100 for drawers more than 6 inches(150 mm)high or 24 �! inches(600 mm)wide. � 5. Pantry Shelf Slides: Grade 1HD-100 � � ;: G. Door Locks: BHMA A 156.11, E0712 L � k � � H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E0704L F � z I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with �' � BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. � � 4 1. Dull Nickel Plated: BHMA 619 for bronze base; BHMA 646 for steel base. f €: ` J. Plate Organizer: Hafele Collection as distributed by Kitchensource, kitchensource.com. or � approved equal. � � 1. Base Plate: Cat.No. 557.46.000, 36"(914 mm)x 24"(610 mm). � � 2. Posts: Cat.No. 557.46.011, 6 5/16"(160 mm)x 1"(25 mm), provide eight per drawer. � � K. Trash Rings: Polished stainless steel 12" x 2" trash grommet #HC-6152-279 as distributed by � � Hardware Tree by Rufkarhrs Furniture Hardware, hardwaretree.com. � � � L. Shift Quarter Lockers Cam Latch: Olympus Lock, Inc DCP Padlockalbe Cam Lock Latch k' � US26D, 800.525.0954 or equaL � � INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -3 � ' �; €: � M. Barn Door Hardware: Small spoked hangers, rail and bottom guide, as manufactured by Barn .�� Door Hardware, 228 Nevada St., El Segundo, CA 90245, 310.648.7601, barndoorhardware.com. 1. Finish: Field painted. � N. Potrack: Roger Gourmet Collection Rectangle Pot Rack without Grid, 30"W x 15"D, Black with Chrome Chains(provide sufficient length to support rack at 72"AFF,potracks.com. � 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Fumng, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Soflwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Adhesives General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldeh de. � B. , Y 2.4 FABRICATION � A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. � ' Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing,trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. � 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. , B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: � 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows: � a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. � c. Edges: Grade VGS 3. Colors,Patterns,and Finishes: To be selected from manufacture's full range. C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: � 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 2. Colors,Patterns,and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range.. � 3. Edge Treatment: Post-formed, "waterfall"edge. � 4. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue, Medium-density fiberboard made with ea�terior glue or exterior-grade plywood. � � D. Solid-Surfacing-Material Window Stools/Aprons and Shower Enclosures: 1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: l/2 inch (13 mm). � 2. Colors,Patterns,and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range. � � INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -4 � � 1 � � � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 4 � , 3.1 INSTALLATION � � � � A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in a ' installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as ; : required, including removal of packing and backpriming. � r �.. ' B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for � : fabrication of type of woodwork involved. � C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of lJ8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm �. ,, in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims. � F � D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish � ' at cuts. � � E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with � ' countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use � fine finishing nails [or finishing screws] for exposed fastening,countersunk and filled flush with � woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. � ' . � 3_ F. k � , G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are s accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide � unencumbered operation. �: � ' H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other �' supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant ; specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." � ' � t END OF SECTION 064023 � , � � 1 � � � � � , � � � ' t � ' �: � � ' � � INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 � ' � � � � � � t � � � ' _ . SECTION 066400 PLASTIC PANELING � � �ART 1 -GENERAL � , � l.l SUMMARY � � `` , A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP)wall paneling and trim accessaries. �' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. r B. LEED SubmittaL• � '. , 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement � of VOC content and chemical components. � ' C. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories. � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to � � ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of � , applicable testing agency. � �> 1. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. � 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. � , � PART2-PRODUCTS � � ' 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING � � A. General: Gelcoat-finished,glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. � ' �. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � the following: � , � a. Kemlite Company Inc. � € ' b. Marlite. � � c. Nudo Products, Inc. � , � 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.075 inch(1.9 mm) � � 3. Surface Finish: Smooth � , k 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � h ' $. k k e �; � ' �S� §s t PLASTIC PANELING 066400- 1 � ' � � � � 2.2 ACCESSORIES � A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,outside corners, and caps as � needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. 1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA � Method 24). C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by � plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA � Method 24). PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, gease, dirt, � and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to � manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches(30U mm)wide. � 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. � B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive. � D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim � in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended � by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 ;� � � PLASTIC PANELING 066400-2 . � � ' � � E ' a SECTION 071326- SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING � , � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � , ' k l.l SUMMARY � r. � ' A. This Section includes the following. � � 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. � 2. Insulation. � ' � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' � A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating,preparing, and treating � substrate,technical data,and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofmg. � , � B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details far substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners,tie-ins with adjoining �: ' ' waterproofmg, and other termination conditions. � � C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified � testing agency, for waterproofing. � ' �: D. Special warranties. �; � ' � 1.3 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE � e i ' A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation ; of waterproofing required for this Project. � B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � ' ° 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition �. and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details � ' and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and � protection and repairs. � � ' ' 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS � F , A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate X temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a = damp or wet substrate. _ t � � € ' � � , SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326- 1 �; � � � 1.5 WARR.ANTY � A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain � watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mi1- (l.5-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet � consisting of 56 mi.ls (].4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer � or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. � b. Grace,W.R. &Co.;Bituthene 3000. c. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200. d. Meadows, W. R.,Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. e. Pecora Corporation;Duramem 700-SM. � £ Tamko Roofing Products,Inc.; TW-60. 2. Physical Properties: � a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi (1.71VIPa)minimum; ASTM D 412,Die C,modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum;ASTM D 412,Die C,modified. � c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C); ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch (3-mm) movement; � ASTM C 836. ` e. Puncture Resistance: 40 Ibf(180 N)minimum; ASTM E 154. : f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet(45 m)minimum;ASTM D 5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at � 70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570. h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96, Water Method. � � � � SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326-2 � � � ' � � � % ' � P � � ., , 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS � �A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended � ' use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. � 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having � � ' jurisdiction. i � B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet � ' ' waterproofing material. ' � C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by � � manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. ; ' � D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low � viscosity. � ' � E. Pressure Sensitive Tape: Two-sided highly aggressive adhesive tape. _ � � ', ' F. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity,two-component,asphalt-modified coating. � � G. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as �: sheet waterproofing. � ' � H. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended �'. by waterproofing manufacturer. � ' � �. 2.3 INSULATION � , � A. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying �', with ASTM C 578, Type N, 25-psi (173-kPa} minimum compressive strength; unfaced; k ' fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels. � � 4 PART 3 -EXECUTION � ' � � 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION � ' �: A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufaciurer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. , ¢ B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray �, affecting other construction. � , £ C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other � penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. � � ' �. � SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326-3 � , � � � � D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, � holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints � and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. F. Corners: Prepare,prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. � G. Prepare,treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. � 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written � instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be � covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. : C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and � maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. ets over sheet stri s brid in substrate cracks construction and � ` D. A p p l y c o n t m u o u s s h e p g g , , contraction joints. E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending � in reglets with mastic. F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit � and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (150 mm)beyond repaired areas in all directions. � G. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately. H. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; � repair substrates,reapply waterproofing,and repair sheet flashings. 33 INSULATION INSTALLATION � A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 � mm)of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's � written instructions. C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. ; � SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326-4 � N � , 5 � ,< ' � 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING � � � � A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. � ` ' B. Protect installed insulation draina e anels from dama e due to IJV li ht harmful weather � g P g g , � exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will � ' be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction � immediately after installation. � � � ' C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures � recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. � �; � ' � END OF SECTION 071326 € � � ' � � � S � ' e � ! ' � � ' e � � 3 ' f. � s � , � & i z ' � � ' � €- � � i �. � ' � � # ' � � z ' �: � � € SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326- 5 � ' � ,. � � ' � � , � � SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION � S , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � � ' ' A. Section Includes: � t 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. � 2. Composite nail base insulated sheathing. � , ' 3. Glass-fiber board insulation. � 4. Loose-fill insulation. € 5. Vapor retarders. � ' � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS = ' � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � � ' B. LEED Submittals: � �' 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation � � ' indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � � � 2. Product Data for Credit IA: For products certified by the Greenguard Environmental � , Institute and meets the Greenguard standards for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) emissions, including formaldehyde. �' � ' C. Product test reports. � � D. Research/evaluation reports. � ' � PART2-PRODUCTS � ' � ¢' 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION ' A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (Below Grade and Under Slab Applications): � ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, � respectively,per ASTM E 84. ` ' � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but aze not limited to, °' 1 the following: s a. Dow Chemical Company(The). � F b. Owens Corning. #:.: � ' �. : � ' THERMAL INSULATION 072100- 1 � �; t � � 2. Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa)general applications. � 3. Type V, 100 psi (690 kPa)under slabs at Apparatus Bays. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation � securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.2 COMPOSITE NAIL BASE INSULATED SHEATHING � A. Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: Rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with oriented strand board laminated to one face complying '� with ASTM C 1289,Type V. 1. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: 2 inches(50 mm). � 2. Oriented-Strand-Board Nominal Thickness: 7/l 6 inch(] 1.1 mm). 23 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. � 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning. B. Dark-Surfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation (Under Steel Floor Deck Application at Radiant � Heated Slabs): ASTM C 612, Type IA; faced on one side with black glass-fiber mat or black polymer finish; malcimum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively,per ASTM E 84. � 1. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (31.2 K x m/W at 24 deg C). C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber board insulation as follows: � 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no � formaldehyde. 2. Low Emittmg: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. � 2.4 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application; with � maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 1. Thermal Blowing Insulation: � a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Certainteed Insulsafe SP Fiber Glass Blowing Insulation or approved substitution: 1) Open Attic Application - Thermal Resistance: R of 60. Minimum Installed � Thickness: 23.0 inches. � THERMAL INSULATION 072100-2 � � ' � � � , � 2. Thermal Closed-Cavity Blowing Insulation: � a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ' ' Certainteed OPTIMA Loose Fiber Glass Insulation for Closed Cavity Applications � or approved substitution: � 1) Compression Filled Exterior Wall Application - Thermal Resistance: R of � , 23 and Minimum Installed Thickness: 5.50 inches at 2x6 wood studs, R of � 25 and Minimum Installed Thickness: 6.0 inches at 6" steel studs. � 2) Cavity Membrane—Certainteed OPTIMA non-woven fabric. � ' � B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic � , spaces and vented eaves. � F � � 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS � ' ' � A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to � an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not �' ' less than 25 Ib/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/l00 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm � (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). � � ' 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorparated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � �; � ' a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. � b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. � �' B. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene � ' film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or �. polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb/1000 sq, ft. (10 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum � permeance rating of 0.1317 perm (7.56 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) and with flame-spread and smoke- � ' developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60,respectively,per ASTM E 84. � � E 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � � � a. Raven Industries Inc.;DURA-SKRIM 2FR. � ' b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR. b- � K C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder � manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. � , � � € ' � £ , F � , igg & P F THERMAL INSiTLATION 072100-3 � ' � � E � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and ' applications indicated. � B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain,or snow at any time. � C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. � D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness � indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION � A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below exterior grade line. � B. On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) in from � exterior walls. � 3 3 INSTALLATION OF COMPOSITE NAIL BASE INSULATED SHEATHING A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to � use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. � B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. � C. Securely attach to substrate by fastenmg as mdicated,complymg with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. � 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." � THERMAL INSULATION 072100-4 � ' � , , � � �y € , D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials � are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through � completed assembly. �; , � � � 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION � i � A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written �' instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use � , mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. ;' � B. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written � instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to ±: ' uniform density,but do not compact excessively. � � C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where � ' required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: � � � l. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum � ' volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 k�/cu. m). � 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. � � , 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR STEEL DECK SUBSTRATES � � � A. Install board insulation on steel deck substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation � ' anchors as follows: �. �. � l. Fasten insulation anchors to steel deck substrates with insulation anchor adhesive � ' according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to � insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and ` application indicated. � ' 2. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over �' spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not � to compress insulation below indicated thickness. � � 3. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers � to tips of spindles. � � � � �, , 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ; � � A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to � , � extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with � adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover � miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. ` ' �: � � t � �. � f ' �. s THERMAL INSULATION 072100- 5 �: ' � � � � � � B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. � 1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. � 2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of inetal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor- � retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. � C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and � vapor retarders. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. � Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. END OF SECTION 072100 � � � � � � � � � � THERMAL INSULATION 072100-6 � k � , g � # � ' � SECTION -WEATHER BARRIERS '� � . � � , A£g F PART 1 -GENERAL � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � .; ' A. Section Includes: � 1. Building wrap. � 2. Flexible flashing. � � ' � 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS � � ', t A. Product Data: For each type of product. � ; � � t. ' 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS :; � A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flas�iing, from ICC-ES. � �: ' � � PART2-PRODUCTS = � � ' s 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER � � ' A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed � indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; LTV � n. stabilized;and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow � Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap product or � comparable, approved substitution product with same specifications. � � ' 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 46.6g through 1 sq.m of surface in 24 hours per � ASTM E 96,Desiccant Method(Procedure A). � . � ' 3. Air Leakage: Not less than 0.02 L/sm2 @75Pa. 4 � B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap ' manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. �: � t �:. � � ' � ' �' � WEATHER BARRIERS .r :- 1 � ' � � i � 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Fle�cible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefm to produce an overall � thickness of not less than 0.025 inch(0.6 mm). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. DuPont(E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company);DuPont Flashing Tape. � b. Grace Cc�nstruction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self Adhered Flashing. . c. Protecto Wrap Company;BT-25 XL. d. Raven Industries Inc.;Fortress Flashshield. � e. Advanced Building Products Inc.;Wind-o-wrap. f. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofmg; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.;Aquaflash 500. � h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 40. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 WATER-RESISTNE BARRIER INSTALLATION � A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch C 1� mmA on each side of the break in supporting members at � expansion-or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch�100�nm)overlap unless � otherwise indicated. B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. Seal seams,edges,fasteners,and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. � 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches �100 mm)except that at � flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. � END OF SECTION 073,'�40 � � WEATHER BARRIERS �'��AD-2 � i � i � � � � 1 � SECTION 074213 -METAL WALL PANELS � ' � PART1 -GENERAL � , � ' k l.l SUMMARY � F. 5: � ' A. Section Includes: ; � 1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. �' � 2. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. � 3. ' Metal soffit panels. � �: � � B. Related Sections: � ' 1. Section 072100 Building Insulation-Composite nail base insulated sheathing � � � ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � A. Delegated Design: Design atta.chment of inetal wall panels to composite nail base insulated � , sheathing, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, in accordance with 2009 IBC Section 1405.11 and wind criteria indicated on structural �' drawings. � � � B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of inetal wall panels; details of edge � ' conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, � closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field- � assembled work. �: , g D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. � ' E. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and � wall-mounted items. � x � � F. Product test reports. � , G. Maintenance data. � � ' H. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. � � �: � � 13 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE �, A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. ' � � B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. a' � ' � � � � METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1 � � � � � �.,..0, ��t�� ° �3 � '}y; � �� ,;;,_-� - u, ,.u- � ��,-_ -,� , ...�.. ,� ,. �,�,m.. .. . �� _�-•�. , � �- ' � x.. . . �• ,� .. . a... � ;" _ .:s; ' > . ,��z,��:, . . . , �lv�.�. 8 . � ,,. .. , . .. .. � 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � replace components of inetal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. � B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer � agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified wananty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 45years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS � A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet(Ribbed and Flush Panels): Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with � ASTM A 755/A 755M. l. Zino-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. �� 2. Surface: Smooth,flat finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less � than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 4. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester � backer finish. � � METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -2 � � 1 � � � � � 1 � � k i � B. Uncoated, Weathering Steel Sheet(Flush Panel at Reppelling location): Cor-Ten A steel sheet. � � t ' 1. Steel Sheet: ASTM 242.. � ' ' 2. Surface: Smooth,flat finish. � � � ' 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � � � A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded � ' ' studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed � fasteners with heads matching color of inetal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory- � applied coating. Provide EPDM,PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. ; � ' � 2.3 EXPOSED-FASTENER,LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS ` � � A. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side �; laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. ; ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal Sales � T10-A Wall Panel or approved, comparable product. # � � 2. Profile: Box rib. � , 3. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel sheet, 0.022-inch(0.56-mm}nominal thickness. F � a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer. � ` b. Color: Metal Sales Autumn Tan. 4. Major-Rib Spacing: Four inches o.c.,2 3/4" ridge width. 5. Panel Coverage: 28 inch. ' ' 6. Panel Height: 1 1/2 inch. ' € � �: 2.4 CONCEALED-FASTENER,LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS � , � A. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and � interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to � ' supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight ' � installation. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Imogene s ' Shingle Profile as manufactured by Telluride Metalwarks, Inc., 1544 Oxbow Drive, Suite � 211, Montrose, CO 81401, 970.7283686, telluridemetalworks.com or comparable, E approved product. � � 2. Profile: Shingle � a. Shingle Size: 10 inches by 24 inches(9 1/4 inch by 23 1/4 inch exposed area) i ' 3. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel sheet, 0.040-inch(1.02-mm)nominal thickness. � a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer. � � ' b. Color: Cor-Ten AZP as manufactured by US Steel = � � � METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -3 � � � �. � � 2.5 METAL SOFFIT PANELS � A. Provide factory-formed flush, perforated and non-perforated metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically � attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories , required for weathertight installation. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Berridge � FW-12 Panel or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. � b. Architectural Building Components. c. ATAS International,Inc. � d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. e. Cheney Flashing Company. f. Copper Sales,Ina � g. Dimensional Metals, Inc. h. Englert, Ina i. Fabral. j. Innovative Metals Company, Inc. � k. MBCI;Div. of NCI Building Systems. l. McElroy Metal,Inc. m. Merchant&Evans Inc. � n. Metal-Fab Manufacturing,L.L.C. o. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. p. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. � q. Ultra Seam Incorporated. 2. Profile: Flush,perforated and non-perforated. 3. Material: Zino-coated(galvanized)steel sheet,0.028-inch(0.71-�ntn)nominal thickness. � a. Exte�ior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: Match finish and color of sheet metal roofing. � 2.6 ACCESSORIES � A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete meta.l wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, � gaskets, fillers,closure strips,and similar items. Match material and finish of inetal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall � panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. � 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked,polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (2S-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where � indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. � METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -4 � � � i � � G ' � ' � B. Flashing.and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-�nm) minimum thickness, zino-coated � (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. � � '' � Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished � appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, comers, � endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish x flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. � , � � � 2.7 FABRICATION � ' � A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent � possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated # � ' performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles $ and with dimensional and structural requirements. � � � , B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel � and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. � � C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full � � length of panel. � � D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in � � SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, � and other characteristics of item indicated. � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' 3.1 PREPARATION � z A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous �. � wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and meta.l wall panel � manufacturer's written recommendations. � � � i �� 3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION � � � � ' A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each � lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. � l. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items � ' � for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Y 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side f; of inetal wall panels. � ' 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizonta.l alignment. Use �' proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of � washer. � � 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress ; washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in ; predrilled holes. ;:' x> ' � � METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -5 �. � � � � 5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of inetal wall panels and between panels and � protruding equipment,vents,and accessories. 6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-sid� surface of fastenings on end laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, � or fluted panels;and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight. 7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl- rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. � B. Metal Soff'it Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. � 1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metai soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. � 33 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting,and � provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, � copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. � B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, � and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are � installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of inetal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. � , B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. � � END OF SECTION 074213 � � � � METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -6 � � s ' � � � ; � SECTION 075323 -ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING � , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � � t 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section Includes: # : 1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. � ; ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � , B. LEED Submittals: � , 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement � of VOC content. � C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and � ' atta.chments to other work. � � ' D. Samples: For each product included in the roofing system. & E. Research/evaluation reports. ; �: ' F. Maintenance data. s � � � � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ � A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized,or licensed by membrane � ' roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive � manufacturer's special warranty. � 3 � B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including for membrane roofing system approved by � ' membrane roofing manufacturer. ` � � r C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class C; for application and roof slopes indicated, � ' as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. � Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. ' �. � ' D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � � . _ �,, %„.3 � .:;� , �, ; �. � _ �.,. �� _. _ � �, ,. _�. �. ,�. . � �.. „ _. _. .�n„ 2,_ .. _ _ ,e x �a x .. . ... x �w�_ _. � ? ' � ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFIlVG 075323 - 1 � � � � � � 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions � and warranty requirements. � .�.. ..... i . :.. .—R:e . . .. ... .. ��. , . . .. _..,� ;. ..� ._ .. �. � . �. .. ... . . . . . .. . .. . . . � . 1.5 WARRANT'Y . A. S ecial Warran : Manufacturer's standard or customized form,without monetary limitation, in � p tY which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of inembrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. � 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING � A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637,Type I,non-reinforced,uniform,flexible EPDM sheet. � � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: � a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. a GAF Materials Corporation. � d. GenFlex Roofing Systems. e. Johns Manville. � £ Mule-Hide Products Co.,Inc. g. Protechve Coatings,Inc. 2. Thickness: 60 mils(1.5 nun),nominal. � 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. � ,: � � � ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING 075323 -2 � � � n s � � � � � i � _. � � . � � � �„ � 2.3 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS � � A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer � for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. � '; ' � 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having � jurisdiction. � ,; � 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply � with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, � Subpart D(EPA Method 24): € � � � a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. � b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. ° c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. � ' d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. �: � g. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 4 � h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. � � i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. s j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L. � 1 � B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mi1- (1.5-mni-} thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to � � application. ° � �C. Bondmg Adhesive: Manufacturer s standard,water based. 9 � ' �: D. Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner or � manufacturer's standard, synthetio-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide �' minimum,butyl splice tape with release film. ; ' ' � E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and ��' ' � acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. � F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, �`` � metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and � outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T joint covers, in-seam k sealants,termination reglets,cover strips, and other accessories. � � . � � � , �.�, ... , � � „ . � �� . ,,:,a � :...A ., .., �, ' � w ��... ,., o�;� .. , �' � � � ETHYI,ENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING 075323 -3 � � g �.. � � � �� =ss'.� �'�� " ��;�. � 9' � . ..�r ... ,.�;. m..._. `�.,, . . .. . �., � 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289,Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber � mat facer on both major surfaces. 4��. � � :� �,; . ; .�...:�. � C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of l./4 inch per 12 inches(1:48)unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide reformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where � P indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. � 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- � resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation[and cover � boards]to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Tnsulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended cold-applied adhesive formulated � to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch � (6 tnm)thick. � � � � � a � � � . . . . . . . ... ....., r .. ... . � . � .� . � s.�.� . ..... ..... .. .. . . . .. . .. .. �. � � ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING 075323 -4 � i p F ' � � � , � � 2.7 WALKWAYS � � A. Fle�cible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, � r surface-textured walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to � membrane roofing system manufacturer. s 1. Extent: Provide around rooftop equipment and along a path from roof access door 254C ; ' � to roof top equipment locations. � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � �. � 3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION � A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to = precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. � � B. Com 1 with membrane roofin s stem and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for s PY g Y installing roof insulation. ; � } C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. . � £ ' D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation � thickness is 2.7 inches {68 mm} or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each s succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in °F � � each direction. �°• � E. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install first layer of insulation to deck using �: mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof � , insulation to deck type. � 1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of � � roof. � 2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. #` � .. g' ; §' � . r. . , � .. r - � � ��. . . � � _. . . x_ . . � .: : 4 H. Install cover boards over insulation with long�oints in continuous straight lines with end joints �' staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches {150 mm) in � � each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. ¢ t Q 1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners,perimeter, and field of roof. � � � � � � � � � ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING 075323 -5 � ' �' �; G � 3.2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION � A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to rela�c before � installing. B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum � dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of inembrane roofing at rate required by � manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of inembrane roofing. D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, � penetrations,and perimeters. E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly � roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of inembrane roofing terminations. � F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's � written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of inembrane roofing terminations. G. Repair tears,voids,and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. � 33 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION � A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. � B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing: � C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean s lice areas, a ly splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping � P PP sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. � E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashing and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. � � � ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING 075323 -6 � � � ' � � � � ' � 3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION � � A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway � ', t products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's � written instructions. � � . ' � 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � � ; � 1 � � . � � � � i ' � ; B. Repair or remove and replace components of inembrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply wi�h specified requirements. ; ' _ � � END OF SECTION 075323 � 1 � � F , � � � t ' g s � ' � E �. f ' c : Y: ' � E , � ' � , � �' � � � ' �(p y3 F � ' � (} E ' �g: � d ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER(EPDM)ROOFING 075323 -7 � ' � , � � � � � � � � ' � SECTION 076100- SHEET METAL ROOFING � s � ' , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � t , 1.1 SUMMARY � � � :' ' A. Section Includes: � 1. Standing-seam metal roofing, on-site,roll formed. � 2. Roof ice-melt systems(RIM). $ ' � B. Related Sections: F 1. Division One, Section "Alternates" for alternate bid on eave ice melt systems. � 2. Division Seven, Section "Sheet Metal Flashing". : ' � � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � ' � A. Energy Performance: Provide metal roofing with solar reflectance index not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing � agency. # ' � B. Roof Ice-Melt Performance: 36 w/ft at eaves, 24 w/ft at valleys. � ' � 13 SUBMITTALS � ; � ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � B. LEED Submittals: � ' l. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For roof panels, indicating that panels comply � with Solar Reflectance Index requirement. � � ' C. Shop Drawings: Show installation layout of sheet metal roofing, including plans, elevations, � expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled � � work. � �; ' � 1. Include details for forming,joining, and securing sheet metal roofing, including pattern � of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, roof penetrations, edge � , conditions, special conditions, connections to adjoining work, and details of accessory � items. � pgk § ' 2. Detailed drawings showing layouts for each roof ice-melt system section, cross section � drawings, control panel drawings and installation instructions. � � � D. Delegated Design: Design seam-mounted, stop-type snow guards, including comprehensive � t engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,using snow load information included � on structural drawings and standing seam design information included in this specification. � b ' � �: SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100- 1 � � � � � � E. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. � F. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale with coordinated details for penetrations : and roof-mounted items. � G. Portable Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for equipment manufacturer's portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing panels that comply with UL � requirements. H. Product test reports. � I. Mamtenance and Operation data. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricatar authorized by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to fabricate and install sheet metal roofing units required for this Project, and who maintains current UL certification of its portable roll-forming � equipment. B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming � equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance. Maintain UL certification of portable roll- forming equipment for duration of sheet metal roofing work. � C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. � D. Roof Ice-Melt System: 1. The Control Panel shall bear a UL Listed label. � ' 2. The manufacturer shall have at least ten (10) years experience in the design and supply of Roof and Gutter De-Icing Systems. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to � demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave, including fascia, and soffit as shown on � Drawings; approximately 48 inches (120U mm) square by full thickness, including attachments,underlayment, and accessories. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � 1.5 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty: Warranty form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within Two years from date of , Substantial Completion. � SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-2 ' ' € t . . . � , B. Special Warranty on Fmishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory- � ' applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. � C. Ice-melt System. � 1. The ice-melt Heating Cables shall be warranted against defects in material and � ' , workmanship for a period of two(2)years from date of final acceptance. � 2. The Control Panel components shall be warranted against defects in material and � workmanship for a period of one(1)year from date of acceptance. , ' 3. The manufacturer, at his option, shall either repair or supply replacement materials if that � material is defective per the above warranty definitions � , � PART2-PRODUCTS � � ' ' 2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS � � ; � A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a � ' strippable,temporary protective film before shipping. � B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip � ' process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. � � 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating � ' designation; structural quality. � � 2. Thickness: Nomina10.022 inch.(0.56 mm)unless otherwise indicated � 3. Surface: Smooth, flat. � 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: � ' � a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less � than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. � ' � 5. Color: Beridge,Old Gray Zinc or approved equal. ; � � �: � , � 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS � � A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, � ' consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- E modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when � recommended by underlayment manufacturer. � , p: 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F(116 deg C). � 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 � ' deg C}. � � � B. Slip Sheet: Building paper,3-lb/100 sq. ft. {U.16-kg/sq. m}minimum, rosin sized. ` ' � i: s ' � SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-3 � ' � � � 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system � and as recommended by primary sheet metal or portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. General: � a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps � or factory-applied coating. b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drillmg screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. c. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for � metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to � ASTM A 153/A 153M,ASTM F 2329,or Series 300 stainless steel. B. Solder: !� f� L For Zino-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60,60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. � C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining �� tape 1/2 inch(13 mm}wide and 1/$ incli(3 mm)thick. � D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, � class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; � polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. � 2.4 ACCESSORIES � A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,fillers, � metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide accessories as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to � produce sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. ' a. Metallio-Coated Steel Roofing: 0.025-mch-(0.64-mm-)thick stainless steel. ' SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-4 ' p — : � , ! � � ti ' 2. Clips: Minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to � withstand negative-load requirements. � 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or ; t closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mn�-) thick, flexible-closure � strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. ' 4. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and finish as sheet metal roofing, � minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing. � � I2.5 SNOW GUARDS � � � A. Snow Guards, General: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating sheet metal roofing; complete with predrilled holes,clam s, or hooks for anchorin . � , p g � � B. Seam-Mounted, Stop-Type Snow Guards: Cast-aluminum stops designed for attachment to � ' vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal roofing with stainless-steel set screws. � � � 1. Basis-of-Design: Alpine SnowGuards, a division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, � , Inc., #33 clamp to the seam pad style snow guards or, subject to compliance with requirements,approved products by the following manufacturers: � a. Berger Bros. Co. � ' b. Polar Blox. : � � , 2.6 ROOF ICE-MELT(RIM) SYSTEM � , � A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide custom � engineered RIM System manufactured by Bylin Engineered Systems, 4800 Golden Foothill � ' Parkway El Dorado Hi.11s,CA, (1-888-313-5666)or comparable,approved system. � � �. B. RIM Cover Panels to be 40 mil aluminum with Kynar-based paint fnish and be supplied in l0' F ' lengths. _ r � � C. SRH/WFP Heating Cable � ' 1. The heating cable shall be UL and CSA listed specifically as electric roof and gutter de- � icing and snow-melting equipment and be manufactured in the USA. � 2. The heating cable shall be of parallel resistance construction capable of being cut to � ' length and terminated in the field. � 3. The heating cable shall consist of two parallel nickel-plated copper bus wires embedded � in a radiation cross-linked self-regulating conductive polymer core specifically designed � for snow and ice melting. The heating cable shall be capable of varying its heat output � , along its entire length. The heating cable shall include a polyolefin dielectric jacket rated � 300 VAC at 105°C, a tinned-copper braid (14 AWG equivalent wire size), and a iJV � stabilized polyolefin overjacket. � , 4. SRH / WFP Heating Cable supplied by Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA � (1-888-313-5666). � � ' g r ' � � � � , SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100- 5 � � � � � D. Control Panel 1. Custom engineered high efficiency control panel with a UL Listed Label to control the � operation of the RIM System and gutter and downspout SRH/ WFP heating cables. The control panel shall include circuit breakers with 30ma ground fault protection, temperature controllers, solid state relays,terminal blocks and accessories. � 2. Control Panel supplied by Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA (1-888-313- 5666). E. Junction Box/Power Termination � 1. The heating cable circuits shall be connected to the power wiring in an approved junction box with approved termination components. � 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels with UL-certified, portable roll- � forming equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" � Article. Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. B. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and � tool marks;true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral � flashings, and other components of inetal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic � action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by � fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions,metal, and � other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or � blocking and that tops of fasteners are flush with surface. 1. Space fasteners as required by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for specified UL classification for wind-uplift resistance. � � SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 -6 � xi - $ � , ; , 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION � � A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on � ' roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Comply with temperature restrictions of � underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing f underlayment at low temperatures. Apply over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, f , with end laps of not less than 6 inches (I 50 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches {90 mm). At valleys, install continuous, 36" wide strip parallel to valley(over underlayment applied shingle fashion)centered on valley. � , Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. � � B. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofing. � , � 33 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � � ' A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with � provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, � protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required far a � , complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. � � 1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. � ' 2. Provide metal closures at peaks,rake edges,rake walls, eaves and each side of ridge caps. � 3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, ralces, and perimeter of all ` openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. � ' 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels � for fasteners. { 5. Install ridge caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds. � 6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing � ' splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. � 7. Install sealant tape where indicated. � 8. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the � ' materiaL � � � B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches � � � (32 mm)for nails and not less than 3/4 inch(19 mm) for wood screws. � � C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, a ' protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by � applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent � separation as recommended by SMACNA. � � ' D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to � minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight � , installation. � � i } , � � � ' � �' �- � C: SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-7 � ' � �; �: � � � � 3.4 ON-SITE,ROLL-FORMED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION � A. General: Install on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofing fabricated from UL-certified � equipment to comply with equipment manufacturer's written instructions for UL wind-upli8 resistance class indicated. Provide sheet metal roofing of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise restricted by on-site or shipping limitations. ofin : Fasten sheet metal roofin to su orts with concealed B. Standmg-Seam Sheet Metal Ro g g pp clips at each standing-seam joint at location, at spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer of portable roll-forming equipment. � 1. Install clips to substrate with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in equipment manufacturer's written � installation instructions. 3. Before panels are joined, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower panel. � 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so cleat, sheet metal roofing,and field-applied sealant are completely engaged. a. Seam Height: 2 inches. � ` b. Seam Spacing: 16 inches. C. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less,use cleats at transverse seams. ;�� 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used,embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than l inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient � temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 2l deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- � type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C}. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section . "Joint Sealants." � 3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and � provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, � copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. � 2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"to comply with that Section's requirements. : � � SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100- 8 � , ' � � � � , ' � � B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation � ' instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners � where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, � and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. � , � C. Stop-Type Snow Guards: Attach snow guards to vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal � roofing with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate sheet metal roofing. � ' � 1. Provide Three rows of snow guards, at locations indicated on Drawings, spaced 12 inches � apart,beginning 18 inches up from roof edge at gutter. � ', , � D. Roof Ice-melt System: The RIM System, SRH/WFP Gutter/Downspout Heating System and � Control Panel shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's Design and Installation � Manual. Any deviations shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer. g ' 4 � 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � , � A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. � � � B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is installed � , ' unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. � � � � ' END OF SECTION 076100 � � � ' � � � � � ' � � � , 4 � � f ' � �a 3 ' � � � � C , � `s t' I ' � �: �' , � SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-9 � ' �. � i - r s � ' � � i , � ; SECTION 076200- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM � � ` , PART1 -GENERAL � � ' l.l SUMMARY � � � � ' A. Section Includes: � 1. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. � 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. � ' 3. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. � � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' g 3 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � , B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, k elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field- � assembled work. � ' � 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and � trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, � ' expansion joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining � work. � � � C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. � ' �. D. Maintenance data. � � ' E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. � Fp C , { F , 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal � Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. � , � B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. � , � 1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including fascia, approximately 4 feet long, including � supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments,underlayment,and accessories. � , � C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � � � � ' ; � z: � � i SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200- 1 � � e � � � 1.4 WARRANTY � � A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of � factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. y PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 SHEET METALS � A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective film before shipping. � B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. � 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: AST'M A 653/A 653M, G9U (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. � 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. � 3. Color: Beridge-Old Gray Zinc or approved equaL � 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, � consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when � recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (1 16 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 � deg C). B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/]00 sq. ft. (0.16-k�/sq. m)minimum, rosin sized. � 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants,and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing � and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. � � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -2 : � � � ; , B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annulaz threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and i bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. � � � 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,with hex-washer head. � � a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or � i � factory-applied coating. � b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for � metal being fastened. , ' c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching � internal gutter width. � ' 2. Fasteners for Zino-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according � to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. � � C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant � , tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape ]/2 inch (13 mm)wide and ]J8 inch (3 min)thick. � t D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, � � class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain � watertight. � ' E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; � � polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited � movement. � ' � F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. ' � ' � 2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL � � �. ' A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in � SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, � metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to � ' greatest extent possible. � 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. � 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool � , marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form � hems. € 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not � , allowed on faces exposed to view. � � � B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric � � sealant. � � � € , � � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-3 � t � � � � C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion � joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or � from compatible,noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with � elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. � 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Han in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, com lete with end pieces, outlet tubes, � g g p and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of � size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers,gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. . � B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. � 1. Hanger Style: SMACNA Fig. 1-35C 2. Fabricate from the following materials a. Galvanized Steel: O.U22 inch (0.56 mm)thick. � 3. Accessories: a. Offset Downspout Adapter: 4x6x6 PVC adaptor to transition from sheet metal downspout to drain tile. � C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior,4-inch-(100-mm-)wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches(100 mm) � beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: O.U28 inch (�.71 mm)thick. D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of � dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the following materials: � 1. Galvanized Steel: U.028 inch (0.71 mm)thick. � 2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS � A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous � cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the following materials: � 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1 A2 mm)thick. � �� SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -4 � � ' } : � k � � � � � r B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: � , 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch(0.71 mm)thick. � € � C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: � � � 1. Galvanized Steel: [.022 inch (0.56 mn�)thick. � � D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: � � � l. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (().71 mm)thick. � � < 2.7 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS � ' � A. Apron, Step,Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: � 1. Galvanized Steel: Q.022 inch (0.56 mm}thick. � � � B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: ' 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.02$ inch(0.71 mm} thick. � ' 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness>thick. � � � C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: � ' 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.422 inch (q.56 mm}thick. � � D. Eave,Rake Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: � � 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm)thick. � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION ' ' �` � 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION � � ;: A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. � Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer � � rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to a shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (I 50 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 min) � between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1l2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. � Cover underlayment within 14 days. � ' � � 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL � ' � �; A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in � place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal Y ' flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, � solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as � required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. � , t 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, _ neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds, and sealant. � ' � � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-5 � � � � � � � 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight � performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two � fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks. � 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, � protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. � 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Ex ansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space � P movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 ' mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not � be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm)deep,filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than ]-1/4 � inches(32 mm)for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm)for wood screws. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. � F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. � 3 3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system � according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. � B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored straps spaced not more than 36 inches(9a0 mm)apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight � with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet � (15.24 m)apart. Install expansion joint caps. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-l/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with � fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches(1500 mm)o.c. in between. � � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-6 � � � ' � � ,; ' D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered � edge strips, and under roofing membrane. � r � E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 � mm}below valley discharge. � ' � � � 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION � r � A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet € metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet � ' Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as � indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and � weather resistant. � � � ' B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations � in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of = roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-n�m) � , centers. � � C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in � � SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. � � �. l. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at � � 16-inch (400-mm)centers. � 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at � � 24-inch (60U-n�m)centers. � r: � D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. � Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend � counterflashing 4 inches (l00 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum � ' of 4 inches (100 mm}and bed with sealant. � � E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation � , of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant and clamp � flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. � ' ± 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � ri � A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and � , weathering. � � � B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim � ' are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. � � � END OF SECTION 076200 { n: ' �: � � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -7 � � � � � '; Ig a d � � 3 � ' � ; SECTION 079200-JOINT SEALANTS � � ' ' PART 1 -GENERAL Y � � , � l.l SUMMARY � € A. Section Includes: � l � 1. Silicone joint sealants. � 2. Urethane joint sealants. � " t 3. Latex joint sealants. � 4. Acoustical joint sealants. � , , � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' , A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. s � B. LEED Submittal: � � � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the � weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. � � , � C. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required. � � D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: � � � 1. Joint-sealant application,joint location, and designation. � 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. � ' 3. Joint-sealant formulation. � 4. Joint-sealant color. � � � ' E. Product test reports. � � F. Field-adhesion test reports. � � ' G. Warranties. � � � i ' 1.3 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE . � � A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing � �: � indicated. �� ; B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � � � � � , � � JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 1 � , � � � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in � this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the � weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Part 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): � 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. � 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 � classifications for type, grade,class,and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous � substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in � repeated contact with food,provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. � 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: AST'M C 920. � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Advanced Materials- Silicones. � c. Pecora Corporation. d. Sika Corporation;Construction Products Division. e. Tremco Incorporated. � 2. Type: Single component(S). 3. Grade: Nonsag(NS). � 4. Class: 25. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic(NT). � JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -2 � � ' 23 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS � i � � A. Urethane Joint Sealant—Horizontal Traffic Joints : ASTM C 920. � � � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � � the following. � � a. Bostik, Inc. � � b. Pecora Corporation. � c. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. � � d. Tremco Incorporated. � � � � 2. Type: Multicomponent(M). 3. Grade: Pourable(P). � 4. Class: 25. � , 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic(T). � h � B. Urethane Joint Sealant—Vertical and Horizontal Non-Traffic Joints : ASTM C 920. � ' � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � ' the following: � s � a. Bostik, Inc. � , b. Pecora Corporation. � c. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. F. d. Tremco Incorporated. � � � 2. Type: Multicomponent(M). � 3. Grade: Nonsag(NS). � 4. Class: 25. � ' S. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic(NT). � � � � , 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS � A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, � � Grade NF. � � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � �� the following: � a. Bostik, Ina � , b. Pecora Corporation. � c. Tremco Incorporated. � � � � � � ' � � � JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3 � � � � � � 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS � A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with AST'M C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through � perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation. � b. USG Corporation. � 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface � skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application � indicated,and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant � manufacturer. MI ELLANEOUS MATERIALS � 2.7 SC A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of � sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants � and sealant backing materials. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces � adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 PREPARATION � A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do � not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. � JOINT SEALANTS 079200-4 � � � � � ' ! B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as � indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to � comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- j , sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. � C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with � ' ' adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or � by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling � without disturbing joint seaL � � � 3.2 INSTALLATION � ' A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint � sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. � ' , B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position � required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint � widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. � , � E 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. � 2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings. ; � 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and � : replace them with dry materials. � � , C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants � and backs of joints. � � D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time � ' I backings are installed: � � 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. � 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. � ' 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow � � optimum sealant movement capability. � ' � E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or � curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form ~ smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure � � contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of�omt. �: � 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. k ' 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not � discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. � 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise ; ' indicated. � � � F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written � � recommendations. � � � � � � JOINT SEALANTS 079200-5 � , �. � � � G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods � and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. � 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: � 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per � each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint � Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from � testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other � requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. � 3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. � 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. � 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. � B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: � a. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. � c. Joints in siding, soffits and exterior trim. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. � e. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. � 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. � � JOINT SEALANTS 079200-6 � i � � � � � C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal tr�c surfaces. 3 ; ' � 1. Joint Locations: Q � � ' , a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. � b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. � 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. � ' 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. � � D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. � � ' ' 1. Joint Locations: � � a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. � ' b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. E. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls. � � d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and � Y ! , windows. � � � � ' 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. � � � 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. _ �; E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal � nontraffic surfaces. � � ' 1. Joint Sealant Location: � �. � a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors, and counters. � b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. � �- � � 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. � 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. � � � ' � F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal � nontraffic surfaces. � � , 1. Joint Location: � � � a. Acoustical joints where indicated. = � � s 2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. � 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � ' � END OF SECTION 079200 � f. k t � � � • €- � � JOINT SEALANTS 079200-7 � , � � � , � � SECTION 081113 -HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES � � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � , � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. Section Includes: � � . � 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. � � ' � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � , A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, � ' preparations for hardware,and other details. $ � C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. � , ' D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. � � � E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for � ' � details and openings as those on Drawings. � � � � � � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � �: A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled � � by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive � pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL l OB. � s � 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: [Where indicated] [At vertical exit enclosures and exit � ,� passageways], provide doors that have a maacimum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 de r F 250 de C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test � � ( � ) � ' exposure. � B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. : � ' � � � , � � � � � i z � � ! � � HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 � , � � � � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � 1. Amweld Building Products,LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. � 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Kewanee Corporation(The). : 5. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand company. � 2.2 MATERIALS � A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS,T e B. � YP C. Metallio-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with � � minimum A40(Z�'120)metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 4�L (12G) coating � designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M � or ASTM A 1011/A 1O11M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts,and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. � F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. � G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665,Type L H. Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing." � I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil � (().4-mm)dry film thickness per coat. � � HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -2 � i � i ' �g & � , � � � � a C € � � $ 23 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS � � � : , A. General: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8. � � 1. Design: Flush panel � : ' 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, � polyurethane, polyisocyanurate,mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. � � � a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. � ! b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. � ft./Btu (2.166 K x sq. m/W)when tested according to ASTM C 1363. � � � 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. � 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (l.U-mm-) thick, end � closures or channels of same material as face sheets. # 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." � � � B. Exterior and Interior poors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply � , � with ANSUSDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSUSDI A250.4 for physical performance � level: ` � 1. Leve14 and Physical Performance Level A(Maximum Duty),Model 1 (Full Flush). � � � � C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSUSDI A250.6. � � � � 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES � � A. General: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8. � � ` B. Exterior and Interior Frames with Steel Doors: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. � �. E ' l. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. � 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. � 3. Frames for Leve14 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch-(1.7-mm-)thick steel sheet. � � ' C. Interior Frames with Solid Core Wood Doors: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. z � � 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. x � 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. � 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch-(13-mm-)thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch-(l.3-mm-)thick steel sheet. �, � � D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSUSDI A250.6. � � � �; ' { � � ; HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -3 � � � � � � 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS � A. Jamb Anchors: � l. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (SU mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 � inch(4.5 mm)thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud,welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 � ia�ch(l.0 mm)thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm)thick, and as follows: � 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors,with two holes to receive fasteners. � 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.$ mm) thick, same material as � door face sheet. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 � mm)high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch(0.$mm)thick, same material as � frames. 2.7 ACCESSORIES � A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.016 incli(0.4 mm)thick. � , 2.8 FABRICATION � A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. � B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior poors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in � top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. � � HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -4 � � ' � , � ' E � '' , C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or � angles at each joint,fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. � 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress,and make smooth, � ' , flush, and invisible. � 2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, � fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs � ! ' by butt welding. � 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners � unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be � ; , grouted. � 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot � ' ' welds per anchor. � 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: � � a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and ' bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (8l3 mm} o.c. and as � follows: � �: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches(1524 mm)high. � ' 2) Three anchors per jamb from 6U to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 mm)high. � 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches(2286 to 3048 mm)high. � ' 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches � (610 mn-�)or fraction thereof above 120 inches(304$ mm)high. � � � ' b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than l 8 inches (457 mm) from top and � bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 in.ches (813 mm) o.c. and as � follows: � ' � 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches(1524 mm)high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(l 524 to 2286 mm)high. � ' 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches(2286 to 2438 �mn)high. 4) Five anchars per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches � (610 mm)or fraction thereof above 96 inches(2438 mm)high. � ' S) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (I U66 mm) wide and �. mounted in metal-stud partitions. � � � , c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. P d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 nim} � from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches {660 mm) � � t o.c. ° � 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors,drill stops to receive door silencers. � ' � a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. � b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers. fi' t � , � € � � ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -5 � � � D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised � hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated,or if not indicated,according to ANSUSDI A250.8. � 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door : hardware. � 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSUSDI A250.6 and ANSUDHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with � Division 16 electrical Sections. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. � l. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. � 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors � and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and rnoldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and � type of installation indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES � A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. � 1. Shop Primer. ANSUSDI A250.10. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.1 L 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent � anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving � surfaces smooth and undamaged. � a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; � grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. � e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. � HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 � � ' � � ' , � £ Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. � g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout � ' containing antifreezing agents. � � 2. Floar Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, � ' and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. � � � a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled � ' ' expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. � � 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. � , 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space � between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, � twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: � ' � a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/l6 inch (l.6 nu�i), measured at door rabbet on a line � 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. r ' b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal �. line parallel to plane of wa1L � c. Twist: Plus or minus l./16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of � ' jambs on parallel lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall. � d. Plumbness: Plus or minus l/16 inch (1.6 mm}, measured at jambs at floor. � �. �: ' � B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified ¢ below. Shim as necessary. g ' g � 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: �: � � a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch(3 mm)plus or minus 1J16 inch (l.�i mm). � ' b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm} plus or minus 1/16 inch (l.6 � mm). � c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). � ' d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor(No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 � inch(19 mm). � 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. � ' � C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with � hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. � f � � l. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches {50 mm) o.c. from each �' corner. � ' � � £ �: , � R C t � ' �: �. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 � ' � � � 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING � A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace � defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped,bowed,or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of � prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying,rust-inhibitive primer. C. Metallio-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. � END OF SECTION 081113 � � � � � � � � � � � � � HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 � � , � � � ' � SECTION 081416-FLUSH WOOD DOORS � , � ' ' PART 1 -GENERAL , � � ,' ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section Includes: � � 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. � 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. � ' � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � , ' � A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications. � B. LEED Submittals: � ' 1. Product Data for Credrt EQ 4.4: For adhesives and composrte wood products, � documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. � ' � C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; � construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and � ' other pertinent data. � � 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. � , 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. � 3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. � � � ' D. Samples: For factory-finished doors. � � � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' � ¢ A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, � ' "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." �: 3 B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a � qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive � , pressure accarding to NFPA 252 or UL l OB. � s � � , �. � � � r ri ' � � ' � � g; FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416- 1 � , �' � � � PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Manufacturers: Subjecf to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco,Inc. � 3. Buell Door Company Ina 4. Eagle Plywood&Door Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Eggers Industries. � 6. Graham; an Assa Abtoy Group company. 7. Marshfield Door Systems,Inc. � 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that � . do not contain urea forma l de hy de. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: � 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. C. Particleboard-Core Doors: � 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2,made with binder containing � no urea-formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. � D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire- protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer � stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. � 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: � 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. � 2. Species: Red oak. � 3. Cut: Plain sliced(flat sliced) 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. � FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2 � k � I, ' � i � � !, , 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. � 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. � � 7. Core: Particleboard. � , ' 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit � abrasive planed before veneering. � , � 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES � � ' A. Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2- � mm-)thick, cold-rolled steel sheet;with baked-enamel-or powder-coated finish. r � � ' � 2.5 FABRICATION � � � A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of � ' referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. � � � 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. � ' B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. � � ' C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. � � 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. � 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory fmished. Comply with � ' applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." � �. � � 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING � � � A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory fmishing. Complete fabrication, � ' including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, � before finishing. g � , 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be � omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts,and mortises. � � , B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. � C. Transparent Finish: � � , t 1. Grade: Premium. �- 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. f � 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. � � 5. Sheen: Satin. � � � ' f � � �' ' � � ' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3 � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and � the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. : 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. � C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. � Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide lJ8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. � Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm} from bottom of door to top of decorative floar finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 1/4 � inch(6.4 mm)from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. � D. Factory-Fmished Doors: Restore fimsh before mstallation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. � END OF SECTION 081416 � � � � � � � � FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-4 � G � ' � � � � '; ' � SECTION 083113 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES � � � ', , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' � 1.1 SLTMMARY � � � ' A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. � € � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' � A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. ; ' B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations, sections, deta.ils,and attachments to other wark. � � C. Samples: For each door face material in specified finish. y � , D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to �: installation. � � � 1.3 COORDINATION � v � ' A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to ' concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule � specified in "Submittals"Article. � ' ; PART2-PRODUCTS � � ' � 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS � , A. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. _: � � 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M,for galvanizing steel and iron products. � , 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M,for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 4 ,: B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel(CS)with A60 (ZF180) ; , zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating or G60(ZI SO)mill-phosphatized zinc coating. ¢ � C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal � � ' Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ` 3 1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer. , D. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch (U.76-mm)zino-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound. r: E. Manufacturer's standard finish. ' � � � ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 � ' � � t � � 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS � A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � 1. J.L. Industries,Inc. � 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Milcor Inc. � B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. l. Locations: WaIL � 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-(1.5-mm-)thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) � wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release. � 23 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR ATTICS A. Available Manufacturers: Sub'ect to com liance with re uirements manufacturers offerin � J P 9 � g products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: � 1. Attic Door;EZ Hatch Attic Access Door,P.O. Box 15,Mansfield, MA 02048, (508)320- 9082,batticdoor.com. � B. Non-rated attic access doors and frames. 1. Door: Fabricate using gloss white mineral board face, extruded polystyrene (EPS) core, � and fire rated rubber sealing gasket over top of EPS core. 2. Frame: Plywood frame is installed into a wood framed 22-1/2"x 30-1/2"rough opening. � Frame is 12"tall and provides insulation dam. Wood trim is pre-secured to frame. Rubber gasket is installed on trim on each side of frame. 3. Finish: Pre-finished gloss white painted wood door and trim. � 2.4 FABRICATION � A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. � B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. � � ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 -2 � � � , � � � ; , . . } C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Fumish � attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports � indicated. � ' � D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when � � closed. � � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' 3.1 INSTALLATION � , A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. � � B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels � ' aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. R � � C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. � ' � 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING q � ' A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. � �, � B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped,bowed, or otherwise damaged. � ' ' � � END OF SECTION 083113 � ' � � ' � � � � � ' � � � , � � � ' � � � � ' � � ' - r ' � � ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 -3 x ' � � � � ' � � � � ' � SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS � 1 ' � PART 1 -GENERAL ¢ { � % ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. � ' � B. Related Section: � � ' 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. � � � � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � � A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without � ' failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction � and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. � � B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a � ' qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. � � C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, � ' and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7 � 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. � ' � � D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 � or DASMA 105. � L � � l. Air Infiltration: MaaLimum rate of 0.08 cfmisq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. n�) at 15 and 25 mph � (24.1 and 40.2 km/h). � ' � � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � ' � � A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. � � , B. LEED SubmittaL• � � C. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed � in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to � ' other work. � � D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. � ' f � � ? ' � � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083613 - 1 � � � � � E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance � requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. . F. Maintenance data. � G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer ualifications: Manufacturer's authorized re resentative who is trained and approved � Q P for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. : B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, � by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless � otherwise indicated. � � � 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. � B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair � or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS � A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from manufacturer's standard zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, steel sheet. 1. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal,with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, � separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles � formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083613 -2 � , ' � � � ' � from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not � more than 4$ inches(12l 9 mm}apart. � � � � C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section � profile. � ; � ' D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen � door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed � to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites. � � � E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. � � �; F. Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFG � , free insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, � respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that � incorporate the following interior facing material,with no exposed insulation: � � � 1. Interiar Facing Material: Zino-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) � �� sheet. � � ' � 2.2 HARDWARE � ''' ' � A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless- � � steel, or other cortosion-resistant fasteners,to suit door type. � ' ' � B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, � according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door : sections through stiles and rails. � ' � C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened s�eel races, mounted with � varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3- � , inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) � wide track. � � D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting � ' handles on each side of door. � � � � � ' , 23 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM � � A. Torsion'Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs � ' mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number � of operation cycles indicated. � � B. Cable Drums and Shaft for poors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted � ' e on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount � counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of ry � � torsion shaft. �� € C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables. � � , �. E SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083613 -3 � ' � � � � D. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically � stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the � wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. , F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. � 2.4 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door o erator assembl of size and capacity recommended and provided by � P Y door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessaries required for proper operation. : 1. Comply with NFPA 70. � 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit,maximum 24-V ac or dc. � B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-O erator T e: Unit of e indicated, consistin of electric motor, ears, ulleys, belts, � P YP h'P g g P sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation,temperature rating, service factor, enclosure � type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. � 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Phase: Polyphase. � b. Volts: 208 V. c. Hertz: 60. 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for � motor exposure indicated. - 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, � accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 inJsec. {3O5 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings ar service factor. � 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. E. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety � sensar capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. � � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083613 -4 � P ' € � � ; ' 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction � � in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. Coordinate mounting ' height with height of apparatus bumper. � � ' 2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping � j mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit � ' using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable � . � f ; F. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button � controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." � , � � 1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose � � NEMA ICS 6,Type 1 enclosure. � � , � G. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation � does not exceed 25 Ibf(l 11 N). �: � �H. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency � ' manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount � mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically � prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. � i ' I. Motor Removal: Design operatar so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch � � ad�ustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. � ,' ' � J. Radio-Control System: Consisting of three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, � and stop door;two per operator. At drive-through bays, operator shall be capable of controlling r. return and response doors separately. � ' � � � 2.5 DOOR ASSEMBLY � � A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermospan � 200 or approved substitution. � � B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 100,000. � � t C. Installed R-Value: 17.05 deg F Y h x sq. ft./Btu (3.402 K a sq. m/W}. � � D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, formed into sections 3 inches (76 mm) � , thick. � � � 1. Exterior-Face Surface: Flat. � , 2. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel sheet. � � E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track. � F , F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter] of door. f' � � � ' � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083613 - 5 � �: � G. Windows: Approximately 36 by 20 inches (915 by 508 mm) with square corners, and spaced � apart the approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; in five rows at height indicated on Drawings; installed with insulated glazing of clear float glass. H. Electric Door Operator: � 1. Usage Classification: Medium duty,up to 15 cycles per hour. � 2. Operator Type: Trolley. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior,clean, and dry. 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor. � 6. Remote-Control Station: Where shown on Drawings. 7. Other Equipment: Radio-control system. 8. Red and Green warning light: � a. Green light illuminated with door in fully open position b. Red light to illuminate constantly when door begins to move and remain illuminated until the door is in the full open position again � I. Door Finish: 1. Factory Prime Finish(Exterior Face): Baked-on polyester primer ready for field finish. � 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. : PART 3 -EXECUTION � TI N � 3.1 INSTALLA O A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, � inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid � installation of track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Ad'ust hardware and movin arts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of � ' J gP warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire � perimeter. � � 3.2 DEMONSTRATION � A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. � END OF SECTION 083613 � � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083613 -6 � i � , � � � ' � SECTION 083614—FOUR FOLD DOORS � i � ��i. ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � & � ' � l.l SUNIlVLARY � � A. This Section includes four fold metal doors(see Alternates). �: ' � B. Division 16 Sections for electrical service, connections, disconnects, and circuit-breakers for � powered operators,and accessories. ' � �. � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � � � A. Structural Performance: Provide doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and � the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of components: � ' . � 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure(velocity pressure)of 201bf/sq. ft. (960 Pa). acting inward � and outward. ` 2. Operational Life: Design components to operate for not less than 100,000 cycles. € ' � a. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle begins with door in closed position. Door is � then moved to open position and back to closed position. � � � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � iA. Product Data: For each product indicated. � � B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation,wiring diagrams, and � ` attachments to other Work. � � 1. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on � ' Shop Drawings. £ � � C. Samples: For each exposed finish. � ' �' 1.4 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE � , A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, _ Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for � intended use. � ' � __ , ; , � � FOUR FOLD DOORS 083614- 1 � � � � � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � 1. Steel Doors with Insulated Steel Panels: a. Door Engineering and Manufacturing, 400 Cherry Street, Kasota, Minnesota, � 56050, 1-800-893-3229;FF200 Series,glazed b. Electric Power poor, 522 West 27`� Street, Hibbing,Minnesota 55746, 1-800-346- � 5760; Model 41, glazed 2.2 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS � A. Construction: Door framing shall be 11-gauge structural steel tube with 16-gauge (or 14 gauge) � sheet steel on the exterior and interior faces. Sheeting shall be formed on the vertical edges with no visible welds on the interior or exterior panel faces. All frames and framing members shall be true to dimension and square in all directions, and no door shall be bowed, warped, or � out of line, in the vertical or horizontal plane of the door opening by more than 1/8 inch in 20 feet. Exposed welds and welds which interfere with the installation of various parts shall be ground smooth and flush. � B. Insulation: Fiberglass(or polyisocyanurate)as standard with the manufacturer. C. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard,factory-applied gray oxide primer. � D. Operating Hardware: Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides, not less than three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc. � necessary for complete installation and operation. Jamb hinges shall be dual shear and have two thrust bearings and two needle bearing. Fold hinges shall be dual shear with two thrust bearings. All bearings shall be completely concealed within the hinge barrel. All hinge pins � shall be minimum 3/0" diameter hardened steel. All trolleys to be equipped with nylon, bronze or ball bearing rollers. E. Weatherstripping: Material shall be adjustable and readily replaceable and provide a substantially weathertight installation. Weatherstripping at center and bottom shall be 1/16" cloth inserted neoprene. Weatherstripping shall be retained continuously. ' F. Perimeter Weatherstripping: Provide jamb and head weatherstipping of 1/16" cloth-inserted � ' neoprene bulb(or closed cell neoprene). G. Glazing, Grill/Louver Options: � � FOUR FOLD DOORS 083614-2 - � �� ' � H. Vision Panels: Provide vision panels of the type, size, shape and location as noted on the � drawings. � � ' 1 � 2.3 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS � � � � A. Each four fold door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit � ' ' designed for high cycle operation. Operator consists of an electric motor, gear reducer, and � rotating drive arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating � drive arm on the operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door section and to the door � ' lintel. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all � times. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be � equipped with oil impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts. Exterior mounted operators � ', ' shall have a formed weather hood. � {; B. Operator shall be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually. � ' ' Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to fully clear the opening. Operator shall � automatically lock the door in the closed position. Operator shall be equipped with disengaging mechanism to convert to free wheeling mode far manual operation. ¢; ' k C. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at = no more than 75 percent of rated capacity. The motor shall be wound for three phase 208VAC, � 60 Hertz operation. � ' � D. Electric Controls: Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be complete � for each door, and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Control circuits shall � ' ' not exceed a nominal 110 volts. � 1. Controls shall include a self diagnostic programmable logic controller with digital � message display and input LED's. Controller shall include progra.mmable close time � ' � delays and maximum open and close run-time timers. � 2. Motor starters shall be magnetic reversing, factory wired with overload and under voltage � protection, and equipped with mechanical interlocks. All control components shall be t � enclosed in one enclosure with a wiring diagram placed on the inside of the cover. � � 3. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 with disconnect switch. } 4. Pushbuttons for each door shall have one momentary pressure three-button push-button � ' station marked"OPEN","CLOSE"and"STOP". Push button enclosure shall NEMA 4. � 5. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully � � closed position. � � # E. Safety edges: Provide electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door upon � contact with obstruction. � � � � F. Photo eyes: provide one interior and one exterior mounted photo eye (sender/receiver type) g with mounting brackets. Photo eyes shall be NEMA 4. � ' G. Loop Detectors: Provide `open' and `safety' loop detectors as required. Control panel shall ' have an Auto/Manual switch for activating and deactivating the `open' loop function. � J_ � H. Provide radio receiver and two single button remote controls per door. � , � � �_ � FOUR FOLD DOORS 083614-3 � � ' � � � � I. Wiring: Door manufacturer shall supply controls only. Electrical contractor shall install � : controls and furnish and install conduits and wiring for jobsite power and control wiring. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Install four fold metal doors in strict accordance with the approved drawings by qualified door erection crews. All door openings shall be completely prepared by the general contractor prior � to the installation of the doors. Permanent or temporary electric wiring shall be brought to the door opening before installation is started and shall be completed so as not to delay the inspection test. � B. Doors shall be set plumb, level, and square, and with all parts properly fastened and mounted. All moving parts shall be tested and adjusted and left in good operating condition. � 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING � A. Inspection of the doors and a complete operating test will be made by the installer in the presence of the general contractor or architect as soon as the erection is complete. Any defects noted shall be corrected. After door approval in the above test, the general contractor must � assume the responsibility for any damage or rough handling of the doors during construction until the building is turned over to the owner and final inspection is made. B. Clean surfaces and repaint abraded or damaged primed surfaces to match factory-applied finish. � 3.3 DEMONSTRATION � A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain doors. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." � END OF SECTION 083614 � � � . � � FOUR FOLD DOORS 083614-4 � r � ' � � � � � � SECTION 084113 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' ' � 1.1 SiTMMARY � � ' ' A. Section Includes: � � 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. € 2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame unifs. � � ' � � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � , � A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective � r ' manufacture,fabrication, installation,or other defects in construction: � � 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, � story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. � ' � 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. � 3. Failure includes the following. t z ' ' � a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. � b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. � c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and = , structural movements to glazing. ` d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. � e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments,and other components. x � f. Failure of operating units. � � B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering � ' analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design � criteria indicated. � C. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. � � � D. Deflection of Framing Members: � � , 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to � glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite � or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch(19 mm), �' ' whichever is less. � 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which � reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces � edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fi�ced components directly � � � below them to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). y F- ' � ALIJMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 � � � � � � E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to � ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, � including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding[0.2] <Insert number>percent of span. 2. Test Durations: 10 seconds. � F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with ma�cimum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 � Pa). G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not � evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure,but not less than 8.O lbf/sq.ft.. . 1.3 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. � 2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, � and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and far drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. � D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. E. Other Action Submittals: � 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, � detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. ' F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with � performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the . qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. roduct test re orts. � G. P p � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -2 � t � � � # � � � .�,�:�;� � . � H. Maintenance data. � � � � I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. � ' � � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' � ¢; A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved � for installation of units required for this Project. � ' ' � B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop � Drawings,based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems ; ' similar to those indicated for this Project. � C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for � systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by � � dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate e to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are �: indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction F � testing, field testing,and in-service performance. � � D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & u , Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and � ICC/ANSI A117.1. � � ' E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single � manufacturer. � �. � F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � ' ;_... ,� v . � � �r . ,. ,, , .-�� , , ,_ � � ,., s .. .T..... . ,.,,,_._..... �...r.� � . . _... � � �� .w �. p z �. .. . �. .3 � ' R ..,.,. �.�u_�.� ....�. � � ._ ..... , .._..._�, . � . . : � �,,� ,�E ,,r._ m., M, � � ' _ �, �'��..,�,.�m. �.,,�,,_. __ � �r ., � � .a,..,.� . � �_. ��ab, x. 3ie�� F- E ' � 1.5 WARR.ANTY � � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or �: , replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that ; fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. � � ' 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. � r � ` � ALUMINUM-FR.AMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -3 � ' � � � B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair � ar replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. � 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. " � PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Trifab � VG 451T and Kawneer 360 and 560 Insulclad entrances or comparable products by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. � 2. Kawneer North America;an Alcoa company. 3. TRACO. 4. Tubelite. � 5. United States Aluminum. 6. Vistawall Architectural Products;The Vistawall Group; a Oldcastle company. 2.2 MATERIALS � A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish � indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209{AST.M B 2091V1). � 2. Extruded Bars,Rods,Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 3088 308M. � B. Recycled Content of Aluminum Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of aluminum products so preconsumer recycled content is not less than 55 percent. C. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying � with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- � SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. � 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. � � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -4 � £ � � ' � � � � , 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS � ; �; � A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness � required and reinforced as required to supp,ort imposed loads. � � � i 1. Construction: Thermally broken. ,_ � 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. � � 3. Glazing Plane: Center. � � B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with j � nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components. t `L � C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, � nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. � E � .! � 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements,wind loads,or vibration. � 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. � � „ ' D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, � complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. � � '! � E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding � flashing compatible with adjacent materials. � � ' ' F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by � manufacturer for joint type. � � 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of � '; � 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). � � � ' � 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS � � � A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing." � ' ' ¢ B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, � of profile and hazdness required to maintain watertight seal. � r � C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. � � � ' 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS � � A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's thermally improved glazed entrance doors for manual-swing � , operation. � � 1. Doar Construction: 2-to 2-1/4-inch(50.8-to 57 ?-min) overall thickness,with minimum � � 4 0.125-inch- (3.?-mnl-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. � Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet � welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. = ' � � � � ' ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -5 � � t. � � a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum � members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 4-1/16-inch nominal width. and wide stile; 5-9/16inch � nommal width- see drawmgs for locations. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches � {255 mm)above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed � gaskets. B. Entrance Door Hardware: See Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for additional hardware � provided by others. 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE � A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door to comply with requirements in � this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and � products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation,and interface with other building control systems indicated. � 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than l5 Ibf(67 N)to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf(133 N)to set the door in motion. � b. Accessible Interior poors: Not more than 5 Ibf(22.�N)to fully open door. B. Opening-Force Requirements: � 1. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than l 5 lbf(67 N)required to release latch. C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A 156.4,Grade 1. � 1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. � D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5,Grade 1. E. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting � agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to LJL 305. : F. Cylinders: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware. � G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for � aluminum framing. H. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. � " ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -6 � � � � ( ' � � � � 4 � I. Removable Mullions: BHMA A1563,extruded aluminum. � E q ; , 1. When used with panic exit devices;provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a � testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic � f protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been � tested with exit devices to be used. � ` � J. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories re uired for a com lete installation, sized q P � as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to � I � meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. � � ! K. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location � '! ' indicated,with integral rubber bumper. � �' ; L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. � i ' � M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners � ! on mounting strip. � � ' i � N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2,with � maximum height of l/2 inch (13 mm). � � � '' � � 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS �' � � ' ' A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 � requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per � coat. � � � � 2.8 FABRICATION � � ' � A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. � � B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following � � , characteristics: � � 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight,and free of defects or deformations. � � 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. � 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture � migrating within the system to extenor. � 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. � � 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to � maintain required glazing edge clearances. � 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. � 1 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest � extent possible. � > � � C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. € � D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and �' for installing entrance door hardware. � � � � ALLTMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -7 � , � f� � E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. � : F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying � finishes. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to � Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALLTMINUM FINISHES � A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. � 1. Color and Gloss: Black,gloss to be selected from manufacturer's standards. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: � ; 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. � 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic � deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: � 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing � . nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for t his purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. � C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. � D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"to produce weathertight installation. � E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. � F. Install glazing as specified m Drvision 08 Section °Glazmg." � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8 � i � ' � € ; ' G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. � ; � 1. Exterior poors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather � ' stripping. � 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door � � hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using � I�;I ' concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. � � ' ' � 3.2 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS � Door Hardware Set No. One ', ' Door No. 113; each to have the following: � � � ' � Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish � * Hanging Devices Offset Pivots Kawneer Powder Coated � 2 Operating Trim Pull Kawneer CP-II US32D �: 2 Operating Trim Push Bar Kawneer CO-12 US32D = ' 2 Closing Devices Closer LCN 1601 Painted,Black � 1 Closing Devices Auto Operator Besam PowerSwing Painted Black � 1 Closing Devices Power Supply Besam � t2 Closing Devices Wireless Actuators Besam 1 Accessories Weatherstripping � Weathersweeps � ' 1 Miscellaneous Items Offset Pivot Threshold Kawneer Mill Finish � � * Number of hinges as spec'd � 1 � Door Hardware Set No. Two � Door No. 112; each to have the following: � ' � Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish � * Hanging Devices Offset Pivots Kawneer Powder Coated � 1 Hanging Devices Elec Offset Piviot Kawneer Powder Coated �' ' 2 Operating Trirn Pull Kawneer CP-II US32D � 1 Operating Trim Rim Exit Device Dor-o-Matic 1790 Stainless Stl � Clad � ' 1 Operating Trim Rim Exit Device Dor-o-Matic 1790EL Stainless Stl � Clad � 1 Closing Devices Closer LCN 1601 Painted,Black � , � 1 Closing Devices Auto Operator Besam PowerSwing Painted,Black � � ' 1 Closing Devices Power Supply Besam � �: 2 Closing Devices Wireless Actuators Besam � ' w/Key override F; * Number of hinges,as k. specified. 4 �: � ' � � � � ' ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -9 � � � � � � Door Hardware Set No.T'hree Door No. 101; each to have the following: � Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish * Hanging Devices Offset Pivots Kawneer Powder Coat 1 Accessories Weatherstripping � Weathersweeps 1 Closing Devices Closer LCN 1601 Painted Black 1 Miscellaneous Items Offset Pivot Threshold Kawneer Mill Finish � * Number of hinges,as � specified. � Door Hardware Set No.Four � Door No. 112A; each to have the following: Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish * Hanging Devices Offset Pivots Kawneer Powder Coat � 1 Closing Devices Closer LCN 1601 Painted,Black * Number of hinges, as � specified. Door Hardware Set No.Five � , Door No. 114A; each to have the following: Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish � * Hanging Devices Offset Pivots Kawneer Powder Coat 1 Securing Devices Deadbolt Adams Rite MS 1850S with thumb turn � 1 Operating Trim Pull Kawneer CP-II US32D 1 Operating Trim Push Bar Kawneer CO-12 US32D 1 Closing Devices Closer LCN 1601 Painted, Black � 1 Accessories Weatherstripping Weathersweeps 1 Miscellaneous Items Offset Pivot Threshold Kawneer Mill Finish � * Number of hinges, as specified. � � � � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 10 � � � � , � � € , ' � � Door Hardware Set No. Six � ; ' Door No. 119A; each to have the following: � � Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish � ' ' * Hanging Devices Offset Pivots Kawneer Powder Coat � 1 Operating Trim Rim Exit Device Dor-o-Matic 1590 Stainless Stl � (no ext.trim) Clad � ' ' 1 Closing Devices Closer LCN 1601 Painted,Black � 1 Accessories Weatherstripping � Weathersweeps � 1 Miscellaneous Items Offset Pivot Threshold Kawneer Mill Finish � , �" F * Number of hinges,as � ' specified. �' � g � F ' � END OF SECTION 084113 � � ' � � � x � , � �; � � � E ' ,. �: � , � � � , g: A � ' � 5 F ' � t g � ' � ' ' �: � � f: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 11 � , �; �: � . � � � � , a � � , � i SECTION 085113 -ALUMINUM WINDOWS � , � ; PART 1 -GENERAL � � � , � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. This Section includes operable aluminum-framed windows. � , � � k 12 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � : ' � � A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements � indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. �; ' � B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the � , following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS,Uniform Load Structural Test: �` � � , ' 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind � speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, � according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof � heights above grade indicated on Drawings. � ' � a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (�0 m/s). � b. Importance Factor: 1.15. � ' c. Exposure Category: B. g � 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less � ' than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch(l9 mm),whichever is less, at design pressure � based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS,Uniform Load � Deflection Test or structural computations. � , C. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal � movements resulting from the following malcimum change (range) in ambient and surface � � temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of � joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering � calculahon on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gam and mghttime-sky � heat loss. � , � 1. Temperature Change (Range): l 20 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) � material surfaces. � , ` 13 SUBMITTALS ' ; ' A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. � ' � � � ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1 � ' � � � � � � B. LEED Submittal: � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,operational clearances, and installation details � D. Samples: For each exposed finish. E. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. � F. Product test reports. � G. Maintenance data. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. � B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. � C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. � D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: � a. Failure to meet performance reyuirements. � b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of inetals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal � weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. � � ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -2 � _ <_ � , � � � ' � � � � 2. Warranty Period: � ' � a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. � b. Glazing: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion. � , c. Metal Finish: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. k � . � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � ' � � � � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �' , � A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer AA900 � ISOWEB window or a comparable product by one of the following: � ' 1. EFCO Corporation. � 2. TRACO. ; 3. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. � , � � � � 2.2 WINDOWS � , ' . A. Window Types: Casement as indicated on Drawings. ; � B. Recycled Content of Aluminum Products: Provide products with an average recycled content � ' of aluminum products so preconsumer recycled content is not less than 55 percent. � � � ' C. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. F 1. Performance Class and Grade: HC90. t � � D. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal � , performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 61. � � E. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window,U-factor maximum � , indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when � tested according to AAMA 1503. � � � � � ' 1. U-Factor: 0.47 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.7 W/sq. m x K)or less. � � F. So lar Hea t-Gain Coe f f icien t (S H G C): Provi de a luminum win dows wi t h a w ho le-win dow � SHGC maximum of 0.40, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. � , � r, � 23 GLAZING k ' � A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing � requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. � , � ' � � ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -3 � ' � � � � � 2.4 FABRICATION � A. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and � ventilator. C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. � D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water , penetration. E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances � and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. � F. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. � 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES � A. High-Performance Organic Finish 2-coat, thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats , containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, complying with AAMA 2605. � 1. Color and Gloss: Color, Black; Gloss, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Com 1 with Drawin s Sho Drawin s, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing � PY g , P g windows,hardware,accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal � movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. � C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets,as indicated,for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture � migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic � action at points of contact with other materials. � ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -4 � � ; , � � � � �, � F. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at � contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate � � hardware and moving parts. � ' � G. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective � coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. � , ` : H. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, � ' ' and clean surfaces. � � I. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during � construction period. � , � � : END OF SECTION 085113 r ' � � � , 4> � �` � � ' � � � ' I: i; (: ' � l � ' , � � ' �{ § € , � € � � , �' � � , � � , $' ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -5 � � � � � � � „ , � SECTION 085314 -FIBERGLASS WINDOWS � � � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � A. This Section includes: � , ' 1. Fixed and operable fiberglass framed windows. - 2. Outswing Patio Doors complete with hardware. � ' � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � K � ' A. General: Provide fiberglass windows capable of complying with performance requirements � indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, � and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. � � B. Structural Performance: Provide fiberglass windows capable of withstanding the effects of the � following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass �' ' AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS,Uniform Load Structural Test: � � 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (�r�eters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, � ' according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. � t ' a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph(4U m/s). �' b. Importance Factor: 1.15. �' c. Exposure Category: B. � ' � � � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � , F A. Product Data: For each type of fiberglass window indicated. � B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other � ' work, operational clearances, and installation details. �' �: , C. Samples: For each exposed finish. � , f �'; D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. r� � t' , E. Product test reports. � F. Maintenance data. � � � , � � r , � � FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 085314- 1 � � � � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Installer: A qualified installer,approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and � with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to � demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � 1.5 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty � period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: � a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, ar condensation. � c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of fiberglass, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. � e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: � a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. � c. Fiberglass Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Milgard Manufacturing Ultra fiberglass windows and Ultra Wood Clad patio doors or a comparable � product by one of the following: 1. Integrity by Marvin;All Ultrex Series � � � FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 085314-2 ' � -- — � , � � � ' � � � � ' �: 2.2 WINDOWS � k � A. Window Types: Casement and Fixed units as indicated on Drawings. � � � B. Patio Doors: °' � ' C. Comply with AAMA/V�IDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. � 1. Performance Class and Grade: LC40. � f � D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide fiberglass windows with a whole-window,U-factor maximum � indicated at l5-mph (24-kmJh) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when � ' tested according to NFRC 100. � 1. U-Factor Dual Glazed: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. � � � 2. U-Factor Triple Glazed: 0.28 Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F or less. � � z 3. U-Factor Triple Glazed Outswinging Patio Door: 031 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. � ' � E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide fiberglass windows with a whole-window � SHGC ma�cimum of 0.22 dual glazed, 0.18 triple glazed and 0.15 triple glazed patio door, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. ' e-' 23 GLAZING � , E. A. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered � � on second or third surface,complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing." � i � B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight s:: seal. � 1 �: 2.4 PATIO DOOR HARDWARE � , A. Hinges: Three 4 inch butt hinges, adjustable. �; 1. Finish: Powder coated. � � � , B. Handle Set: Lever operated. 1. Finish: Satin nickeL �; Y= ' C. Locking System: Multi-point locking system. Stainless steel passage latch, head and foot bolts operated from lever set. t:: << D. Weatherstripping � , 1. Foam filled bulb weather strip at head and jambs � 2. Handicap accessible threshold � , � FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 085314-3 � , � � � 2.5 1NSECT SCREENS � A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to � fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standazd aluminum alloy complying with � SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners,and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. � 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sechons and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. � C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: l8-by-14 (l.l-by-l.4-n�m) or l8-by-16 (1.0-by-l.l-mm) mesh of PVGcoated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, � shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration, in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray � 2.6 FABRICATION � A. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. � B. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for � erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units. � C. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. � 2.7 FIBERGLASS FINISHES � A. Organic Pigmented Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish, interior and exterior, complying with AAMA 615 and paint manufacturer's written specifications for cleaning and painting. � 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � � � FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 085314-4 � � � � � � ' � � � r , � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � c ' , % 3.1 INSTALLATION � � � A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing � ' windows,hardwaze,accessories, and other components. F � �; , B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal � movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall ` flashing and other adjacent construction. � ' C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Sepaxate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic i. � action at points of contact with other materials. � t; E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at � , � contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and�weathertight closure. Lubricate f hardware and moving parts. �. � F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective � ' coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. �' � G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, � � and clean surfaces. � � �: � � H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during �' construction period. � � , END OF SECTION 085314 � � � ' � � � ' � � � ' � r. � �, i; � �: � � , � FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 085314- 5 , � � � � � � � � ' SECTION 086200-TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICE � � [ ,, PART 1 GENERAL � ' �: 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES � ' � A. Tubular daylighting device,consisting of roof dome, reflective tube, and diffuser � assembly; configuration as indicated on the drawings. � C. ' �: B. Accessories. ; 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS �. , � A. Section 076100- Sheet Metal Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. � � B. Section 076200- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings. ; ' 13 REFERENCES � � > ' A. ASTM E 84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building F; Materials;2008a. � % , B. ASTM A 463/A 463M- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Aluminum Coated, �` ' by the Hot Dip Process; 2006. �' �' C. ASTM A 653/A 653M- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated � , (Galvanized), by the Hot Dip Process;2007. � D. ASTM E 283 -Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, f; Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the �' � Specimen; 2004. �: �; E. ASTM E 308 - Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the � , CIE System; 2006. � F. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and � � Doors; 2002. � � G. ASTM E 547 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, �; Doors and Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference; 2000. � � H. ASTM D 635 -Test Method for Rate of Burning andlor Extent of Time of Burning � ,.. of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2006. � 3. ' �. I. ASTM D-1929 -Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics; 1996(2001). �' k J. UL 181 -Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors Y''. ' 4 K. UL 790- Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials; 2004. ; S � L. ICBO/ICC AG16 -Acceptance Criteria for Plastic Skylights; 2008. � � � � ' � � TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM 086200-1 �. ' � � � � 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Completed tubular daylighting device assemblies shall be capable of ineeting the following performance requirements: 1. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with � a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. 2. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.5 psf pressure � differential with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547. 3. Uniform Load Test: � a. No breakage,permanent damage to fasteners,hardware parts,or damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of � 150 psf(7.18 kPa)or Negative Load of 70 psf(3.35 kPa). b. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of(3)for positive pressure and(2)for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. 4. Fire Testing: a. When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating requirements as described in the 2006 International Building � Code. b. Self-Ignition Temperature-Greater than 650 degrees F Per: U.B.C. Standard 26-6. See ASTM D-1929. � c. Smoke Density-Rating no greater than 450 Per U.B.C. 8-1 (See ASTM Standard E 84)in way intended for use. Classification C. d. Rate of Burn and/or Extent-M�imum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min � (62 mm/min)Classification CG2:U.B.C. Standard 26-7. See ASTM D 635. e. Rate of Burn and/or Extent-Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch(25 mm) � Classification CC-1: U.B.C. Standard 26-7. See ASTM D 635. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. � B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. � 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. � C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout,profiles and product components, including anchorage, flashings and accessories. D. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect. � E. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance with specified performance requirements. � � TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM 086200-2 � � � � � r ' � p E [ 4i. 2. � 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular daylighting � devices for minimum 15 years. � ' � 1.7 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � � ' A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. �' � B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials,and materials used with solvent-based � materials,in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. � , 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS ` �: � , A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature,humidity, and ventilation)within � limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products � under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. � ' 1.9 WARRANTY � � A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years. � ' � PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �' , A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide � products by Solatube International,Inc.,which is located at: 2210 Oak Ridge Way ; � ' Vista,CA 92081;Toll Free Tel: 888-765-2882;Tel: 760-477-1120; Fax: 760-597- �: 4488 ; Email: request info;Web: www.solatube.com or a comparable product by one of the following: � ' 1. Velux Sun Tunnels � s B. � Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of � , Section 012500. ` � 2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES � ' �� A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General : Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome � and self-flashing curb,reflective tube,and ceiling level diffuser assembly, � transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICBO/ICC AG 16. z , � B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS-C Penetrating Ceiling, 21 inch(530 �'- � mm)Daylighting System: � ' 1. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent,LTV and impact resistant dome with � flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. # a. Outer pome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch(3.2 mm)minimum ;; � thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material;LTV ,; inhibited, impact modified acrylic blend. � ,; , � ' � � TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM 086200-3 � � � � � b. Inner pome Glazin : T e DAI 0.115 inch 3 mm minimum � b YP , � ) thickness acrylic classified as CC2 material. 2. Raybender 3000:Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to capture low � angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight. 3. Roof Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. � a. Base Material: Sheet steel,corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M, 0.028 inch(0.7 mm)thick. b. Base Style: Type F08, Self mounted, 8 inches(203 mm)high. � 4. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch(23 mm)nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC;to prevent thermal bridging ; between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. � 5. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip 0.63 inch(16 mm)tall by 0.28 inch(7 mm). 6. Reflective Tubes: Aluminum sheet,thickness 0.018 inch(0.5 mm). � a. General: 1) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface. Specular reflectance for � visible spectrum(400 nm to 760 nm)greater than 99 percent. Total solar spectrum reflectance(400 nm to 2500 nm)less than 93 percent. � 2) Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model)shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. � b. Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Top Tube Angle Adapter Kit, Type AK: 1) Reflective 30 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches(406 mm)long �-� c. Extension Tube: 1) Reflective extension tube,Type EXX,Notched for Open Ceiling diffuser attachment, 24 inches(610 mm)long � 7. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Mode1750 DS-C. Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; � 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches(605 mm by 605 mm)square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. : a. Round to square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, � classified as CC2, Class C,0.110 inch(2.8 mm)thick. b. Natural Effect Lens made of acrylic,classified as CC2,Class C, 0.060 inch(1.5 mm)thick,with open cell foam seal to minimize condensation � and bug,dirt, and air-infiltration per ASTM E283. c. Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with e�ruded aluminum frame.Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch(0.6 mm) � thick. Classified as CC2. � � TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM 086200-4 � � � � ' i i � ' � � e 2.3 ACCESSORIES � ; � A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened,non-magnetic steel,non- � � corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. � E , B. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or � � recommended by manufacturer. � ; � ' � PART 3 EXECUTION � � 3.1 EXAMINATION � :; ` A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. � B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of g '; ' unsatisfactory preparation befare proceeding. � 3.2 PREPARATION � � �,; , A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. � � B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving � , � the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. � � 3.3 INSTALLATION � � `' ' A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. � ; � B. After installation of first unit,field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner,Architect,or Contractor, or their � > ' designated representative.Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of ` subsequent units. � � � , 3.4 PROTECTION � A. Protect installed products until completion of project. � ��' � � B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. k ' ' END OF SECTION 086200 � � 1 ` � � � � �: � � � t TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM 086200-5 ' ;;� � � � � w. � � � � � � � � � � � � � , � ! � ; SECTION 087100-DOOR HARDWARE � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � 1.1 SUMMARY � � ' A. Section includes: � � 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: � j , a. Swinging doors. � 2. Electrified door hardware. � � � � B. Related Sections: � 1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door � hardware, except cylinders. � � � C. SUBMITTALS � � ' , D. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � E. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware. � , ' � � F. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. � � ' G. Other Action Submittals: � ' � l. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and � ' � diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand,function, and finish of door hardware. � � €: a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as � ` in the Contract Documents. � b. Content: Include the following information: � � � 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each N door and frame. � 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor � , plans and to door and frame schedule. �; 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, � function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. � � 4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and � interfaces with other building control systems. ; � � } � 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's � final keying instructions for locks. ' � � } �: � , � � � � � DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 � � � � 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved : by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the � course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing ,� consulting services far door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: � l. Far door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is also an Electrified Hardware Consultant(EHC). C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, rovide door � P hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive � pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL l OC,unless otherwise indicated. D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies � are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfin/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at � the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg(75 Pa}of water. E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing � agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf(67 N) to release the latch. � Locks do not require use of a key,tool, or special knowledge for,operation. G. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardwaze on doors in an accessible route, comply with � the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines,ICC/ANSI A117. and HUD's "Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines". l. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the � wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf(22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following malcimum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf(22.2 N) applied perpendicular to � door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. � 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more � than 1/2 inch(13 mm)high. � 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches(75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. � � DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -2 � � � v � � H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in � Division O1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." � � � � 1.3 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � ; � � A. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. � . � � � ' ' 1.4 WARRANTY � � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified � ' warranty period. ` � � 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise � "„ � indicated. � a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. � b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. � , � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � � � 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE z A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article � ' ' to com 1 with re uirements in this Section. � � PY q � � l. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of � operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. � r B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive ' � qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for � ! � each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. � Manufacturers'names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. � 2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations � , and requirements for description,quality, and function. � �. � ' � 2.2 HINGES �' A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow- �:, � metal doors and hollow-metal frames � � B. � � ' � � �' DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 � , � �, l. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product � indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries,Inc. a Cal-Royal Products,Inc. d. Hager Companies. � e. NES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Lawrence Hardware Inc. g. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � h. PBB, Inc. i. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works. LOCKS AND LATCHES � 23 MECHANICAL . A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike far each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with � requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; � Series 1000. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product � indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accurate Lock&Hardware Co. � b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. . d. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions,Inc. e. Cal-Royal Products,Inc. � £ Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company. h. Marks USA. � i. PDQ Manufacturing. j. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. k. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. � l. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.4 AUXILIARY LOCKS � A. Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.5; mortise; Grade 2; lock opens by entering a one- to five-digit code by pushing correct buttons in correct sequence; automatically relocks � when door is closed;with strike that suits frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: � a. Kaba Ilco Corp.;a Kaba Group company. � � DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -4 � € 's � � � € � '. � � 2.5 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS ; k _ � A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal, battery-powered, � ` ! self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, � and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case, and strike that � suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, � ; � and ability to program at the lock. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product s' � indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: � , o- a. Best Access Systems;Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. � b. Kaba Ilco Corp.; a Kaba Group company. � � , , c. Marks USA. t d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. � t: f. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. " � � 2.6 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS � �.., ' � A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A1563. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product � � indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following. � G � a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 4 , b. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � c. Cal-Royal Products, Ina � d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � � e. Detex Corporation. � f. Door Controls International, Inc. � g. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North i' e: America. � � h. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. �' i. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black&Decker Corp. company. �. j. Monarch Exit Devices&Panic Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. �, � k. Precision Hardware,Inc.; Division of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. � 1. Rutherford Controls Int'1. Corp. m. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � � n. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company. � o. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � � � , � 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS � A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel � ' t silver. � 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the � �: following: � � a. Best Access Systems;Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. �' � �` � � � DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 5 � � �; � � r �: � B. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction � keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. � Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.8 KEYING � A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. � 1. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. B. Keys: Nickel silver.. � 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: � a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock,provide the following: ! a. Master Keys: Five. 2.9 O PERATING TRIM � A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel,unless otherwise indicated. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. � b. Don-Jo Mfg.,Inc. c. Forms+ Surfaces. � d. Hager Companies. e. Hiawatha,Inc. f. NES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. � g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. h. Trimco. 2.10 SURFACE CLOSERS � A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and � latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather,and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable � to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: � a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 � � � � � � � € ,; � � c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North � America. � d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. � ! ' e. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black&Decker Corp. company. � £ LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand company. � g. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � � h. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � j. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � � � ' 2.11 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS � � , A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum � base metal. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product � ; � indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: � � a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. � � b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. � c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. � d. Cal-Royal Products,Inc. � e. Don-Jo Mfg., Ina � ; � � f. Door Controls International, Inc. � g. Hager Companies. �, h. Hiawatha, Inc. � '; � i. NES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. � j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. � k. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. � ; ' 1. Trimco. � � � � � 2.12 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS � � A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. � ' � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product v indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: � � a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. � � b. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company. k c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. � d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � � � � , � ` � � � � � � , �: � � � � DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -7 � ' �' � � � 2.13 DOOR GASKETING � A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to � ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product � indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products,Inc. � c. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. � f. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. g. Zero International. � 2.14 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Ha er Com anies. � b P b. M-D Building Products,Ina c. National Guard Products. � d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. £ Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. � g. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. h. Zero InternationaL i. � 2.15 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxilia Hardware: BHMA A156.16. � rY 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: � a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Cal-Royal Products,Inc. � c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. � £ Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. g. Trimca � DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 8 � � � ; ' � � � � F � � 2.16 FABRICATION �' � A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared �, , � for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially � recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not � ' permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door � � hardware, unless otherwise indicated. � � 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, � � except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for � installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means � of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door � ' ' and frame construction,provide sleeves for each through bolt. � 2. Fire-Rated Applications: � � a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: � � � €. 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames;use threaded-to-the-head wood screws � for wood doors. � � 2) Strike plates to frames. � � b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: ` � � 1) Closers to doors and frames. � 2) Surface-mounted exit devices. � � 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. � ; , 4. Fasteners for Wood Doars: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended � Fasteners for Wood Doors." �' 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and � ' � elsewhere as indicated. � s � �� 2.17 FINISHES � � A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. � � � � B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, ; temporary protective covering before shipping. � � � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � � 3.1 INSTALLATION € �: z; , A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames � according to ANSUSDI A250.6. � a B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.S "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations � � far Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." � � � R; � (: DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9 � ' �: �: � C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless � otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSUSDI A250.8. � 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." � D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardwaze onto or into surfaces that are later to be � painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with fimshing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, lumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment � P substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space � fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than � the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. � F. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction . period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores at completion of construction. � G. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above � accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door � hardware. H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." � I. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. � J. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. K. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. � L. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. � M. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for fmal operation of heating and � ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. � DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 � � � � � c � 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � � A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent � ' � Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. � � � � �' ' 33 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE � f � END OF SECTION 087100 � � � � � , � � � s � � � �; � � ' � � � f. � � � � � � � � � � � �- � � �- � � � �$$ , r S'. �' � �° � � �: �: , �g� s i � � � �: � � � � f �: � �[{$ S": DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 11 � , � � r � ` ' � � Openinas Schedule � ' � � � Opening To/ Hardware Heading � ' Numbe►(s) Qty Loeation 1 From Location 2 Group Remarks Num. _ � 101 1 GROUP 04 4 � ��2 1 GROUP 17 24 � , 102A 1 GROUP OS 5 � 103 1 GROUP 06.1 7 � 1D4 1 GROUP 09 16 � 107 1 GROUP O6 6 � ' 108 1 GROUP O6 6 � 111 1 GROUP 07 9 � 112 1 GROUP 02 2 � 112A 1 GROUP 10 17 � �� 1126 1 GROUP 25 31 � ' 113 1 GROUP 01 1 � 114 � 1 GROUP 07.2 13 114A 1 GROUP 12 19 � „ ' 115 1 GROUP 07.1 11 � 116 1 GROUP 07 g � 117 1 GROUP 07.1 12 � 118 1 GROUP 07 10 � � 119 1 GROUP 13 ' 20 €' 119A 1 GROUP 11 18 � 123 1 GROUP 14 21 � 124 1 GROUP 14.1 22 � ' 127 1 GROUP 16 23 � 129 1 GROUP 16 23 �' 130 1 GROUP 26 32 � , 1S2 1 GROUP 03 3 1T1 1 NOT LOCATED � 1T2 1 GROUP 08 15 � 1T3 1 GROUP 08 15 #! 200A 1 GROUP 18 25 � � 2008 1 GROUP 19 26 � 201A 1 GROUP 18 25 �' 201B 1 GROUP 19 26 � 202A 1 GROUP 18 25 2026 1 GROUP 19 26 � 203 1 GROUP 07 9 � 206A 1 GROUP 18 25 � , 206B 1 GROUP 19 26 � 207A 1 GROUP 18 25 �: 2076 1 GROUP 19 26 � 208A 1 GROUP 18 25 � ' 2086 1 GROUP 19 26 � 209A 1 GROUP 18 25 � 209B 1 GROUP 19 26 210A 1 GROUP 18 25 � ' 2106 1 GROUP 19 26 � 214A 1 GROUP 18 25 2146 1 GROUP 19 26 � 216A 1 GROUP 18 25 � , 2166 1 GROUP 19 26 € 217A 1 GROUP 18 25 � 2178 1 GROUP 19 26 � 218A 1 GROUP 18 25 � 218B 1 GROUP 19 26 � 219 1 GROUP 22 29 � 221 1 GROUP 07 9 � s 227A 1 GROUP 21 28 � , � Page 2 of 12 , � � � Opening Tol Hardware Heading � Number(s) Qty Locatlon 1 From Location 2 Group Remarks Num. 2276 1 GROUP 21 2$ � 250 1 GROUP 18 25 251 1 GROUP 18 25 252 1 GROUP 18 25 � 253 1 GROUP 18 25 254A 1 GROUP 23 30 2546 1 GROUP 23 30 254C 1 GROUP 06.2 8 � 256 1 GROUP 07 9 457 � GROUP 07.1 11 P58 � GROUP 07.3 �4 258A 1 GROUP 07 10 � 262 1 GROUP 28 34 263 1 GROUP 22 29 264 1 GROUP 27 33 2S1 1 GROUP 21 28 � 2S2 1 GROUP 21 28 pT� � GROUP 20 2� pTZ � GROUP 20 27 2T3 1 GROUP 20 27 � 2T5 1 GROUP 20 27 2T6 1 GROUP 20 z7 GROUP 20 /� � � � ��- t,:i�lAi'� �� l LtS� � � � � � � � � � � Page 3 of 12 _ __ _ -----. _ , ' � � Hardware Schedule � � � Heading#1 (GROUP 01) � � ' Item#1 7 Elevatfon 113 � _x_x_-ALDRxALFR � ' 3 Cylinder Best 1 E74C181 RP3 626,Cylinder,1-5/32"dia. 826 1 Cylinder SDC 700N KEY SWITCH � � AUTO OPERATOR.ACTUATORS BY OTHERS. g ' PIVOTS/HINGES,PUSHlPULLS,CLOSER,THRESHOLD AND WEATHERSTRIPPING BY DOOR SUPPLIER. � � k Heading#2 (GROUP 02) � , �' Item#2 1 Elevation U2 � C _x_x_-ALDRxALFR s � ' 1 Cylinder Best 1 E74C181 RP3 626,Cylinder,1-5/32'dia. 626 � t Cylinder SDC 700N KEY SWITCH � AUTO OPERATOR,ACTUATORS BY OTHERS. � ' PIVOTSIHINGES,ELEC.PIVOT/HINGE,EXIT DEVICES,REMOVABLE MULLION,PULLS,CLOSER,BY DOOR SUPPLIERS. Heading#3 (GROUP 03) � ' � Item#3 1 Elevation 1S2 � i _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR � ' � 3 Standard Hinge Hager 8B1279 41/2"x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D � 1 Cylinder Best 1E74C181RP3 626,Cylinder,l-5/32"dia. 626 gg s t Electronic Locking Device SDC E73P � 1 Surface Closer Norton ClP-7500 689,Stop Only 689 ' 7788 DROP PLATE WHERE REQ'D � 1 Floor poor Stop Hager 252F x US26D,Cast Floor Stop US26D 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-1/2"x 4" � 7 WeathersVipping NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8" A 1 Gasketing NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3/8",1 1!4" A � ' � f Heading#4 (GROUP 04) � , Item#4 1 Elevatbn 101 � F i' _x_x_-ALDRxALFR � t ' 1 E�dt Device Precision 2108 LHB x US32D x 5300 x x x,Rim Exit Device US32D � LESS TRIM � 1 Cylinder 8est 1 E74C181 RP3 626,Cylinder,1-5/32"dia. 626 1 Eledronic Locking Device SDC E74P x E70-AP-4 � , USE SDC E74P PROX LOCK WITH PRECISION EXIT DEVICE.NOTE 5"DOOR STILES REQUIRE0. � PIVOTSIHINGES,CLOSER,THRESHOLD,WEATHERSTRIPPING BY DOOR SUPPLIER. � , � �. € I ' � � ' � � Page 4 of 12 � , � --- _ __ � Heading#5 (GROUP O5) � Item#5 1 Elevation 102A _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR � . 3 Slandard Hinge Hager BB1168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2'US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w/Ball Bearing US26D � 1 Door Pull Hager 33E-4"x 16"-US32D,Pull Plaie-0.050 Square Comer w/314'Round 6'CTC PuU US32D � 1 Push Piate Hager 30S-4"x 76"-US32D,Push Plate-0.050 Square Comer US32D 1 Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,Parallel Artn 689 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-712'Dia.) US32D 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-112"x 4" ' 1 Weatherstripping NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8" A � 1 Gasketi�g NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3l8",1 1/4" A Heading�!S(GROUP O6j � � Item�/6 1 Elevation 107 Item#7 1 Elevation 108 � _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � 6 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 4 1/2"x 4112"US26D,Full MoRise-Sld.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D 2 Lockset Best 45HTA615 J 626 LH,Deadbolt Lockset 626 � 2 Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,ParaHel Artn 689 2 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop wl Concealed Mounting(2-112"Dia.) US32D Heading#7 (GROUP 06.1) � Item#8 1 Elevation 103 _x_x_-WD DR x HM FR � 3 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 4112"x 4 1l2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt w/ Ball Bearing US26D 1 Lockset Best 45H7AB 15 J 626 LH,DeadboR Lockset 626 � 1 Surface Closer Norlon CLP-8501 689,Stop Only 689 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed MouMing(2-112"Dia.) US32D 1 Gasketing NGP 5050B-204",Self-Adhesive Silicone bulbs-1/4"x 1/2" B � Heading#S (GROUP 062) Item#9 1 Elevation 254C � x x -HM DR x HM FR 3 Standard Hinge Hager BB1168 41/2"x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w/Ball Bearing US26D � 1 Lockset Best 45H7AB 15 J 626 LH,Deadbolt Lockset 626 ` 1 Surface Closer Norton CLP-7500 689,Stop Only 689 7788 DROP PLATE WHERE RE�'D 1 Kick Plate Hager 1905-U532D-10"x 34",Protection Plate-0.050"Thidc US32D 1 Fbor poor Stop Hager 252F x US26D,Cast Floa Stop US26D � 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-1/2"x 4" ' 1 WeathersUipping NGP 160VA36'x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8' A 1 GaskeUng NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3/8",1 1/4" A 1 Miscellaneous Item NGP 16A-40",Drip Strip-1 1/2"x 2112" A � � � � Page 5 of 12 ___ � � ' � Heading#9(GROUP 07) � � ' Item#10 1 Elevation 111 � Item#11 1 Elevation 116 � Item#12 7 Elevation 203 € , Item#'13 1 Elevation 221 � Item#14 1 Elevatlon 256 � ' — — — Y x x -WDDRxHMFR $ e � 15 Standard Hinge Hager 681279 41l2"x 4�/2"US26D,Full Mortlse-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D � ' 5 Latchset Best 45HN(UC)15 J 626 LH,Pessage Lockset 626 � 5 Kick Plate Hager 790S-US32D-10"x 34",Protection Plate-0.050'Thick US32D ° 5 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-1/Y Dia.) US32D � i � ' VERIFY FUNCTION � € Heading#10 (GROUP 07) �, £ � Item#15 1 Elevation 118 � Item#16 1 Elevadon 258A � x x -HMDRxHMFR � ' 6 Standard Hinge Hager B81279 41l2"x 4�/2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D � 2 Latchset Best 45HN(UC)75 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 628 � 2 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",Protection Plate-0.050"Thick US32D ; ' 2 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mountlng(2-1/2"Dfa.) US32D � VERIFY FUNCTION � ' Heading#11 (GROUP 07.1) ttem#17 1 Elevation 115 � Item#18 1 Elevation 257 � , _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � � 6 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 41/2"x 41l2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w! Ball Bearirg US26D �' 2 Lockset Best 45H7D 15 J 626 LH,Latch Lodcset 626 � ' 2 Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,Parallel Arm 689 � REG.ARM@257 �� 2 Kidc Plate Hager'190S-US32D-10"x 34",Protectlon Plate-0.�50"Thick US32D � 2 Wall Daor Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concava Wall SMp w/Concealed Mounting(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D � ' 2 GaskeGng NGP 5050B-204",Self-Adhesive Silicone bulbs-114"x 1/2" B �' � VERIFY FUNCTION '�,, t ' Heading#12 (GROUP 07.1) � � Item#19 �Elevation 117 � � �: , _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR a � 3 Standard Hinge Hager B61279 41/2"x 41/2"US26D,Ful�Mortise-Std.Wt.w! Ball Bearing US26D �- 1 Lockset Best 45H7D 15 J 626 LH,Letch Lockset 626 E. 1 Surface Cbser NoRon 8501-PA 689.Pa211e1 Arm 689 � REG.ARM@257 �� ' 7 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",Protection Plate-0.050"Thick US32D � 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-1/2'Dia.) US32D 1 Gasketing NGP 5050B-204",Self-Adhesive Silicone buibs-1l4"x 1/2" B ' VERIFY FUNCTION � � F ' f G � , �p Page 6 of 12 ° � � � - _ ---- ---- � _ � Heading#13(GROUP 072) � � Item#20 1�Elevation 114 _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � 3 Standard Hinge Hager 681168 41/2"x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w!Ball Bearing US26D 1 Latchset Best 45HN(L/C)15 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 � 1 Surface Closer Norton 8501-REG 689,Regular Artn 689 1 Kick Plate Hager 790S-US32D-10"x 34",Protedion Plate-0.050"Thidc US32D 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop wl Concealed Mounting(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D 1 Accessory NGP 4YLN-36",Nbrdse Mount Automatic Door Bodom-1"x 21/8" 1 Threshold NGP 896-36",ADA Compliant Bumper Seal-1l4'x 5" � 1 Gaske6ng NGP 50506-204",Self-Adhesive Sllicone bulbs-1/4'x 1/2" B Heading#14(GROUP 07.3) � Item#21 1 Elevation 258 _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � 3 Slandard Hinge Hager BB1279 41/2"x 41/2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Bali Bearing US26D 1 Latchset Best 45HN(l/C)15 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 'I Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,Parallel Arm 689 � 1 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",Protection Plate-0.050"Thick US32D 1 Watl Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop wl Concealed Mourrting(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D VERIFY FUNCTION � Heading#15 (GROUP 08) Item#22 1 Elevation 1T2 � Item#23 1 Elevatlon 1T3 x x -WDDRxHMFR 6 Standard Hinge Hager B61279 41/2"x 41/2"US26D,FuII Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D � 2 Lockset Best 45H7L(UC)15 J 626 LH,Privacy(Deadbolt)Lockset 626 2 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",Protectbn Plate-0.050"Thick US32D 2 Wall Door Slop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Well Stop wl Concealed Mounting(2-1l2"Dia.) US32D 2 Gasketing NGP 5050B-204",SeH Adhesive Slliwne bulbs-1/4"x 1/2" B � Heading#16(GROUP 09) � Item#24 1 Elevation 104 _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � 3 Standard Hinge Hager B81279 41l2'x 41/2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.wl Ball Bearing US26D 1 Lockse[ Best 45H7D 15 J 626 LH,Latch Lodcset 626 1 Surface Cbser NoRon 850�-REG 689,Regular Atm 689 1 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",ProtecUon Plate-0.050"Thick US32D � 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop wl Concealed MouMing(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D � Heading#17 (GROUP 10) � Item#25 1 ElevaOon 112A _x_x_-ALDRxALFR � 1 Cylinder Best 1E74C181RP3 626,Cylinder,1-5l32'dia. 626 1 Electronic Lodcing Device SDC E73K VERIFY CIPHER LOCK COMPATIBLE W ITH DOOR TYPE,5'DOOR STILES RE�UIRED. � PIVOTS/HINGES,CLOSER,THRESHOLD,WEATHERSTRIPPING BY DQOR SUPPLIER. � Page 7 of 12 _ _---____ - - - - � � ' � Heading#18 (GROUP 11) � § ' Item#26 1 Elevation'119A y n � � _x_x_-ALDRxALFR � � 1 Miscellaneous Item User Hardware ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPUER � PIVOTS/HINGES,EXIT ONLY EXIT DEVICE,THRESHOLD,WEATHERSTRIPPING BY DOOR SUPPLIER � ' � Heading#19 (GROUP 12) � € � Item#27 1 Elevation 114A �' , — — — � x x -ALDRxALFR a R 1 Cylinder Best 1E74C181RP3 626,Cylinder,1-5l32"dia. 626 � HINGES,PUSH/PULLS,DEADBOLT,CLOSER,THRESHOLD,WEATHERSTRIPPING BY DOOR SUPPLIER. � ' � � ' � Heading#20 (GROUP 13) � ' Item#28 1 Elevation 119 � � x x -HMDRxHMFR � — — — E ' 3 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 41/2"x 4�12"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D � 1 Latchset Best 45HN(UC)75 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 � 1 Surface Cbser NoAon 8501-PA 689,Pa211e1 Arm 689 ° 1 Kidc Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",Protectlon Plate-0.050"Thick US32D � , 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w!Concealed Mountlng(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D = 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-1/2"x 4" � 1 Weatherstripping NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8' A ' 1 Gaskedng NGP 200NA36",Sweep-3/8',1 1/4" A � , � {' � Heading#21 (GROUP 14) � Item#29 1 Elevation 123 � , _; _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR �' �": ' 3 SNandard Hinge Hager BB1168 4 1/2'x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w/Ball Bearfng US26D ,; 1 Cylinder Best 1E74C181RP3626,Cylinder,1-5/32"dia. 626 � 1 Electronic Locking Device SDC E73P � 1 Surface Closer Norton CLP-7500 689,Stop Only 689 �: 7788 DROP PLATE WHERE REQD � ' 1 Kick Plate Hager 1905-US320-10"x 34",Protedion Plate-0.050"Triidc US32D �: 1 Fbor poor Stop Hager 252F x USZ6D,Cast Floor Stop US26D 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-7l2"x 4" �, 1 WeathersVipping NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Parimeter Seal-718" A � ' 1 Gasketlng NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3/8',1 1/4" A � Eg F ' � � a �' ' � � �.' [ � , � i � ' � � • Page 8 of 12 � ' ___ � Heading#22(GROUP 14.1) � Item#30 1 Elevation 124 _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR � . 3 Standard Hinge Hager BB1168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w!Ball Bearing US26D '�. 1 Cylinder Best'IE74C181RP3626,Cylinder,l-S132"dia. 626 � 1 Electronic Locking Device SDC E73P 1 Surface Cbser Norton CLP-7500 689,Stop Only 689 7788 DROP PLATE W HERE REQ'D 1 Kidc Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 38",Protection Plate-0.050"Thick US32D 1 Floor poor Stop Hager 252F x US26D,Cast Floor Stop US26D � 1 Threshold NGP 424E-40",Threshold-112"x 4" 1 Weatherstripping NGP 160VA-40"x 84",Perimeter Seal-718" A 1 Gaskefing NGP 200NA-40",Sweep-3/8",1 7/4" A � Heading#23(GROUP 16) Item#31 1 Elevatlon 127 � Item#32 1 Elevation 129 x x -HM DR x HM FR 6 Standard Hinge Hager B81168 41/2"x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w/Ball Bearing US26D � 2 Latchset Best 45HN(UC)'15 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 2 Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,Parellel Artn 689 2 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 42',Protection Plate-0.050"Thick US32D 2 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D � 2 Gasketing NGP 5050&204",Self-Adhesive Silicone bulbs-114"x 1l2" B VERIFY FUNCTION Heading#24 (GROUP 17) � Item#33 1 Elevation 102 _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR � 3 Standard Hinge Hager B61279 4112"x 41/2"U526D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D 1 Door Pull Hager 33E-4'x 16"-US32D,Pull Plate-0.050 Square Comer w/3/4"Round 6"CTC Pull US32D � 1 Push Plate Hager 30S-4'x 16"-US32D,Push Plate-0.050 Square Comer US320 1 Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,Parallel Artn 689 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x U532D,Concave Wall Slop w/Concealed Mounting(2-1/2"Dia_) US32D . 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-'12"x 4" 1 Weatherstripping NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8" A � 1 Gasketlng NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3l8",'I 1/4" A � � � � � � Page 9 of 12 _ _ _ � , Heading#25 (GROUP 18) � Item#34 1 Elevation 200A � , Item#35 1 Elevation 201A � Item#36 1 Elevation 202A � ! Item#37 1 Elevation 206A � Item#38 1 Elevation 207A t , item#39 1 Elevation 208A � Item#40 1 Elevation 209A � Item#41 1 Elevation 210A � item#42 1 ElevaYwn 214A , ftem#43 1 Elevation 216A � Item#44 1 Elevatbn 217A Item#45 1 Elevation 218A � Item#46 1 Elevation 250 � ' Item#47 1 Elevatlon 251 � Item#48 1 Elevation 252 � Item#49 1 Elevation 253 � ¢ ' _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR-20MIN � � 48 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"U526D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt w/ Ball Bearing US26D � 16 Lockset Best 45H7T 15 J 626 LH,Deadbott Lockset 626 � , 16 Surface Closer NoRon 8501-PA 689,Parellel Artn ti89 � 16 IGck Plate Hager 1905-US32D-10"x 34',Protedfon Plate-0.050'Thidc US32D � 16' Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mou�Ung(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D � 16 Gasketing NGP 5050&204",Self-Adhesive Silicone bulbs-1/4"x 1/2" 8 � � ' � Heading#26 (GROUP'19) � v ' Item#50 1 Elevatfon 200B � Item#51 1 Elevation 201 B � I�em it52 1 Elevation 2028 � Item#53 7 Elevation 2066 • e � Item#54 1 ElevaUon 2078 � Item#55 1 Elevation 2088 � Item#56 1 Elevado�209B °' Item#57 1 Elevadon 210B � Item#5S 7 Elevatlon 214B � , Ilem#59 1 Elevation 2168 � Item#60 1 Elevation 2178 Item i161 1 Elevation 2188 � _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � � 36 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 4 1!2"x 4112"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/Ball Bearing US26D � 12 Latchset Best 45HN(UC)15 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 � ' 12 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Conpve Wall Stop w!Concealed Mounting(2-'I!2"Dia.) US32D � � t Heading#27(GROUP 20) � , i Item tf62 1 Elevation 271 �, Item�163 'I Elevation 2T2 g Item 3164 1 Elevation 2T3 � ' Item#65 1 Elevation 2T5 � Item#66 1 Elevation 2T6 i f e( _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR € ' 15 Standard Hinge Hager 681279 4 1l2"x 4 V2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w! Ball Bearing US26D � 5 Lockset Bast 45H7L(UC)15 J 626 LH,Privacy(Deadbolt)Lockset 626 �_ 5 Kidc Plate Hager 1905-US320-10"x 34",Prolection Plate-0.050"Thick US32D � , 5 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w!Concealed Mounting(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D � E � � 2 � ' �: �-: Page 10 of 12 � � ' --. � �; � Heading#28(GROUP 21) � Rem tf67 7 Elevation 227A Item�f68 1 Elevation 227B � ttem t169 1 Elevation 2S1 Item#70 1 Eleva6on 2S2 _x_x_-WDDRxHMFR � '12 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 4 7/2"x 41/2"US26D,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.wl Ball Bearing US26D 4 Latchset Best 45HN(lJC)15 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 4 Surface Cbser Norton 8501-PA 689,Parellel Arm 689 4 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-'10'x 34",Protection Plate-0.050"Thidc US32D � 4 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-'l/2"Dia.) US32D 4 Gaskedng NGP 5050&204",SeH-Adhesive Silicone bulbs-114'x 1/2" B MOUNT CLOSER REGULAR ARM AT 2S2 � Heading#29 (GROUP 22) Item#71 1 Elevation 219 � Item#72 1 Elevation 263 x x -FBDRxHMFR 2 Kick Plate Hager 1905-US32D-8"x 34".Protecdon Plate-0.050"Thidc US32D � HINGES,LOCK,THRESHOLD&WEATHERSTRIPPING BY FIBERGLASS DOOR MANUFATURER Heading#30 (GROUP 23) � Item#73 'I Elevation 254A � Item#74 1 Elevation 254B � x x -HMDRxHMFR 6 Standard Hinge Hager B61279 4112"x 41/2"US26D,Full MoRise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D � 2 Daor Pull Hager 33E-4'x 16"-US32D,Pull Plate-0.050 Square Comer w/3/4"Round 6"CTC PuIlUS32D 2 Push Plate Hager 30S-4"x 16"-US32D,Push Plate-0.050 Square Comer US32D 2 Surface Closer Norton 8501-PA 689,Parellel Arm 689 2 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Conceeled Mounting(2-112"Dia.) U532D � 2 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-1/2"x 4" , 2 WeathersUipping NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8' A 2 Gasketlng NGP 200NA-36".Sweep-3/8",1 1/4" A Heading#31 (GROUP 25) � Item#75 1 Elevation 112B � x x -WDDRxHMFR 3 Standard Hinge Hager BB1279 41l2"x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w/ Ball Bearing US26D 1 Cylinder Best tE74C181RP3 626,Cylinder,'I-5/32"dia. 626 � 1 Eledronic Locking Device SDC E73P 1 Surface Goser Norton 8501-PA 689,Parallel Arm 689 1 Kick Plate Hager 190S-US32D-10"x 34",ProtecUon Plata-0.050"Thick US32D . t Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Conceve Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-112"Dia.) U532D � � � � Page 11 of 12 _ � � � Heading#32 (GROUP 26) � � � Item#76 1 Elevation 130 � ' _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR � 3 Standard Hinge Hager 881168 41/2"x 41/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w/Ball Bearing US26D � 1 Accessory User Hardware POWER JAMB � � � ' Heading#33 (GROUP 27) � . Item#77 1 Elevatlon 264 � � _x_x_-HMDRxHMFR � ' 3 Standard Hinge Hager 881191 4112"x 41/2'US32D NRP,Full Mortise-Std.Wt.w!Ball Plain Bearing US32D z 1 Latchset Best 45H7 XR 15J 626 LESSlCYLINDER � 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-1!Z"x 4" k ' 1 Wealherstri m NGP 160VA-36"x 84",Perimeter Seal-7/8" A � PP 9 p 1 Gasketing NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3/8",1 1/4" A g � � ' Heading#34 (GROUP 28) &g £ � : Item#78 1 Elevation 262 � ' — — — � x x -WDDRxHMFR � € 3 Standard Hinge Hager BB1168 41/2"x 4 7/2"US26D NRP,Full Mortise-Heavy Wt.w/Ball Bearing US260 � � ' 1 Latchset Best 45HN(UC)15 J 626 LH,Passage Lockset 626 " MOUNT SHOULDER HEIGHT � 1 Surface Closer NoRan 8501-PA 889,Parallel Arm 689 �' 1 Wall Door Stop Hager 236W x US32D,Concave Wall Stop w/Concealed Mounting(2-1/2"Dia.) US32D � 1 Threshold NGP 424E-36",Threshold-1l2"x 4" 1 WeaU�ersVipping NGP 160VA-36"x 84',Perimeter Seal-7/8" q �, ' 2 Gasketlng NGP 200NA-36",Sweep-3/8",1 1/4" A � �' �' �' , � � ' �` �' 1 �' � � 3 � ' � � [- � � � A � � e ' E: F . F i i ' � � , �` d € Page 12 of 12 � ' -- _ � �' � � t � ; � , � SECTION 08800-GLAZING � � � ' ' PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified � , §' in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: � � ' 1. Doors. �, 2. Storefront framing. � 3. Glazed entrances. � ' 4. Interior borrowed lites. � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS �; ' � A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. � �: � ' B. LEED Submittals: ° � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofmg � , system, including printed statement of VOC content. � ' C. Glass Sam les: For each e of lass roduct other than clear monolithic vision lass• 12 P tYP g P g , � inches(300 mm)square. � d' D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use � same designations indicated on Drawings. � ' � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE �: ' A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers �' and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these � publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standazds. � ' � l. �ANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's ,' "Glazing Manua1." � ' 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3004, "North American Glazing � Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." a: � , B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing � with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities ; { having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and # ' safety glazing standard with which glass complies. �' C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. �: ' � � GLAZING 088000- 1 � ' �' i � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within � specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other � indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. � B. Manufacturer's Special Wazranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within � specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to•glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding � those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. � C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within � specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,moisture,or film on interior surfaces of glass. � 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in � thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. . B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated � float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated,provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. � 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS . � A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I,Quality-Q3,Class I(clear)unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise � indicated; of kind and condition indicated. � GLAZING 088000-2 � � t � � ' � 2.3 INSULATING GLASS � ; A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by � ' a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other � requirements specified. � , 1. Sealing System: Dual seal. � 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. � � g ' � 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS � t ' A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." � � B. Glazmg Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, � � that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. g ' � C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. � � ' � D. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for � joint type and as follows: � ;: ' 1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,Uses NT, G, A, and � O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other � system components with which it comes in contact. � � , � a. Color: Matching structural sealant. � � � ' 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS � : A. Cleaners,Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. � ' � B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or t minus 5. ' � ' k C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hazdness required by glass � manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. � , � D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side � walking). �: � k ' E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and �' i densiTy to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant � performance. � ' _ �: � � � , � � ' } � � t; , GLAZING 088000-3 � ,: � � � 2.6 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES � A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass. � 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. . � 2.7 INSULATING-GLASS T'YPES A. Glass T e ` � � �'� � ' , Low-e-coated,clear insulatin glass. � yp ,. _ , t 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch(�5 mm). � ' 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. � 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 50 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 m�imum. � 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 ma�cimum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.25 maximum. B. Glass Type IG-� {Adde�t��m#��; Low-e-coated,clear insulating glass. � 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch��man�. � � 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. � 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. � 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 50 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. � 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 ma�cimum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.25 maximum.. 1 l. Provide'safety glazing labeling. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 GLAZING,GENERAL � A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in � referenced glazing publications. - � GLAZING 088000 -4 � � 4 , � � � ' B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to � provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant � thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. � , � � C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from � Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or ' other imperfections that, when insta.11ed, could weaken glass and impair performance and ' appeazance. � � ' D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by � preconstruction testing. � E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing � ' publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of � compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. � ' � F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. � G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches(1270 mm). � ' � H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways `: in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to ' requirements m referenced glazmg publications. � � ' 3.2 TAPE GLAZING � � A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush � with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. � ' � B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to � make them fit opening. � ' k C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover � horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. � , D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. � Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. ' E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. � � F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense � ' compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. _ Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. � � ' G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. � � � � ' 33 GASKET GLAZING(DRY) � � E A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings �' ' exactly,with allowance for stretch during installation. ; � � � #. GLAZING 088000-5 � ' � �: �. � B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place � with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and � press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and : installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners : and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without � developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and � press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to � produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. � 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING(WET) � A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding � into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. � B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. � 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers � to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction � operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at � frequent intervals during construction,but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,or stains;remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. � D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from : natural causes,accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. � END OF SECTION 08800 � GLAZING 088000 -6 � � ' � � � i ' � SECTION 088300-MIRRORS � � ' ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � i � 1 �. l.l SUMMARY � � ' A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: € 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. � � £ ' � 1.2 SUBMIT'TALS � � ' A. Product Data.: For each type of product indicated. � � � B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to � ' other work. � € C. Samples: �" ' � 1. Mirrors: 12 inches(300 mm)square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. �: 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. � 3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches(300 mm) long. � , D. Preconstruction test reports. �' � � ' s E. Maintenance data. �; � F. Wazranty: Sample of special warranty. � ' �. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE �' � ' A. Glazing Publications: Comply with GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Minors, Handle with � Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." � € ' B. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror � manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates � on which mirrors are installed. � ' � ,. � � , � � � x � ' � � ; � , � � � ' MIIZRORS 088300- 1 � € � � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is � defined as defects developed from normal use that are not ariributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration,black spots, and clouding of the silver film. � 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503;manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror � coating process. B. Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality;ultraclear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 � percent visible light transmission. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. � 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. � B. Edge Sealer: Approved by mirror manufacturer. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting � mirrors. 2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE � A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to � produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Finish: Cleaz bright anodized. � B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners aze exposed. � C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. � MIIZRORS 088300-2 � i ' � l � � ' � 2.4 FABRICATION � j % A. Mirror Edge Treatrnent: Flat polished. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer. j ' � `s. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � ' � � 3.1 INSTALLATION ; , ' � A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for � compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting � performance of the Work. � , � 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror � mastic with existing finishes or primers. � ' 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and � surfaces are dry. � � � ' B. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of � substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where � applicable. � ' � C. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with � referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids � distorting reflected images. � ' � D. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hazdware. Attach mirror � � hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or � ' inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of s: mirrors. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage �' and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surFace. ` � ' £ E. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction � operations. � ' � F. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. � . � ' G. Maintain environmenta.l conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture � from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. � �' �� H. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections � ' that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by � mirror manufacturer. � � ' � END OF SECTION 088300 � ; � ' ¢ � � �, ' � � �' MIItRORS 088300-3 � � ' � � � � � � � � � SECTION 088300-MIItRORS � � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � � A. Section includes the followin es of silvered flat lass minors: � � g tYP g � 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � , A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � € B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to � ' other work. C. Samples: �' �_ r1. Mirrors: l 2 inches(300 mm) square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. � 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. � 3. Mirror Trim: l.2 inches(300 mm) long. � , �. D. Preconstruction test reports. � � , E. Maintenance data. � E F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. � ' � � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. Glazing Publications: Comply with GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with ,� � Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors. � �' ' B. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror � manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates # on which mirrors are installed. �; � � � � � �: � € r � � � � � _ � MIRRORS 088300 1 , � s a � � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to � replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration,black spots, and clouding of the silver film. � 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503;manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror � coating process. B. Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality; ultraclear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 � percent visible light transmission. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. � 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Ed e Sealer: A roved b mirror manufacturer. � g PP Y C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting � mirrors. 23 MIRROR HARDWARE � A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to � produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Finish: Clear bright anodized. � B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. � C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. � MIRRORS 088300-2 � � � � � � t � , 2.4 FABRICATION � � � � � A. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer. � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � i � 3.1 INSTALLATION � � � A. Examine substrates over which mirrors are to be mounted with Installer � , , present, far � compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. a ' �: 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror � ' mastic with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and � surfaces are dry. � � ' B. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where � applicable. � , C. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with � referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. � � � D. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror @ hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or � ' � inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of � mirrors. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage � and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. � , E. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction � operations. � ' � F. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. � G. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture �: , from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. € � H. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections � ' that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by � mirror manufacturer. � ' �: END OF SECTION 088300 � �; ' � �; � i ' � � , MIRRORS 088300-3 � � � � � � � ' ` SECTION 089000-LOLJVERS AND VENTS � � , � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � � § ' A. Section Includes: � � 1. Fixed,extruded-aluminum louvers. � � � ' � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � � � A. Delegated Design: �esign louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a � qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. � � � B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following ;' loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation � � of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. � t � 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. � � C. Louver Performance Ratin s: Provide louvers com 1 in with re uirements s ecified, as � g PY g q P � demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length � , and width according to AMCA 500-L. � � � � ' 13 SUBMITTALS � � A. Product Data: Far each type of product indicated. � i . . � 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropr�ate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. � � � B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and � attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles,angles,and spacing. � � �' ' C. Samples: For each type of inetal finish required. �' � D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance � ' requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified � professional engineer responsible for their preparation. � � � E. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L. � ; � � ' � LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000- 1 � � � � � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS � A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M}, Alloy 6063-T5,T-52,or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (AS1-M B 209M}, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required � for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. � 1. For fastening aluminum,use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 2. For color-finished louvers,use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. � D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. � 2.2 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances � made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealantjoints. � B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. � 23 FIXED,EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS � A. Horizontal,Drainable-Blade Louver 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, : the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company. � b. Air Flow Company, Inc. c. Airolite Company,LLC(The). � d. All-Lite Architectural Products. e. American Warming and Ventilating,Inc.; a Mestek company. . £ Anow United Industries; a division of Mestek,Inc. � g. Carnes Company, Inc. h. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. i. Construction Specialties,Inc. � j. Dowco Products Group; Safe-Air of Illinois, Inc. k. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 1. Industrial Louvers,Inc. � m. Louvers&Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek,Inc. n. Metal Form Manufacturing Inc. o. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. i LOLTVERS AND VENTS 089000-2 ' � � � � � � � � p. Nystrom Building Products. � q. Reliable Products, Inc. • r. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. � � s. United Enertech Corp. � t. Vent Products Company, Inc. � , 2. Louver Depth: 4 inches(100 mm). 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (l.52 mm) for blades and � 0.080 inch(2.03 mm) for frames. � ' 4. Louver Performance Ratings: ; � a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. (0.70 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-}wide by � , 48-inch-{1220-mm-)high louver. � b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm (4.6 m/s). � 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings SeaL � � � �' 2.4 LOiJVER SCREENS � ' ' � A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. � � ' B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of inetal as indicated for louver to which screens � are attached. � � C. Louver Screening: � , 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.60-mm) � � � wire. � � �: 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES � � � A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 � and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, � , and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' � written instructions. � � � 1. Color and Gloss: Match to finish of fiberglass window units. �' � � t: K k: ' � � � ) � �} �. F�: � � f E �' , � �' �: LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000-3 � ' �' � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 iNSTALLATION � A. Locate and place louvers and vents level,plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchora es where ossible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where � g P required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as � indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot � be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,masonry, � or dissimilar metals from conosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint. � END OF SECTION 089000 � � � � � � � � � LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 -4 � � � � � � � , s ' � � SECTION 092216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING � � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � Il.l SiJNIlVIARY � � � ' A. Section Includes: � � 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. � � 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. � � � � 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS � ' A. Product Data: For each type of product. � � a ' B. LEED Submittals: � 4 � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation � ' indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � � � � , 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � � ,: A. STGRated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in � ' assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413. �'; B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel � products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled � ' content is not less than 25 percent. � � � � � 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS � A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel f � � studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. � F l. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch(0.�4 mm). � ' 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. z � � � � � � s y ' � � NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216- 1 s � � � � � B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: � l. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. � C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. � 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch(0.84 mm). D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (134-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, � with minimum 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches(3 8 mm). � 2. Clip Angle: Not less than l-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches(38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. � E. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). � 2. Depth: 1-l/2 inches(38.1 mm). 23 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS � A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) � diameter wire,or double strand of 0.048-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. � � C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm)and minimum 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)wide flanges. � 1. Depth: 1-l/2 inches(38 mm). D. Furring Channels(Furring Members): � L Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch(22 mm)deep. � a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: O.Q18 Inch (0.45 n»n}. � � NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-2 � � ' � � . � q ' � 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS � � � A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and � ' other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. � � � B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide asphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket. � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � ' � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL �' �: ' A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. � 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in AST'M C 840 that apply � to framing installation. � � � B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures,equipment services,heavy trim, � grab bars,toilet accessories, furnishings,or similar construction. � � ' � C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. � , � � D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing � members. Frame both sides of joints independently. � � � 3.2 1NSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES � � A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than � � spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. � � � B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior �' � walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. � C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. � �' , D. Install tracks(runners)at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural � supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to � terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above � ! ceiling. � � 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to � � produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent aarial loading of finished �' �: assemblies. � 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; �' � install runner track section(for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. � a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. � b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch � � (]3-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in � finished assembly. � � � � � NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3 � �: � � � c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead � structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required � for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. � E. Direct Furring: � 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches(610 mm}o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than � lJ8 inch(3 mm)from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 33 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS � A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than � spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or aze penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. � C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling � plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting � horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying,or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger � spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. � 3. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes,or conduit. D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in ]2 feet(3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely � between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 � � � � NON-STRUCTUR.AL METAL FRAMING 092216 -4 � � � , � � � � , � SECTION 092900-GYPSUM BOARD � � � � PART1 -GENERAL � � ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � � � 4 a: � A. Section Includes: ` � 1. Interior gypsum board. � 2. Tile backing panels. � , 3. Te�rture finishes. ` � � � r � 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS a. a A. Product Data: For each type of product. � ' � B. LEED Submittals: � � � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation � indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1: For products and materials required to comply � � with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material � manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include � statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by � ' weight that is considered regional. � a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for � , each regionally manufactured material. � f 3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to � � substrates,documentation including printed statement of VOC content. # � C. Samples: �' � � 1. Teartured Finishes: 24 inch square for each textured finish indicated and on same backing � indicated for Work. � ' � PART 2-PRODUCTS � t: I 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � c: c A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies,provide materials and construction identical � � to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to & ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. : � � ; € GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 1 �, I �' � � 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL � A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 4 percent. � B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (S00 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as.well as � manufactured,within 500 miles(800 km)of Project site. 23 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. � 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Ina 5. National Gypsum Company. � 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. � B. Gypsum Board,Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). � 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. � 1. Thickness: 1J2 inch (12.7 mm). : 2. Long Edges: Tapered. � D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. � 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. � 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS � A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board (Behind tile installations): ASTM C 1178/C 1178M,with manufacturer's standard edges. � � � GYPSUM BOARD � 092900-2 � � ' � � � ' � i � � � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � � � � a. CertainTeed Corp.; G1asRoc Tile Backer. � b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC;DensShield Tile Backer. � � � 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). g 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. � � � � B. Cementitious Backer Units (Behind solid plastic shower enclosures): ANSI A 118.9 and � ASTM C 1288 or 1325,with manufacturer's standard edges. � � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � � a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. � � b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. , c. National Gypsum Company,Permabase Cement Board. �: d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. � � � 2. Thickness: 5/8 in.ch(l 5.9 mm). � 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. � �; � ' � 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES �' �' � �. A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. fi 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced � � galvanized steel sheet. � 2. Shapes: � � � � a. Cornerbead. � b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. ° c. Expansion(control)joint. � � d. "V"Reveal Molding(Rustication Joints) � 1) FryReglet DRMV-25. � � ;: � � 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS r; � A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. ;; � �: B. Joint Tape: � i � 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. � ' 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. �: 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. � � ' � � � GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3 € � � � � C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible � with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2 7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS � A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering � gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). � B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665,T e I(blankets without membrane facing). � YP 1. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of � preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound � transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 1. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated � according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." � F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." � 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. � B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed,vinyl texture finish for trowel application. � 1. Texture: Mud Trowel Knockdown PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS � A. Comply with ASTM C 840. . � B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. � � GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4 � � � � � � � ' � � � � � � C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural � abutments, except floors. Provide l./4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these a locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between � � edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. � �: � D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used � � for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. " � � 1. Rustication Joint: Install rustication joints at locations indicated on Drawings. � � 2. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. � E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. � � tF. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not � intended to receive tape. � � � G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to � ASTM C 840: � � � 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. � 2. Leve12: Panels that are substrate for tile. ; 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. � � t a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. � E H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces � � receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply drywall mud for a trowel finish,to produce a random � texture matching approved mockup � �', � I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove � from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise � damaged during drywall application. � � � J. Remove and replace panels that are wet,moisture damaged, and mold damaged. � �. � � � END OF SECTION 092900 � � � � � t: � ; � � � � � � � . � � � � �` � GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 5 � ' � � 1 i � SECTION 093000-CERAMIC TILE � , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SLfMN1ARY � � ' A. Section Includes: � � 1. Ceramic tile. � ' 2. Waterproof inembrane. � 3. Metal edge strips. � # � . � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � 1 � B. LEED Submittal: � � � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation � indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � � 2. Product data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement � ' of VOC content. � � C. Samples: � � �' 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. � 2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for � ' each color and finish required. � � a 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � , � � A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to � demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. � � � 1. Build mockup of floor tile installation. �. 2. Build mockup of wall tile installation. � , 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of �', Substantial Completion. � � � � �' � �. � ' �. �' , CERAMIC TILE 093000- 1 � � � � 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS � A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. � 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition,color,pattern, and size indicated. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for � types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Tile Type CT-1: Glazed paver tile(Toilet Floors). � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile, Division of Dal-Tile International Inc,Cliff Pointe or comparable, approved substitution. � 2. Composition: Porcelain. 3. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches(305 by 305 mm). 4. Thickness: 5/l.6 inch (7.94 mm). � - 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: Mapei,to be selected from manufacturer's full range. � C. Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile(Kitchen Backsplash&Toilet Walls). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile; � Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.,Veranda or comparable, approved substitution. 2. Module Size: 6 1/2 by 20 inches(l65 by 508 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch(8 mm). � 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. � 7. Grout Color: Mapei,to be selected from manufacturer's full range, anti-microbial 8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected ftom manufacturer's standard shapes: � a. Base: Coved,module size 6 by 13 inches(152 by 330 mm). b. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap,module size 4 by 20 inches(102 by 508 tmn). c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape, same size as � adjoining flat tile. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. � � CERAMIC TILE 093000 -2 � � ' � � � � � 2.2 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE � � � � A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with � ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. � � B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. � ' � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: � ' a. Bostik,Inc.;Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. � b. GCure; Pro-Red Waterproofing Membrane 63. � c. Custom Building Products; RedGuard Waterproofing and Crack Control � ' Membrane. � d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latapoxy 24hr HydroProofing. � e. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. � ' f. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack � Isolation Membrane. F � � ' 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS � � � A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. � ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � ' the following: „ a. Bonsal American;an Oldcastle company. � s: b. Bostik,Inc. � ' c. GCure. � d. Laticrete International, Inc. � e. MAPEI Corporation. � f. Summitville Tiles, Inc. � ' g. TEC;a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. � 2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. �` � 3. For wall applications,provide nonsagging mortar. g , � � 2.4 GROUT MATERIALS � , �, A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7. i; �. � t 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � the following: �, a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. � � b. Bostik,Ina f a C-Cure. � d. Laticrete International, Inc. ' e. MAPEI Corporation. � f. Summitville Tiles, Inc. �` g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. � , � �: � � , CERAMIC TILE 093000-3 ' � € F: �- � 2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. � B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout(Toilet Floors): ANSI A1183. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: � a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik,Ina c. GCure. � d. Laticrete International,Inc. e. MAPEI Corporation. £ Summitville Tiles, Inc. � g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B.Fuller Company. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS � A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint � Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). � B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that � are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant. b. Dow Corning Corporation;Dow Corning 786. c. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. ; d. Laticrete International,Inc.; Latasil Tile& Stone Sealant. e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. � £ Tremco Incorporated;Tremsi1600 White. C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; � Uses T,M,A, and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Bostik,Inc.;Chem-Calk 550. b. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2. � c. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL. � � CERAMIC TILE 093000-4 ' � � , � , � , 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � � � � ' A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based � formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations � indicated. � , � B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape,nickel silver exposed-edge material. � �. � C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change � ' color or appearance of grout. � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � , incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � � a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. � � ' b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout&Tile Sealer. � a C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. � d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. e � � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' � 3.1 EXAMINATION � � ' A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for � compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting � performance of installed tile. � 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are � ' incom atible with tile-settin materials includin curin com ounds and other substances P g g g P that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ' ' ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. � � i 1 � , 3.2 PREPARATION � � A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set � mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile- � setting material manufacturer. B. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent � ' grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of � temporary protective coating,taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. � � � ' �. � � �' ' � t �. i � � � CERAMIC TILE 093000- 5 4 ' � � � � 3 3 INSTALLATION � A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods � specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications far Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting � materials used. 1. Far the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: � a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches(200 by 2U0 mm)or larger. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete � covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges,and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. � C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for � straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates,collars,or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and � center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. � E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Paver Tile(CT-1): 3/]5 inch(4.8 mm). � 2. Toilet Wall and Kitchen Backsplash Tile(CT-2): 1/]6�inch(1.6 mm). F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. � G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting � materials,mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. � 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other � flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. � � CERAMIC TII.,E 093000- 6 , - � ' � � � ' I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer t cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout- sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, € ' remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. � � J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to � produce waterproof inembrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. � ' � � 3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE ` � , A. Interior Radiant Heat Floor Installations,Concrete Subfloor: s � 1. Toilets - Tile Installation RH110: Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane; � , hydronic piping installed in concrete; TCA RHl 10. � � a. Tile Type: CT-1. � ' b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. � c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. � r , B. Interior Wall Installations,Masonry or Concrete: � � 1. Tile Installation W202: Thin-set mortar; TCA W202. ' a. Tile Type: CT-2 �, b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. � , � C. Interior Wall Installations,Metal Studs or Furring: � � , 1. Tile Installation W245: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum � backer board; TCA W245. � � � ' a. Tile Type: CT-2 � b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. � c. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded gout. � ' � � END OF SECTION 093000 � ' �' � � i! � ' ' � , �, � � � � � � � ' �. � ' CERAMIC TILE 093000-7 �' � � � H ' F � � � ' i SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS � � � ' _ � PART 1 -GENERAL � �S I1.1 SUMMARY � � t ' A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � a � ' B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation � with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items: � c � ' C. Samples: For each exposed finish. � D. LEED SubmittaL• � � ' 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation � indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � ' �: 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 43: Low-emitting materials. � ' � E. Product test reports. � � � ' F. Maintenance data. � � � � 13 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE � ' � � A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- � accredited laboratory. � ' � B. Fire-Test-Response Chazacteristics: � � ;; 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for � ' Class C materials,when tested per ASTM E 84. � � � ' a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. ` � � ; , t � F ' �{ Y ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 � , �: S ? � � � 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS � : A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged � with protective covering for storage and identified with�labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling.Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with AST'M E 1264. � 1. Recycled Content: Provide acoustical panels with recycled content such that � postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a mmimum of 29 percent by weight. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. � 1. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is � not less than 25 percent. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table l, � "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without � failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190,conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers,Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire;ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 � zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, � Table l, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-(2.69-mm-)diameter wire. � E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; � formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. � � ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -2 � � ' � � � ' � 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING � � A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Fine € ' Fissured Second Look 1766 or a comparable product by one of the following: � � � ' 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation � 2. USG Interiors, Ina � � ' B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: � 1. Type and Form: Type III,mineral base with painted finish;Form 2,water felted. �' � � � C. Color: White � � D. LR: Not less than 0.84. � ' E. NRC: Not less than 0.55 Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. � � ' F. CAC: Not less than 30. � G. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular. ' H. Thickness: 3/4 inch(16 mm). � � � I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches(610 by 1220 mm). � t � � t 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING � ' A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong � Supr�ne XL 9/16 or a comparable product by one of the followmg: � ' � 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation � 2. USG Interiors,Inc. � ' _ �` B. Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: 1�Iain and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled � steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to � ' ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (�90)'coating designation, with prefmished 15/16- � inch-(24mm-)wide metal caps on flanges. � � , ' E. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. �: 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. � 3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. � ' 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. �; � � � } 1 } r � �. , � • �: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -3 �' t � �; � � � _,� ._. �_ _ �. ,� ,_�,.., : � . w�.� _ , � _ � -�� - :�. . � t � � � 6� � � I � .e. ., a ... ,s.. ... . . ... .. . � i- ,.., -.. ...nw .s.-. �a.��.... . � �b . �t �+.... x c. .� ... , r.,a..-},.�a . ... <a .�.. wu�. . r�6 .. _ . .. �.... .��Y.. .x. a ... ^'�*� � � � . .. a.a H` t ...� � . � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and��seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's � written instructions and CISCA s Ceiling Systems Handbook. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at � opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with � insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces � hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install canying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. � l. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. � � � � ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -4 � f � � ' � � ;,+ ' � ti � D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and � ; ' where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at � � intervals not more than 16 inches(400 mm)o.c. and not more than 3 inches(75 mm)from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3.2 mm in 3.6 m). %[ ' Miter corners accurately and connect securely. s � E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Ff ' Remove and replace dented,bent,or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system � runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, � :, ' precise fit. � � i ' ' END OF SECTION 095113 i � ' � � ' ' � � € ' 1 � � � 1 � �. ' � � � � ' � � 1 �. � � ' � � � ' ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -5 ' ' i � � � � F E t ,1 � � = SECTION 096513 -RESII.IENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES [ � � � ' PART 1 -GENERAL � �i,, � � � 1.1 SUMMARY � € A. Section Includes: � ' � ! 1. Resilient base. � 2. Resilient stair accessories. � � 3. Resilient molding accessories. � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' " A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � `r' � ; ' B. LEED Submittals: ' , 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC � content. � C. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not � , ' less than 12 inches(300 mm} long, of each resilient product color,texture, and pattern required. � ¢ � 1.3 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE � , � A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to � , ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. � � 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. � ' ' 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS � ' A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive � resilient products. � ' B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. ' C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been � completed. � ' � € ' � � RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 � , � � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 RESII.,IENT BASE � A. Resilient Base: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pinnacle � Rubber Base; Division of Roppe Corporation or comparable product by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc. � b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products;Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c. Flexco,Inc. d. Johnsonite. � e. Mondo Rubber International,Inc. £ Musson,R. C.Rubber Co. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. � 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). � 2. Manufacturing Method: Group II (layered)] [Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered). 3. Style: Cove(base with toe). � C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (32 mm} D. Height: 4 inches(102 mm). � E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. ' F. Outside Corners: Job formed. � G. Inside Corners: Job formed. � H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer's full range. � 2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES � A. Resilient Stair Treads: 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of same manufacturer utilized for resilient base � products: B. Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169. � 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, � thermoplastic). 2. Surface Design: a. Class 2,Pattern: Raised-square design. � RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -2 � � � � ' � � � '3 ' � C. Nosing Style: Square. � i � D. Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) � � ' E. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6 mm and ta ered to back ed e. R ) P g � � ' F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece � � ; G. Risers: Smooth, flat,coved-toe, 7 inches(178 mm)high by length matching treads.produced by � ' same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. � 1. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). � i � ": , H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. � ; � � ',; � 2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY � ' A. Resilient Molding Accessory: � ', ' � 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of same manufacturer utilized for resilient base � products: � "; ' B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for carpet, reducer strip for resilient floor covering,joiner for tile and carpet,transition strips. � � ' C. Material: Rubber. . � € D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. € , E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. � � � I2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or � ' blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. ' B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. � ' l. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): ` � � a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. � b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. ' C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread �: manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. � � ' RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -3 ' � D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair � tread manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 PREPARATION � A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. � B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. � 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and � that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. � 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching � compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to � be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed � at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before � installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other � permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of � adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in � continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. � � RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -4 � C , � ' � i � ' € 33 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION � � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. � � ' & B. Resilient Stair Accessories: � 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. � . . � '";' ' C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates , throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor � ' covering that would otherwise be exposed. � � P ' � � 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION '' � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. � � ' , B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads � before applying liquid floor polish. € ' 1. Apply two coat(s). � C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. � ' � END OF SECTION 096513 � � # � � � � � ' � ' � ' � � � � k � � � � � ' � � RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 � , � � � ' � � � � � � SECTION 096516-RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING � � � f PART 1 -GENERAL � � ; � ` 1.1 SLTMMARY � � i � A. Section Includes: � 1. Resilient(rubber)athletic floor covering. � � � �!,'! ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. € �i � � B. LEED Submittals: ` � ' 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC � content. � 2. Product Data.for Credit EQ 4.3: Low-emitting materials. � , � 3. Product Data for Credit MR 4.0: Recycled content. � F ' � C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts and locations of seams. � ' D. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-m�n) � sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. � � � E. Maintenance data. � , 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to � ' ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. � 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. � ' � 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS � ' A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive � floor coverings. s � � ' B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by � manufacturer. � � ' C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. � � � RESILIENT SHEET FLOORiNG 096516- 1 D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. � E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting,have been completed. � 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Resilient Athletic Flooring: Manufacturer's current standard warranty. � 1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING(See Alternates) � � � t.. ..s. �. , . . .. .. � a.. � � , � � x: � . � 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS � A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for � applications indicated. � � RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516-2 ' � � t � � � � f � 6 � � � � z ! B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and ; substrate conditions indicated. ' � 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated � � according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). � � 'a � PART 3 -EXECUTION € i ; ' 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor � .; ' coverings. � B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to AST'M F 710. ' � l. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners. � 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and � ' � that contain soap, wa�c, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. � 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed � ' ' with installation only after substrates pass testing. � 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. � ' C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching � compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. � � D. Do not install floor coverings until they axe same temperature as space where they are to be installed. � 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at � , least 48 hours in advance of installation. � � ' E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before � installation. � , � 3.2 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. � ' � B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. � � � ' � � � � �_ � , RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516-3 � � � C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: � 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 � inches(1�2 mm)away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. � D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets,pipes,outlets,and door frames. � E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by � repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent , marking device. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to � produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. � 3 3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor covering. B. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. � END OF SECTION 096516 � � � � � � � RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516-4 : � ' � � � ' SECTION 096813 -CARPET TILING � � ` ' PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � ; 1.1 SUMMARY � � � ' A. This Section includes modular,fusion-bonded carpet tile. � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � , � A. Product Data: For each product indicated. � ' B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: � � � � ' 1. Carpet tile type,color,and dye lot. � : 2. Pattern of installation. 3. Edge,transition,and other accessory strips. � ' ' 4. Transition details to other flooring materials. � € C. Samples: For each color and texture required. ' 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. � 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long � Samples. � ' � D. LEED Submittal: F 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 43: � ' a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product � requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus"program. � ' b. For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content. � � E. Maintenance data. � ' � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' � A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering � Installation Boazd or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program � ' requirements. � � � ' � � � �; � , , � CARPET TILING 096813 - 1 � 1 � � � B. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample � submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standazds for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of � Substantial Completion. � 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." � B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidiTy conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for � Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile � manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees � to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling; snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge,and delamination. � 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. � 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products � installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. � 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). � � CARPET TILING 096813 -2 � ! � ; , � 4 � € g ` ' � PART 2-PRODUCTS � ' ' 2.1 CARPET TILE , A. Approved Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: � ;: t � 1. Collins and Aikman,Kasuri II 02268. � 2. Cambridge, Cordage � ' 3. � .��°� �_ . ,.� �� : . .�,�. . � � i ' 4. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. � � B. Fiber Content: 100 peroent nylon 6, 6. � i ' � C. Fiber Type: TDX Nylon. ' D. Pile Chazacteristic: Patterned-loop pile. � � � E. Pile Thickness: 0.187 inches for finished carpet tile. ' F. Stitches: 10 stitches per inch�mm). ' G. Gage: 1/12 gage in ends per inch,�inni�. H. Total Weight: 132 oz./sq.yd.for finished carpet tile. € I. Backing System: ER3 RS � ' � � J. Size: 24 by 24 inches(610 b�610 mm). � , � K. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. � � L. Performance Characteristics: As follows: � ' � 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. � ' 2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf{�5 A�per ASTM D 2646. 3. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0_8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as � determined by physical measurement. � ' 4. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 5. Resistance to Insects. Comply with AATCC 24. � 6. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4,wet and dry,per AATCC 165. � 7. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AF'U (AATCC fading units) per � t AATCC 16,Option E. � 8. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 kV per AATCC 134. � 9. Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product � ' requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus"program. � � � ' � � , CARPET TILING 096813 -3 � � 2.2 WALK-OFF CARPET TILE � A. Approved Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: l. Collins and Aikman,Abrasive Action � 2. Cambridge,Entree � 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. B. Fiber Type: TDX Nylon. � C. Pile Characteristic: Patterned-loop pile. D. Pile Thickness: 0.187 inches for finished carpet tile. � E. Stitches: 8 stitches per inch. � F. Gage: 1/12 gage in ends per inch. G. Backing System: Non-woven synthetic fiber � H. Size: 24 by 24 inches(610 b�6l0 mm). I. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. � J. Performance Characteristics: As follows: � 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than l 001bf(��I+9)per ASTM D 2646. � 3. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. 4. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). � 5. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 6. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4,wet and dry,per AATCC 165. 7. Colorfasfiess to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) per � AATCC 16,Option E. 8. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 kV per AATCC 134. 9. Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program. � 23 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES � A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulio-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. � � CARPET TILING 096813 -4 � � � , ° e � .; , � ; B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit � ? products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for � installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. � ;` ' � ° 1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated ° i according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA method 24). � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � " ' � � 3.1 INSTALLATION � � � ' t � A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile � manufacturer's written installation instructions. � ; ' B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. � C. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable �; ' ' flanges,alcoves, and similaz openings. � D. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. � ' � � END OF SECTION 096813 £ �' ' � � ' � t � , � � �' � � � ' � � � ' � � � . � � ' � � � 1 � � i � s ' � � CARPET TILING 096813 -5 ' � � � t , F � � � SECTION 099113 -EXTERIOR PAINTING � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � ': � 1.1 SUMMARY � A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following � ' exterior substrates: � f:. � � ' 1. Concrete masonry units(CMU). ` 2. Steel. � 3. Galvanized metaL � � 4. Wood. � � , 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required. � � C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category � specified in Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted. � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: � � � 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved � Products List." � 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural � i Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. � � � 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS � A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as � ' materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing � contents. � � 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent,but not less than 1 gaL (3.8 L)of each material � and color applied. � � � ' � � ' EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 i � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 PAINT,GENERAL � A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another � and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by � manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � 2.2 BLOCK FILLERS � A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI#4. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. � 23 PRIMERS/SEALERS � A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI#3. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. � 2.4 METAL PRIMERS � A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79. � 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MI'I#26. � 1. VOC Content: E Range of EL � 2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#11 (Gloss Level 5). � 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. � � � EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -2 � I { , � t � � � £ { ( ' ; 2.6 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS i ' ' A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel(Semigloss): MPI#94(Gloss Leve15). � ` 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � 3.1 EXAMINATION ,; ' A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements � for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. � "! ' B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter � as follows: 1. Masonry(Clay and CMCT): 12 percent. � � � C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing � finishes and primers. ; � ' � D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces � are dry. , 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. � � � � 3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION � � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural � Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. � �: ' B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and � incompatible paints and encapsulants. � 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required ' to produce paint systems indicated. ' � C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, � ' roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color � breaks. � � � D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of ' other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. � , �' EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -3 � � � � � E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or � defaced painted surfaces. 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE � A. CMU Substrates: � 1. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 4.2L. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. � b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex(semigloss). B. Steel Substrates: � 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT S.1D. � a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. � c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel(semigloss). C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: � 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. � b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel(semigloss). � END OF SECTION 099113 � � � � � � � EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -4 � ; - t € � ; ' i i � �Y t ' � ; SECTION 099123 -INTERIOR PAINTING � ` � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � E � l.l SUMMARY � � � � ?: � A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: � � � ,j � 1. Concrete masonry units(CMU). � 2. Steel. � 3. Galvanized metal. ��, � 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board. � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � � B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required. � , C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category � specified in Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted. � ' ' � D. LEED Submittal: � 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC � � content and chemical components. � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. MPI Standards: ' 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved � Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural � � Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. � � � � � � � � � � INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 �' � � �. � � 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS � A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing � contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L)of each material � . and color applied. PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL � A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another � and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by � manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with � the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: � 1: Flat Paints,Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. � 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 �-• 4. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. � 5. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 6. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied ta Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 �• 7. Primers, Sealers,and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. � C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following � chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by � weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). � � INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 � � � � ' � � i' � � E � '!!� ' 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: � i a. Acrolein. � b. Acrylonitrile. �. ; t c. Antimony. � d. Benzene. � e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. � ' £ Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl)phthalate. ; h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. �' � i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. � j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. �' k. Diethyl phthalate. � ' ' 1. Dimethyl phthalate. � m. Ethylbenzene. � n. Formaldehyde. ; ' o. Hexavalent chromium. � p. Isophorone. � q. Lead. � ' r. Mercury. � s. Methyl ethyl ketone. � t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. � u. Methylene chloride. � t v. Naphthalene. � w. Toluene(methylbenzene). � x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. ' y. Vinyl chloride. �: a D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range � , � 1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. t2.2 BLOCK FILLERS � � A. Block Filler,Latex,Interior/Exterior: MPI#4. , 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. � � ' 23 PRIMERS/SEALERS �; � � A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI#50. � � 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. � 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. � ' � � 1 � � �: INTERIOR PAINTING - 099123 -3 � i � � � � 2.4 METAL PRIMERS � A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. ' B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#26. � 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. � 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI#39. � 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. � 2.6 LATEX PAINTS � A. Interior Latex(Flat): MPI#53 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. � 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.5. B. Interior Latex(Satin): MPI#43 (Gloss Leve14). � 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating EPR 3.5. � C. Interior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#54 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. � 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION - � A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements � : for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: � 1. Masonry(Clay and CMiJ): 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with e�usting � finishes and primers. � 1NTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -4 � `s t ' 'r � !; ' D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces � are dry. , � 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. � ' � 3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in MPI Architectural � � 11 � Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. , B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. � 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as reyuired , , to produce paint systems indicated. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, � ' roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color � breaks. ' D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including,but not limited to,the following: ' 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. ' c. Pipe hangers and supports. � d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. � e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of inetal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets � , and outlets. £ Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. , g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: � ' a. Switchgear. � b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field � painting. , E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. , � F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or � defaced painted surfaces. � ' � , INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 � � 3 3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE � A. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: � a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior,MPI#4. � b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior,matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Leve15),MPI#54. B. Steel Substrates: � 1. Alkyd System: MPI INT S.IE. � a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd(semigloss). � C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C. � a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. � b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. a Topcoat: Interior alkyd(semigloss). D. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork. � l. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. � b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex(semigloss). � E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. � a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. � c. Topcoat-Ceilings: Interior latex(flat). d. Topcoat—General Walls: Interior latex flat. (satin). � END OF SECTION 099123 � � � INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -6 � i � � � t , � SECTION 099600-HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS � ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' ' 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes surface prepazation and application of high-performance coating systems. � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each e of roduct indicated. tYP P , � B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated. � C. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and ' locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. � D. LEED Submittals: � ' �: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For coatings, including printed statement of VOC � content and chemical components. � � , � 1.3 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE ' A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: � 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved ' Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural � Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated. , PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL � A. Material Com atibili : � ' p Ty � l. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one � another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as � ' demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. � 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. � ' � � � , HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600- 1 � , � � � � B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA � Method 24): 1. Nonflat Paints,Coatings,and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. : 2. Anticorrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC content of not more � than 250 g/L. 3. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 4. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 � �• 5. Primers, Sealers,and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints � and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following : chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: � 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing 1 or more � benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. � b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. � d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate. � h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. � i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. � k. Diethyl phthalate. ; 1. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. � n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. � q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. � t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. � w. Toluene(methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. � � HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600-2 � i ' � ' 2.2 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI#4. � ' ' 1. VOC Content: Minimum E Ran e of E3. g � , ' � 2.3 METAL PRIlvIERS ' A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer(Water Based): MPI#107. l. Environmental Characteristics: � ' � a. VOC Content: � 1) Minimum E Range of E2. , 2) Meets or exceeds LEED requirements for VOC content. b. Environmental Performance Rating(EPR): Minimum EPR 2. ' B. Cold-Curing Epoxy Primer: MPI#101. 1. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E3. � ' � ' 2.4 EPDXY COATINGS A. Epoxy, Cold-Cured, Gloss: MPI#77. � ' 1. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2. B. Water-Based Epoxy(Interior and Exterior): MPI#115. , 1. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2. � , PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements ' for maa�imum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. l. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture , meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. � ' b. Masonry(Clay and CMLT): 12 percent. � c. Wood: 15 percent. � d. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. � ' � HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600-3 ' � � 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with � existing finishes or primers. 3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. � ; 4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural � Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- � applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers � skilled in the trades involved. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt,oil, grease,and � incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required � to produce coating systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted � in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture � content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. CMU Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or � alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale using methods recommended in writing by � coating manufacturer. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal � fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. � J. Wood Substrates: � 1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of knot sealer before applying primer. � 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces,undersides, and back sides of wood. � HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 -4 � � 1 � � € - ' � 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic � wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. � � , � 3 3 APPLICATION � � � , A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. � , 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. � , 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. � ', ' 3. Coat back sides of access panels,removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to � match exposed surfaces. � { B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of � ', ' the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide � sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. � C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat,apply additional coats until cured film � ' has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. � ' D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush � marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color � breaks. k ' � 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � ' A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from � Project site. €. , B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by � washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. � ' C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. , D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. � ' � 3.5 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE ' A. CML7 Substrates: � � 1. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System: � ' a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler,MPI#4. � b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy(interior and exterior),MPI#115. t , c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy(interior and exterior), MPI#115. � � HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600- 5 � ' � � � � � B. Steel Substrates: 1. Water-Based E ox Coatin S stem: � P Y g Y a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer(water based),MPI#107. � b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy(interior and exterior),MPI#115. c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy(interior and exterior),MPI#115. C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: � 1. Epoxy Coating System: � a. Prime Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer,MPI#101. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss,MPI#77. c. Topcoat: Epoxy,cold-cured, gloss,MPI#77. � : END OF SECTION 099600 � � � � � � � � � , � � HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600-6 � i � ' ' � i SECTION 101100-VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES ' PART 1 -GENERAL � � " ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � � � ''I ' A. Section Includes: � 1. Sliding visual display units. � � ' ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � ' 1. Include individual panel weights for sliding visual display units. � B. LEED Submittal: � ' 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating ' that the product contains no urea formaldehyde. � C. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and � ' attachments to other work. � � 1. Show locations of panel joints. � 2. Include sections of typical trim members. � ' D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. � � � ' E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics. ' F. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals. � G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. � ' � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to � ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of � applicable testing agency. � ' 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. � 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. � ' , � VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100- 1 � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or � workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: � a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking,or flaking. � 2. WarranTy Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. PA RT2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL � A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain-enamel � coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated. B. Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II, [burlap � weave] <Insert texture or pattern>; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (444 g/sq. m); with surface-burning characteristics indicated. C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M},Alloy 6063. � 2.2 SLIDING VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS � A. Horizontal-Sliding Visual Display Units: Factory-fabricated units consisting of extruded- aluminum tubular frame, fixed-rear visual display panel, aluminum-framed horizontal-sliding � panels, and extruded-aluminum fascia that conceals overhead sliding track; designed for recessed mounting. Provide panels that operate smoothly without vibration or chatter. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Hon Smartlink Wall Rail System or a comparable product by one of the following: � a. A-1 Visual Systems. b. AARCO Products, Inc. � c. ADP Lemco, Inc. d. Aywon. e. Best-Rite Manufacturing. � £ Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. g. Ghent Manufacturing,Inc. h. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment,Inc. � i. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. j. Tri-Best Visual Display Products. 2. Three-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel covering entire rear surface. � Provide two, 48 inch, 2-sided whiteboard sliding panels and two, 24 inch, 2-sided whiterboard/tackboard sliding panels. ' � VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 -2 ' � i , � � i ' � 3. Sliding Panels: Fabricated from not less than 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick, kraft-paper � honeycomb core; designed to be rigid and to resist warpage. 4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum overhead track and channel- � ' shaped bottom guides;with two nylon ball-bearing carriers and two nylon rollers for each � sliding panel. � 23 ACCESSORIES � ' A. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. � � � 2.4 FABRICATION � ' � A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and � backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, � ' waterproof adhesive. � � 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES � ' � A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils(0.04 mm). � , � � 2.6 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE ' A. Sliding Visual Display Unit: � � ' 1. Horizontal-Sliding Type: Three-track unit. � � a. Fixed Rear Panel: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly. € � ' � 1) Color: White. � � b. Sliding Panels: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly. � ' � 1) Color: White. � c. Sliding Panels: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard assembly. � , � 1) Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. � € ' 2. Overall Width: Twelve feet. � 3. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. � . 4. Accessories: Chalktray. � ' �' � � ' � i � � � � VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 -3 � ' � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual � display surfaces and wall surfaces. B. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing � materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. C. Sliding Visual Display Units: Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated. � Attach to wall framing with fasteners at not more than 16 inches(4U0 mm)o.c. 1. Adjust panels to operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as � recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one � cleaning label to visual display surface in each room. Cover and protect visual display surfaces. END OF SECTION 101100 � � � � � � � � � � VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100-4 � � i � ' �¢ t [': i' � ' p SECTION 101400- SIGNAGE � � ` , PART 1 -GENERAL � � � '' , 1.1 SUMMARY � A. This Section includes the following: � ' 1. Dimensional illuminated characters. 2. Panel signs. � 3. Traf�ic Signage � , 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS � '' ' A. ADA-ABA Accessibili Guidelines: U.S.Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance � Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and � ' Facilities;Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines." � , 1.3 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each e of roduct indicated. �' tYP P � ' B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. F �. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by � ' others, and accessories. � 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and � Braille, and layout for each sign. � , 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. � C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. � ' � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � , A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility � Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. ' B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for � intended use. � � ' � � � SIGNAGE 101400- 1 ' � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS � A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM:B 209 (ASTM B 2U9M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the � strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. B. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet),Type IJVA(UV absorbing). � C. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. � 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. � 2. Advance Corporation;Braille-Tac Division. 3. A.R. K. Ramos. � 4. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 5. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 6. Charleston Industries, Inc. 7. Gemini Incorporated. � 8. Grimco, Inc. 9. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 10. Metal Arts;Div. of L&H Mfg. Ca � 11. Mills Manufacturing Company. 12. Mohawk Sign Systems. 13. Nelson-Harkins Industries. � 14. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 15. Southwell Company(The). A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Form exposed faces and sides of chazacters to produce surfaces � free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with the following requirements: � 1. Illuminated Backlighted Channel Characters: Manufacturer's standard fiber-optic, LED or neon tube lighting including transformers, insulators, and other components. Make provisions for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. � 2. Aluminum Sheet: Not less than 0.090 inch(2.29 mm)thick. a. Finish: Painted. � b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � � SIGNAGE 101400 -2 � i � � � � � , � 23 PANEL SIGNS g € A. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under � 'i, , installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus ]/16 inch (]..5 mm)measured diagonally � � from corner to corner,complying with the following requirements: ' l. Acrylic Sheet: O.U80 inch (2A3 mm)thick. '!! ` 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2 inch radius. 4. Mounting: Unframed. � � � a. Wall mounted with two-face tape. , � 5. \Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with contrasting colors. '; ' B. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols � complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A 117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges ' free from burrs and cut marks;Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. s � 1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.. � , 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). � C. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backin g. A p pl y co p y to glass and panel si g ns. � ' D. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors,provide colored coatings, � including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for application intended. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. �. ' � 2.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAGE � � € A. Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/i 6 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from � corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: � 1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.080 inch (2.03 mm)thick. � 2. Coating: Reflective � ' 3. Copy: Applied vinyl � � B. Posts: Unistrut Telespar Sign Support Systems. � � 1. Post: Galvanized conforming with ASTM Specification A-653 designation G-90. 2. Shape: Square tub formed of 14-gauge steel. 3. Ground Support: Anchor base. ' � � , � , SIGNAGE 101400-3 � � F. Sign Schedule Location Tvne CoQX � IDENTIFICATION: At South Gable Wall 14"high channel letters "VAIL FIRE STATION#3" � Adj.Dr. 114 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "CONFERENCE ROOM" Raised Copy&Braille � Adj.Dr. 1T2 9"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "MEN" Raised Copy&Braille Male symbol&handicapped accessible symbol. � Adj.Dr. 1T3 9"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "WOMEN" Raised Copy&Braille Female symbol&handicapped accessible symbol. � Adj.Dr. 115 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "CUSTODIAL" Raised Copy&Braille � Adj.Dr. 104 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "IT" Raised Copy&Braille � Adj.Dr. 111 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "STORAGE" Raised Copy&Braille Sidelite at Dr 112B 2"High Die-Cut Vinyl "VAIL FIRE AND EMERGENCY � � SERVICES"plus Vail Fire Department logo (see graphic under 3.1 E) INFORMATIONAL: � North wall Vestibule 113 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "EMERGENCY PHONE" � Raised Copy&Braille North wall Vestibule 113 6"x 9"Un-framed "PUSH BUTTON TO Panel w/ CALL DUTY PERSONNEL" � Raised Copy&Braille On Dr 262 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "WARNING: FIRE POLE ROOM" � Raised Copy&Braille On Dr 264 6"x 9"Un-framed Panel w/ "WARNING: SEVERE DROP ON � . Raised Copy&Braille OPPOSITE SIDE OF DOOR" TRAFFIC CONTROL: See Architectural Site Improvement Plan. � END OF SECTION 101400 � � SIGNAGE 101400 -6 � � � � ' � SECTION 102600 -WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION � ' � + PART1 -GENERAL � I � !, � 1.1 SUMMARY ' � A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. � � �: 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � a � , B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and � attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis � ' data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their � preparation. � � ' ' C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (3U0 � tnm) long. � ' D. Material certificates. . � E. Material test reports. � , F. Maintenance data. � G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � , . A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. , B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by L7L or another qualified testing agency. � ' � � , � € � � ' � WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1 �' ' � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: � a. Structuralfailures. . b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. � 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS A. PVC Plastic: AST'M D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact- � resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout. 1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 JJm) of notch when tested according � to ASTM D 256,Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. � 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and � finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M)for Alloy 6063-T5. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonma etic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, � � and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. � 2.2 CORNER GUARDS � A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90 � degree turn to match wall condition. � � WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 -2 � � � ' � � � � � � � ,; , 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � ; offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, � ` the following: � a. Balco,Inc. ; ', ' b. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. � c. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. �' d. Musson Rubber Company. � ' e. Pawling Corporation. � 2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch (2.0-mm) wall thickness; in � dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings. � � �: a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � 1 3. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-incl�-(1.5-mm-)thick, one-piece,extruded aluminum. � 4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; � field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover. � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � , �3.1 INSTALLATION � ' A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without � distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks,voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the fmished Work. � um ard corners and at � 1. Install impact-resistant wall protection unrts at all exterior gyps bo � mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a � ' complete installation. � � a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. � � b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.l m), splice � aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no � ' closer than l 2 inches(305 mm). c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams. � B. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a , standard,ammonia-based,household cleaning agent. � � C. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by � , manufacturer. � � � � END OF SECTION 102600 � � ' WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600-3 � � � � � � � ' �' SECTION 102800-TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES � ' PART 1 -GENERAL � € I 1.1 SLIMMARY � A. Section Includes: � 1 � 1. Public-use washroom accessories. � 2. Private-use bathroom accessories. � ' 3. Kitchenette accessories. � 4. Underlavatory guards. ° 5. Custodial accessories. �: ' 6. Pedestal benches � � B. Owner-Furnished Material: � � 1. Toilet tissue dispensers � 2. Paper towel dispensers � 3. Soap dispensers � , 4. Trash cans - � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � R A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � � B. LEED Submittals: � � � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation � indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. � � Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � � � � C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each � accessory required. � 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. � ' 2. Identify products using designations indicated. � � D. Shop Drawings: For pedestal benches. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and � 1 attachments to other work. �' � E. Samples: For pedestal benches. � � � F. Maintenance data. _ � � � ' G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. � � � ' � TOILET, BATH,AND LALJNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800- 1 � ' r: � � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or � workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Pedestal Benches: Provide manufacturer's twenty year warranty against rust, delamination or � breakage of plastic components. � PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM AND PRNATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES � A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated � or comparable product by one of the following: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc. � 2. American Specialties,Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Ina 4. Bradley Corporation. � 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing,Ina B. Toilet Tissue(Roll)Dispenser TA1: Supplied by Owner, installed by Contractor. � C. Paper Towel Dispenser TA2: Supplied by Owner, installed by Contractor. D. Grab Bar TA3: � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 812-2 series. � 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel,O.US inch(].3 mm)thick. a. Finish: Smooth,No.4 finish(satin)on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. � 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1J2 inches(38 mm). � 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. � � TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORI�S 102800 -2 � �. I , � � � � E. Mirror Unit TA4: ' � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 780. � 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm)thick. � ' ' a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. ' 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. . � a. One- iece alvanized-steel wall-han er device with s rin -action lockin � , P , g , g P g g mec hanism to ho l d mirror uni t in posi tion wi t h no expose d screws or bo l ts. � b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices � , requiring a special tool to remove. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. � ' � F. Towel Bar TAS: � � � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 908. � 2. Description: 1 inch-round tube with circulaz end brackets. � 3. Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners. � 4. Length: 24 inches ' S. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No. 4 finish(satin). G. Shower Curtain Rod TA6: � , � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9539. � 2. Description: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) ' thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for concealed fasteners. � 4. Finish: No.4 (satin). � ' H. Shower Curtain TA6: � � ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradiey 9537. � 2. Size: Minimum 12 inches(305 mm}wider than opening by 72 inches(1828 mm)high. � 3. Material: Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10 oz. (284 g) or 0.008-inch- (U.2-mm-) thick vinyl,with integral antibacterial agent. � , 4. Color: White. � 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches(152 mm)o.c. through top hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with � , snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain � grommet. � � ' � � F ' � � TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-3 ' � � I. Plastic Bench TA8: l. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley � Corporation,Lenoa�Pedestal or comparable, approved substitution. 2. Manufactured Units: � a. Model LENOXPEDSTAL pedestal bench, 20 inch (508 mm) high x 9 1/2 inch (241 mm)wide x 36 inch(914 mm) long. 3. Components: � 4. Pedestal bench: Top fabricated from 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) thick HDPE, pedestals 18 '/z inch(470 mm)black anodized aluminum with welded aluminum flanges. � 5. Hardware and Accessories � a. Provide hardware for attaching bench top to pedestals and anchoring pedestals to floor. J. Folding Shower Seat TA10: � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9562. � 2. Configuration: Rectangular seat. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Architect. � 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin). 5. Dimensions: 28 1/2"W x 15"D. K. Robe Hook TA 1 L• � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9124. 2. Description: Double-prong unit. � 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No. 4 finish(satin). L. Towel Ring TA 12: � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9334. 2. Description: Square towel ring � 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No. 4 finish(satin). � � � � TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 -4 � i t � � � � ..i ' 2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS ` A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � ' , products that may be incorporated into the Wark include,but are not limited to,the following: � � 1. Plumberex Specialty Products,Inc. � ' 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. � � B. Underlavatory Guard TA13: � � 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent � direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing � coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial,molded plastic,white. ' 23 CUSTODIAL AND UTILITY ACCESSORIES � ' � A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated � or comparable product by one of the following: � ; � 1. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc. � 2. American Specialties,Inc. � 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. � ' 4. Bradley Corporation. � 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. � 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Ina � � B. Utility Shelf TA 14: � 1. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) and � ' supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. � 2. Size: 16 inches(406 mm) long by 6 inches(l 52 mm}deep � 3. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel, ' No. 4 finish(satin). � C. Mop and Broom Holder TA7: � ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9953. � 2. Description: Unit with holders. ' 3. Length: 36 inches(914 mm). 4. MopBroom Holders: Four, spring-loaded,rubber hat,cam type. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No. 4 finish(satin). . �: ' D. Robe Hook(Apparatus Bay)TA15: � 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9134. � , 2. Description: Double-prong unit. � 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No. 4 finish(satin). � � � � ' � TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-5 � ' � � � ; 2.4 FABRICATION � A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. � B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 25U lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. � C. Fixed Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than '72 inches(1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench � tops,and anchor bases to floor. 3.2 SCHEDULE � A. Toilet 1T2 & 1T3 Accessory Amount TA1 1 TA2 1 � TA3 (42 inch) 1 TA3 (36 inch) 1 TA3 (18 inch) 1 � TA4 1 • TA6 1 TA7 1 � B. Copy 106 Accessory Amount TA2 1 � C. Bio Decon 121 Accessory Amount TA2 1 � D. Bays 123 Accessory Amount TA 15 8(coordinate location with Owner) TA7 2 (coordinate location with Owner) � E. Toilets 2T1,2T2, 2T3 Accessory Amount 2T5, 2T6 TA1 1 � TA4 1 TAS 1 TA6 1 � TA8 1 TA11 1 � TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-6 � €. I � ' � � Fgq� 3 i ' F. Toilets 2T4 Accessory Amount � TA1 1 � TA3 (42 inch) 1 '; ' TA3 (36 inch) 1 � TA3 (18 inch) 1 � TA4 1 �. ,,I ' TAS 1 � TA6 1 TA10 1 � ' TA 11 1 �: TA13 1 � G. Laundries 215 &256 Accessory Amount � ' TA2 1 � � � � , H. Bedrooms 250,251 Accessory Amount � 252, 253 TA4 1 TA11 1 �' ' TA12 1 � I. Bedrooms 200,201,202, 206, 207,208, 209, 211,214, 216,217,218 � ' Accessory Amount � TA12 1 � ; � �' J. Janrtor 203,Bio Dcon 121 Accessory Amount _ � TA7 1 TA14 1 � ' TA15 1 � � END OF SECTION 102800 � ' � ' � , � � f � , � � ' � ¢ � € ' �. � � ' � ' TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-7 i � ' , � SECTION 104413 -FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS � ' PART 1 -GENERAL : ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � � A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. � ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' A. Product Data: For each e of roduct indicated. h'P P ' B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and � attachments to other work. � � C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. � ' � D. Maintenance data. � ' � PART 2-PRODUCTS � ' 2.1 MATERIALS � � ' A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,Commercial Steel(CS),Type B. � B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, � , Class 1 (clear). 2.2 FIltE PROTECTION CABINET FE ' A. Cabinet T e: Suitable for fire extin isher. � YP � � ' 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be � mcorporated mto the Work mclude,but are not hmrted to,the followmg: � � � ' a. J. L. Industries,Inc.,a division of Activar Construction Products Group � b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc � a Larsen's Manufacturing Company � ' � � � � ' � � , � ' FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1 � � � B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from � 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/$-inch- (16- mm-)thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. � C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. D. Semi recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style � of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). � Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semi recessed cabinet installation. 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 4-inch (1 U2-mm)backbend depth. � E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. � F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. � H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass(clear). I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet � type,trim style, and door material and style indicated. J. Finishes: � 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: � a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. � b. Interior of cabinet. 2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � 2.3 FABRICATION � A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, � and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth. � � FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 -2 � � ' � � , � � � , ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � � ' � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi recessed � ' cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim � style. � ' B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, � at heights acceptable to anthorities having jurisdiction. g' C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. � ' � D. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. � ' � E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful � repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. � ' END OF SECTION 104413 ' ' � r � ' � � � ' � � ' � � � ' � � ' � � P' � , € � � � t t ' � � FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 -3 � ' � ' # � , � SECTION 104416-FIRE EXTINGUISHERS � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ; ' 1.1 SUMMARY � € ' A. Section includes portable,hand-carried fire extinguishers. g � 1.2 SUBMI'TTALS � , � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � ' B. Operation and maintenance data. � � C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. � ' � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ; ' � A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable �' Fire Extinguishers." � t ' �. B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � �. � C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and � ' function. � � ' � 1.4 WARRANTY � � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � ' replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty � period. � 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: � , � a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. � ' b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. � 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. � � ' � � � � , � � � � , � � FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416- 1 � ' � � � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 PORTABLE,HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS � A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size,and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: � a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection;a Kidde company. � d. J.L. Industries,Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. e. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. £ Larsen's Manufacturing Company. � 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. � B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type FE: UL-rated 10 pound nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 31 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. � 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. ir extin ishers in locations indicated and in com liance with re uirements of � ' B. Install f e gu p q authorities having jurisdiction. � END OF SECTION 104416 � � � � � FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 -2 � ' ' � SECTION 105112—FIREFIGHTER LOCKERS � , PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS � ' � 1.2 SLTMMARY A. Wall mounted and freestanding storage fire fighting systems ' � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � ' A. Product Data, Shop Drawings,maintenance data,and color charts for applied fmishes. � , 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Provide standard manufacturer's written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by � ' manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship for the period of 10 years. . � , PART 2-PRODUCTS � ' 2.1 MATERIALS � � ' A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. �. � B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing,ASTM A 500. ' 2.2 PRODUCTS � , A. Basis-of-Design Product: Groves Incorporated 4071 W. Albany Street, McHenry, IL 60050, 1- 800-001-2120; Red Rack by Ready Rack; Wall mount lockers and freestanding double sided units (sets of six and sets of four to match layout indicated on drawings) or a comparable ' product by one of the following: � 1. Gear Grid ' , � t , � � ' � � � FIltEFIGHTER LOCKERS 105112- 1 � , � � 2. Wall Mount and freestanding lockers(accessories listed below) � a. Size: 24"wide,20"Depth,by 72"tall unit. b. Hooks: Two(2)hooks per unit c. Nameplate and holder � d. Glove drying hanger e. Coat drying hanger f. Horizontal hanging rod � g. Two(2)hanging hooks for bunker pants h. Helmet Shelf i. Boot Shelf � 23 CONSTRUCTION A. Each rack section consists of: � 1. One 1.25"sq.tube all welded back frame 2. Two divider panels made of 1.25" round steel tubing with .25" steel welded wire � diagonal grid panel 3. One each helmet and boot shelves, consisting of four .25" dia. support wires, matt wires are .25" dia. steel wire 1" apart and one three .25" dia. bridge truss style front snake for � optimum strength 4. Mounted to wall with 11 ga. Steel wall mount clips. 2.4 FINISHES � A. Steel Finishes: Powder Coat � B. Color: Red . � PART 3 -EXECUTION 31 INSTALLATION � A. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels and anchor � securely in place. B. Fasten wall-mounted lockers securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural � movement. Install with concealed fasteners,unless otherwise indicated. C. Repair, refinish, or replace finishes damaged during installation. � D. Adjust operating parts and hardware for smooth, quiet operation. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. � END OF SECTION 105112 � FIlZEFIGHTER LOCKERS 105112-2 ' ' � , � z` , SECTION 105500-POSTAL SPECIALTIES � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � ' � l.l SIJMMARY � ' A. Section Includes: � 1. USPS-approved cluster box units(CBUs). � � ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � B. Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and � � attachments to other work. � , � C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. � � ' D. Product certificates, including written approval by Postmaster General. � E. Maintenance data. � � ' F. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal � specialties to be served by USPS. � � � � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � ' A. Source Limitations for Each Type of Postal Specialty: For USPS-approved products, use only � those included on current lists of USPS manufacturers and models. � �. i � 1.4 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � � A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of � ' each corresponding lock and key number. � ' 1.5 WARRANTY � � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or � replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within Five years � , from date of Substantial Completion. � � � ' � � E � ' POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500- 1 ' , � � ' � SECTION 107500-FLAGPOLES �: ' � PARTI -GENERAL � � � ' l.l SUMMARY � � , A. Section includes ground-mounted aluminum flagpoles. , 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, mcluding anchorages and supports, shall � withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and , ' under conditions indicated according to the following design criteria: � � � ' 1. Wind Loads: 90 mph, Exposure B accarding to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide ` Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles.". � 2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maaLimum standard size suitable for use with flagpole. � ' � � 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each e of roduct indicated. � tYP P � ' B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For flagpole assemblies indicated to comply with performance �' requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. ' . 1. Include loads, point reactions, and locations for attachment of flagpoles to building's � t structure. ' � C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance � manuals. _ � ' �_ PART 2-PRODUCTS �. � ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � � € , A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering �: products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: � � ' � � � � FLAGPOLES 107500- 1 ' � � � � 1. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company. � 2. Atlantic Fiberglass Products,Ina 3. Baartol Company. 4. Concord Industries, Inc. � 5. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Ewing Flagpoles. 7. Lingo Inc.;Acme Flagpole Company Division. � 8. Millerbernd Manufacturing Company. 9. Morgan-Francis; Division of Original Tractor Cab Co., Inc. 10. PLP Composite Technologies,Inc. � 11. Pole-Tech Company Inc. 12. U.S.Flag&Flagpole Supply,LP. 13. USS Manufacturing Inc. � 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Exposed Height: 35 feet(11 m). � B. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing � complying with ASTM B 2418 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). C. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube,not less than � 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize steel after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at � top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. D. Cast-Metal Shoe Base: For anchor-bolt mounting;provide with anchor bolts. � E. Flagpole Light: The Flagpole Beacon as manufactured by The Flag Company Inc. ORN FPB- � IH-6.5-D-1 IOV. Flagpole beacon for internal halyard, 35 foot pole in size as indicated or, if not indicated,to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. Lamps: Low voltage halogen SOW bulbs,MR-16 � a. Volts: l2 b. Light Color: White c. Rated: 10,000 hours � � 2. Revolves fu11359 degrees. 3. Transformer: Dual Primary 115/230 VAC 4. 35',Electrical wire, 12/3 F. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and � removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. � Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. ' FLAGPOLES 107500 -2 , , ' G. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two swivel snap hooks per halyard. � � ' 23 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining,noncorrosive, nongaseous grout € ' com 1 m with ASTM C 1107. � P Y� g � B. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. , � : ' C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." � ' � 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES � , � � A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611 or thicker. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � ' � ' 3.1 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION � A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's , written instructions. B. Ground Set: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during � concreting. Install flagpole, plumb, in foundation tube. Place tube seated on bottom plate � , between steel centering wedges and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place � and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-in.ch (50-mm) layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. , � C. Baseplate: Cast anchor bolts in concrete foundation. Install baseplate on washers placed over � leveling nuts on anchor bolts and adjust until flagpole is plumb. After flagpole is plumb,tighten ' retaining nuts and fill space under baseplate solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. Finish exposed grout surfaces smooth and slope 45 degrees away from edges of baseplate. ' END OF SECTION 107500 � t � � � ' � i � � Y � � , � � FLAGPOLES 107500-3 , � , ' � � SECTION 114000- STAINLESS STEEL COLJNTERTOPS � , PART1 -GENERAL � � ' , 1.1 SUMMARY � � , A. Section includes stainless steel countertops � B. See Division l, Section "Alternates". � � ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ', ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated countertops. Include plans, details and attachments to other , work. � PART2-PRODUCTS � ' � � 2.1 FABRICATED COUNTERTOPS ' � A. Stainless-Steel Countertops: � . � ;,; , 1. Description: Flat-countertop. � � a. Tops: Stainless steel, Type 304,0.062 inch (1..59 mm). ', , 1) Back Splash: 5 inches (127 mmj. 4 2) Edge: Marine edge. � ; , 2. Materials: a. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, type as � , ' indicated. � �sg 4 �3. Fabrication: Prepare countertop for installation of the following equipment items: Y � � a. Trash rings. � 4. Stainless-Steel Finish: Directional satin finish,No.4. � � � { � , � � r i , � � STAINLESS STEEL COLTNTERTOPS 114000- 1 � ' � � � � 2.2 FINISHES � A. Stainless-Steel Finishes: � 1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines,or blend into finish. : 2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. � a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded � foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Install countertops level and plumb. 1. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed. � B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required. 1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler. � 2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment until smooth and polish to match adjacent � finish. � � 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING � A. After completing installation of countertops,repair damaged finishes. B. Clean and adjust countertops as required to produce ready-for-use condition. � C. Protect countertops from damage during remainder of the construction period. � END OF SECTION 114000 � � � � STAINLESS STEEL COLTNTERTOPS 114000 -2 ' � , � - - � � ' � SECTION 115213 -PROJECTION SCREENS � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � � ' 1.1 SUMMARY � t � ' ' A. Section Includes: � � � t l. Electrically operated projection screens and controls. � , � B. Related Sections: . � � , ' � 1. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections including device boxes for �: switches and conduit,where required,for low-volta.ge control wiring. � ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � ;; ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � �: B. Shop Drawings: For projection screens. Show layouts and types of projection screens. Include � ' the following: � � 1. For electrically operated projection screens and controls: � ' � a. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. _ b. Location of wiring connections. � c. Location of seams in viewing surfaces. � ' ' d. Anchorage details. � e. Wiring diagrams. � ' � PART2-PRODUCTS � � , ` 2.1 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS � � t ' A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting � accessories,and other components necessary for a complete installation. � € � ; ' 1. Controls: Remote,three-position control switch. � ; 2. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, ; automatic thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches, and positive-stop action to � ' prevent coasting. � � � ' � , � � PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 1 `_, � a ' i ; � � 3. End-Mounted Motor: Instant-reversing, gear-drive motor with permanently lubricated � ball bearings, automatic thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches, and positive- stop action to prevent coasting. 4. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as braided � polyester, on each side of screen connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull screen flat horizontally. B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens without Ceiling Closure: Motor-in-roller or end- � mounted motor units with bottom of case entirely or partially open under screen compartment. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: � a. Motor in Roller: 1) BEI Audio-Visual Products;Alpine XL. 2) Da-Lite Screen Company;Advantage Electrol � 3) Draper Inc.; Paragon. 4) Stewart Filmscreen Corporation;Model A-B. b. End-Mounted Motor: � 1) Da-Lite Screen Company; Senior Electrol. 2) Draper Inc.; Rolleramic. 2. Provide screen case with trim flange to receive ceiling finish. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN INSTALLATION � A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions. � B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a � smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered. 1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's � written instructions. a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces and � in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use ITL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfmished spaces. � 2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. � END OF SECTION 115213 � � PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 -2 , � , s � � , � SECTION 122113 -HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS € � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' l.l SUMMARY � � , A. This Section includes the following: � � 1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. � � ' � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � , ' � B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. � ' ' C. Samples: For each exposed finish. � � D. Maintenance data. � ' � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ,, , � A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated '! , below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting � agency. � , ' t 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. � t B. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. � ; ' � C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to � demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. P ., ' � 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of r Substantial Completion. � ' � � PART2-PRODUCTS � ' i � � 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS,ALUMINUM SLATS z B � " , A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide product specified. � � 1. Hunter pouglas; Celebrity series,horizontal aluminum louver blinds ' £ � HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 1 � , � � B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish � indicated;with crowned profile and radiused corners. 1. Width: 1 inch (25 mm). � 2. Finish: One color. a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic,dust-repellent,baked polyester finish. � C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs. � D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-alummum tube,with plastic or metal capped ends. E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. � 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch (25 mm)or Less: Braided string. F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard. � ; G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod. � H. Lift Operation: Manual. I. Mounting: Ceiling mounting. � J. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. K. Colors,Textures,Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION � A. Concealed Components: Nonconodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. � B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows: � 1. Blind Units Installed between (inside)Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6�nm)per side or 1/2 inch (l3 mm) total, plus or minus l/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than jamb-to jamb � dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to l/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm}, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. � C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method � indicated. D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to � supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. � HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 -2 i � , � � � ; , E. Color-Coated Finish: � � 1. Metal: For components exposed to view,apply manufacturer's standard baked finish. . � ' � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � ' � 3.1 EXAMINATION � ! ' A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting � performance. � ; ' . l. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � � ' � 3.2 INSTALLATION � ; ' A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to � manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not � closer than 2 inches(51 mm)to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to ' prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. ' � B. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. � i; ' � C. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or � malfunction throughout entire operational range. � ' ' � D. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written � instructions. � ' � END OF SECTION 122113 � ' � � t � � ' � ' � � c � t s � , � z � $ , ' � � HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 -3 � , ' � � ' �' � ' SECTION 122413 -ROLLER WINDOW SHADES � ` ' PART 1 -GENERAL � � �' � I 1.1 SUMMARY � � � a ' ' A. This Section includes roller shades for window type J. � � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � 'k ' � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � ' B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation, operational clearances,and relationship to adjoining Work. � � ' l. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. � � C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted � , items. � � � D. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required. ` ` ' E. Maintenance data. � � t ' � 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE � �'' ' A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. � B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products passing flame-resistance testing � according to NFPA 701 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � � ' C. Com 1 with WCMA A 100.1. � PY � ' � � 1.4 WARRANTY � s � '; ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or ' replace roller shades and fabric that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty � € period. � - , � l. Warranty Period: � � a. Shade system: Twenty-five year non-depreciating warranty from date of = ' Substantial Completion. � b. Fabric: Twenty-five years from date of Substantial Completion. � � ' � � ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1 � , � � � � PART 2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 ROLLER SHADES � A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MechoShade ' Systems Mecho/5 or a comparable substitution approved by the Architect. � B. Shade Band MateriaL• l. MechoShade Equinox 0100 Series woven fiberglass. � a. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range b. Material Solar-Optical Properties: 0%open C. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and � wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets. Provide capacity for one roller shade band(s)per roller. � D. Direction of Roll: Regular,from back of roller E. Mounting Brackets: Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox. � : F. Pocket with Ceiling Slot Opening: Six-sided box units for recessed installation; fabricated from � formed-steel sheet, extruded aluminum, or wood; with a bottom consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow lowering and raising of shade and a removable or an openable, continuous metal access panel concealing rollers, brackets, and operating hardware and operators within. � G. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. Provide concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal-type. � H. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling pocket. I. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and � bracket lift operator. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION � A. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, � measured at 74 deg F(23 deg C): 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch (6 � mm)from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. B. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting � fascia, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. � � ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 -2 ' � ' � � � � � ' C. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal � noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to � ' supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION �; ' 3 3.1 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION � A. Install roller shades level lumb and ali ed with ad'acent units accordin to manufacturer's � I , p , � J g written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm)to interior � face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. � , ' � B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or � malfunction throughout entire operational range. � , � C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation,according to manufacturer's written instructions. , END OF SECTION 122413 � � � ' � � � ' � � � � � , � � � � ' � � � , � � � ,, � � � fr � � i � � � ; � � 1 = � � � � � 1 � � � k � ' 3 � � ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 -3 � , �@ `a 1 � , �: � , � SECTION 141010—ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS � �: , � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. This Section includes Electric Chain Hoists. � � � ' , 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Speed: 16 ft/min. � �: B. Reeving: One � ' C. Power: 230/460-3-60 � ; � D. Lifting Range: 30 feet. � � E. Capacity: 1/4 Ton � � � � 1.3 SUBMITTALS � ' A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, controls, finishes, and similar information. ' B. Shop Drawings: Show attachment to structure. � C. Maintenance data. � , � � � PART2 -PRODUCTS � , � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � `- ' � A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: � � � ' � 1. Columbus McKinnon Corporation—Loadstar XL Hook Suspension � � ' � � � ' � � � � ' � � ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS 141010- 1 � ' � � � � 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS � A. Control System: Provide manufacturer's standard � l. Pendant Control: Provide manufacturer's standard pendant mounted NEMA 4 control station. a. Pendant Length: 6 foot. � 2. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push- button controls labeled "Up," "Down," and "Stop." B. Slack Chain Storage: Metal chain container. � C. Trolley: 1/4 ton,dual tread plain trolley,Coffing CTA model or equal. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Attach hoist to building structure and hose rack to hoist as recommended by hoist manufacturer. � END OF SECTION 141010 � � � � � , � � � � � ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS 141010-2 ' � t � � � SECTION 142400-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS • t � PART 1 -GENERAL � � '� ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. � ' f B. See Division 09 Section"096813 Tile Carpeting"for fmish flooring in elevator cars. t 1.2 SUBMTTTALS � '' ' A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and � similar uiformation. ��!' ' B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified � ' requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of � support, and maximum and average power demands. � � � C. Samples: For exposed fmishes. � ' � D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and � machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown ' , and specified,are adequate for elevator system being provided. � [ E. Operation and maintenance data. � : 1 F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities � having jurisdiction for normal,unrestricted elevator use. � � ' � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1 and elevator design requirements for � earthquake loads in ASCE 7f. � � , , 1. Effective pealc velociTy acceleration (Av) for Project's location is less than 0.10 (seismic � risk zones 0 and 1). � 2. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period(Sds)for Project is 0.230. ° 3. Project's seismic design category is C. t `: ' € 4. Elevator importance factor is 1.0. � B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & � ;, ' Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)."and 407 in ICC A117.1. � � , � i HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400- 1 � ' i � � � 1.4 WARRANTY � A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair,restore,or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. � 1. Warranty Period: One yeaz from date of Substantial Completion. � 1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service; Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year full � maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for hydraulic elevators is based on ThyssenKrupp Elevator model AMEE 21 HLS -Plan II. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the named product or a comarable product by one of the following: � 1. KONE Ina 2. Otis Elevator Ca 3. Schindler Elevator Corp. � 2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS � A. General: Provide manufacturer's standazd elevator systems, including standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as � required for complete system. B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no � load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following: 1. Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime- painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch-(25-mrn-)thick,glass-fiber insulation board. � 2. Submersible pump, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with solid-state starting. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a � blowout-proof housing at pump unit. D. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable,fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil � with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment. � 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Ina � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS � 142400-2 ' � � , f � F � � , ' E. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and � counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymer- coated,nonlubricated guides. � ' � 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS � :'� , � A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated. � ' B. Fire-fighter's Emergency Operation: Provide Phase I emergency recall operation and Phase II � emergency in-car operation in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. � ' � 2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES � e� � ;;; ' A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more � e microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of � one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. � , ' � B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, � f a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. � ' � 2.5 FINISH MATERIALS � A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M commercial steel T e B ex osed. � ' , , YP � P � � B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1O11M,commercial steel,Type B, pickled. � '` ' C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M,Type 304. � � � ' D. Stainless-Stee1 Tubing: ASTM A 554,Grade MT 304. � � E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (AST�t B 221�,Alloy 6063. f : ' F. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3,Type HGS or HGL. � � � � ' 2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES " � A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof, � , access doors,power door operators,and ventilation. � � � 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by � ', ' ASME A17.1. � 2. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels, Front Walls (Return Panels): Flush, hollow-metal construction. � `,`, t 3. Plastio-Laminate Wall Panels, Side and Rear Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied i to manufacturer's standazd core with manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. � Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate � manufacturer's full range. � ' � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-3 � , � i , ! � 4. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal constrEtction; fabricated from cold-rolled � steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Sills: Extruded aluminum,with grooved surface, 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)thick. � 6. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. � 2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding; door-arid-frame hoistway � entrances complete with track systems,hardware,sills,and accessories. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards,but not less than the following: � 1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full � range. 2. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect � from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sills: Extruded aluminum,with grooved surface, 1/4 inch(6.�4 mm)thick. 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, � nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. C. Smoke Seals: Provide Elevator Smoke Brush Seals as manufaetured by Precision Brush � Gompany or�q�. (A�ldendum#1 j 2.8 SIGNAL EQUII'MENT � A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or � other permanent,nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs. B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in return � panel adjacent to car door,unless otherwise indicated. C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the � U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilrties (ADAAG)." On act�vation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset � and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use,and battery backup power supply. � � � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-4 � � ' � � �' ' � � � , D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated,digital-type car position indicator, located above � car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that � car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. � ' . � 1. Include-travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. � � ' E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. � F. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with � ' text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. � � �: 2.9 ELEVATORS � ' � A. Elevator Description: � 1. Rated�,oad: 21 OO lb(933 kg). � � , ' 2. Rated Speed: 75 or 80 fpm(038 or O.�l m�s). � 3. Operation System: Single automatic operation. 4. Auxiliary Operations: � ' a. Standby power operation. � b. Standby-powered lowermg. c. Battery-powered lowering. � ; ' d. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. � e. Nuisance call canceL � f. Loaded-car bypass. � , � 5. Car Enclosures: � � ' ' a. Inside Width: 68 inches(1727 mm)from side wall to side wall. � b. Inside Depth: 51 inches(1�95 mm�rom back wall to front wall(return panels). � c. Inside Height: 94 inches(�388 mm)to underside of ceiling. _' d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car � ' door frames. � e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel,No. 4 finish. � .q ' f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Door Faces(Interior): Enameled steel. � � h. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)round satin stainless steel, No.4 finish, at sides z , and rear of car. � i. Floor prepared to receive carpet (specified in Division 09 Section "Tile � Carpeting"). � € ';, , � 6. Hoistway Entrances: � � a. Width: 36 inches(91�mm). � ' b. Height: 84 inches(213�mm). � c. Type: Single-speed side sliding. � } d. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours. ` ' � � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-5 ; ' 3 ! � � e. Frames at all Floors: Enameled steeL � f. Doors at all Floors: Enameled steel. 7: Hall Fixtures at all Floors: Satin stainless steel,No.4 finish. � 8. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame � made from satin stainless steel,No.4 finish. b. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s)of full-height protective blankets. ` � PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor � securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. B. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch(6 mm� up or down,regardless of load and direction of travel. � C. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, � nonmetallic grout. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended � by ASME A 17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. 3.3 PROTECTION � A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: � l. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car,to protect finishes from damage. � 2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. � 4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit,or provide new units as required. � � � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-6 t � � ' � � � . � ' � 3.4 DEMONSTRATION � � A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to � ,; ' operate,adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division O1 Section "Demonstration and Training." ' �END OF SECTION 142400 � ' � � � t � � t � t ' � � # ' _ � � � � � � � � ' ; � � � € � ' � � 3 3 � ' � S 1 � . � ' � � ' $ � � 1 � � � ' y' � S ' � � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-7 � 1 � � � � ' � � ' � � SECTION 311000- SITE CLEARING '" �: ti � PARTl -GENERAL € ti F � , € 1.1 SUMMARY � � � , A. Section Includes: � � 1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. � 2. Removing existing vegetation. � ' 3. Clearing and grubbing. � 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. � 5. Removing above-and below-grade site improvements. � ' ' 6. Disconnecting,capping or sealing site utilities. ; 7. Temporary erosion-and sedimentation-control measures. � � r , � 1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP � � � A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain � ; ' Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed � from Project site. � , � 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS = > ' A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets,walks, and other adjacent occupied �' or used facilities during site-clearing operations. � 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities € , ' without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. � 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or � '! ' authorities ha�ing jurisdiction. � B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Pro�ect is located before � site clearing. � : ' � C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation- � control and plant-protection measures are in place. E , � � ; � � 4 , � € � ' } � g , � e § SITE CLEARING 311000- 1 � ' F i � � � � D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: � 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. � 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. � PART 2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in � Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not � available on-site. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 PREPARATION � A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during � construction. B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs,and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. � 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIlVIENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and � discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities � having jurisdiction. B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. � C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. � � SITE CLEARING 311000-2 � � ' � � � ' D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during � removal. � , t 3 3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION � � � ' A. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are � damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. � � , 3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES �. A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in � ' ' place. � � 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. � , ' � B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or E; others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide � '!; ' temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: � 1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without utility companies permission. � � C. Removal of underground utilities is indicated on civil engineering drawings. � , � { � 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING � ' , A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new � construction. � ' � l. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches ° (450 mm)below exposed subgrade. � ': ' 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. � � B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material � unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. � . ' � 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of$ inches (200 mm), ; and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. ! ' � � 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING � , � A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. � � B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste � , materials. � C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and � t shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. � � � , C � SITE CLEARING 311000-3 � , � � I � 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS � A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction. � 3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS � A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris,and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Se arate rec clable materials roduced durin site clearin from other nonrec clable materials. � ' P Y P g g Y Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work. � END OF SECTION 311000 � � � � � � � � � � � � SITE CLEARING 311000-4 ' � ' � � � ' � SECTION 312000-EARTH MOVING � � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � , A. Section Includes: � , � " 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade,walks, pavements,turf and grasses,and plants. � 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. � ' 3. Drainage course for subdrainage systems � 4. Subbase course and base course for asphalt and concrete paving. � ' S. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. � � �: P 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS � ' � A. Geotechnical Engineering Report for Proposed West Vail Fire Station, 2399 North Frontage � Road West, Vail, Colorado as prepared by Koechlein Consulting Engineers; Ina Job No. 09- � , 033. € � �, � � ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS � � A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. � � � ' 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to � support sides of pipe. � 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. � � B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt and � concrete paving. � ' � C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying � pipe. � , �: D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. � t � ' E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer surrounding subdrainage piping. �' � F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and � dimensions indicated. � ' � 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond � indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional � ' excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for � changes in the Work. � � i � , �4 #, � ` EARTH MOVING 312000- 1 � � � � � 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated � lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation,as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. � H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical � and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill � immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground � services within buildings. 1.4 UALITY ASSURANCE � Q A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utihty locator service for area where Pro�ect is located before beginning earth moving operations. . � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 SOII.,MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not � available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Non- to low-expansive on-site or imported material approved by the � Owner's soils engineer. free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Imported materials shall consist of non-expansive silty or clayey snads or gravels with up to 30 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and a maximum plasticity index of 10. No cobbles � or boulders larger than 10 inches should be placed in fill areas. C. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed � stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)sieve. D. Borrow Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, � crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand as approved by the Owner's soils engineer. E. Engineered Fill: Existing on-site fill material removed from building footprint, moisture � conditioned and recompacted to specifications of the Owner's soils engineer. � EARTH MOVING 312000 -2 ' � , � � � s � ' � F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed �: stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch � (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm) sieve. � ' � G. Drainage Course: Washed 1.5 inch to No. 4 gravel with less than 3%passing the No. 200 sieve. � � , a. 2.2 ACCESSORIES � r � A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for ' markin and identi in under ound utilities, 6 inches (15U mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) � g fY g �' � thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local � ' ' practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � � B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape � manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (]50 � �i � , ' mm) wide and 4 mil.s (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal ';, ' detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (75U mm) deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � i � i E PART 3 -EXECUTION ' ' i � i 3.1 PREPARATION , A. Comply with "Site Preparation"recommendations in the Earthwork section of the Geotechnical � Engineering Report. €: ; B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by � settlement, lateral movement, undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earth moving � � ' operations. � C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations. I �f D. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove � temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. � k , � 3.2 EXCAVATION,GENERAL � � ' , A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface � and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil � � materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be � � ' authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. � � 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials � � , and rock,replace with satisfactory soil materials. � � � , � € � EARTH MOVING 312000-3 � } ' � � � � 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES � A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and � removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. � Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. B. Excavations at Edges of Tree-and Plant-Protection Zones: � 1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop � exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips,tears,or pulls roots. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS � A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and � subgrades. B. Subgrade soils beneath exterior slabs and beneath pavements shall be over-excavated, moisture � conditioned and re-compacted to a minimum depth of 3 feet. The moisture content and compaction of subgrade soils should be maintained until slab or pavement construction. ; � 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES , A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines,depths,and elevations. � B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher � than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: l 2 inches(300 mm)each side of pipe or conduit. � C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp � objects along trench subgrade. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other � unyielding bearing material, 4 inches (l 00 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course. D. Trenches in Tree-and Plant-Protection Zones: � 1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow- � tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips,tears, or pulls roots. � EARTH MOVING 312000-4 � S. � , � � � , � 2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with � installation of utilities. � ' 3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division O1 Section "Temporary Tree � and Plant Protection." � � � ' , 3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION � � A. Proof-roll subgrade below the apparatus bay slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump � ' truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated � subgades. � B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or � ' construction activities, as directed by Architect,without additional compensation. � � ', � 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION � � k A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation � of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean ° ' ' concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when � approved by Architect. � � � i 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by � Architect. � ' � j 3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS �' � I ' A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. �' Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. �' � ', ' 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of � � remaining trees. � ��,� � �� ; 3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL � ; � ; ' A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow,or ice. � � B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding � � course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, � � , fittings, and bodies of conduits. � � C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches(450 � mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of � ( ' footin s. Concrete is s ecified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." �' � g p � � , , � I � i ' t i � � ! EARTH MOVING 312000- 5 � E ' 7 � � � � D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for � piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm)below surface of roadways. After installing and : testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (l 00 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Division 03 � Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" E. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 � mm) in any dimension,to a height of 12 inches(300 mm)over the pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage ar displacement of � piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. � G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (30U mm)below finished grade, except 6 inches(150 mm)below subgrade under pavements and slabs. � 3.10 SOIL FILL � A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and com act fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: � P 1. Under grass and planted areas,use satisfactory soil material. � 2. Under walks and pavements,use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps,use engineered fi1L 4. Under building slabs,use engineered fi1L � 5. Under footings and foundations,use engineered fill. 3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL � A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. � 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. � 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. � � � EARTH MOVING 312000 -6 ' � I - �' � � ' � � � � ' I �: 3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS � � ' A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth � for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (]00 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. � , � B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and � uniformly along the full length of each structure. � � ' C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight � according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557: � 1. Under structures scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and ; ' each layer of backfill or fill soil material at: � a. ASTM D-698- 98 percent. � b. ASTM D-1557-95 percent. � ' 2. Under building slabs scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at: � a. ASTM D-698-95 percent. � t ' b. ASTM D-1557-90 percent �` 3. Under steps and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing � subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at: � a. ASTM D-698-95 percent(AASHTO T99) �- ' b. ASTM D-1557-90 percent(AASHTO T180) k 4. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches {150 mm) below subgrade and � compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at � a. ASTM D-698-95 percent. , b. ASTM D-1557-90 percent. � 5. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (15U mm) below � � subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at: � a. ASTM D-698-90 percent. � b. ASTM D-1557-90 percent. � ' 6. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at: a. ASTM D-698- 95 percent. � b. ASTM D-1557-90 percent. � ' � 3.13 GRADING � � ' A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply � with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines,and elevations indicated. � I � B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. � Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: �; i 1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm}. � � 2. Walks: Plus or minus l inch (25 mm). � 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). � ' C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (l 3 mn�)when tested � with a 10-foot(3-m}straightedge. � ' € �; � EARTH MOVING 312000 -7 � , � � � 3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS � A. Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow,or ice. B. On prepared subgrade,place base course under asphalt and concrete pavements as follows: � 1. Shape base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. � 2. Place base course that exceeds 6 inches (]50 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm)thick or less than 3 inches(75 mm)thick. � 3. Compact base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 98 percent(AASHTO T99) of ma�cimum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 or 95 percent(AASHTO T180)of manximum dry unit � weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . � A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. � B. Allow testing agency to observe foundation excavation and overexcavation operations for determination of soil and/or bedrock conditions that differ from those anticipated. � C. Allow testing agency to observe proof rolling of pavement subgrades. D. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with � subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. E. Allow testing agency to inspect subgrades prior to placement of concrete paving and interior � slabs-on-grade. F. Allow testing agency to provide full-time observation and compaction testing of trench backfill � within building and pavement areas. G. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed � to verify design beazing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing � subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. � H. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to � depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. � � � EARTH MOVING 312000- 8 ' � � � � � ' � � � � ' � 3.16 PROTECTION � � � ' A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep � free of trash and debris. � : B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed � i ' surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. � i� � � ' C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, � ! backfill with additional soil material, compact,and reconstruct surfacing. �. EI , � 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, � ' and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. � ( � ' � ! 3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS � I � ' � A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and � i debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. � i € ' � END OF SECTION 312000 � I I � i ' �. ( ° � � � I g � � � ' � g r r � � E � � ' � � � � ' , ; � � ` , , € C � � � � � ' � EARTH MOVING 312000 -9 � t , � � � i � � 1 � 1 SECTION 321216-ASPHALT PAVING � ' � PART 1 -GENERAL � � ' � 3 1.1 SUNIlVIARY � A. Section Includes: � � � s e 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. � ' 2. Pavement-marking paint. � B. Related Sections: � ' 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate base courses. � 2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at � paving terminations. �: ' � 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS � ' � A. Geotechnical Engineering Report for Proposed West Vail Fire Station, 2399 North Frontage � Road West, Vail, Colorado as prepared by Koechlein Consulting Engineers, Inc. Job No. 09- � ' 033. � 13 SUBMITTALS � � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical � and performance properties. � � 1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each � job mix proposed for the Work. � � 2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. � B. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. � . � , 1.4 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE � � � ' A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by �`` authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located. � B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Pavement Design Manual of Colorado Department of � ' Transporation for asphalt paving work. � � ' 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard � specifications do not apply to this Section. � � � � C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. � ' � � � ' ASPHALT PAVING 321216- 1 � � � � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following � conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.6 deg C). � 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time � of placement. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 55 � deg F (12.8 deg C)for water-based materials,and not exceeding 95 deg F(35 deg C). PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 AGGREGATES � A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, � crushed blast-furnace slag. B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel,cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. � 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS � A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1. B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or � AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. � 23 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, � liquid,or wettable powder form. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI#97 Latex Traffic Mazking Paint. � 1. Color: White. � 2.4 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having � jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: � ASPHALT PAVING 321216-2 � 2 ( , g E} f � , 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where �: Project is located. � 2. Base Course: S. � � 3. Surface Course: SX. � � � � , PART 3 -EXECUTION . � K & s £ � 3.1 EXAMINATION � � � A. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft ` , pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. � � B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � �. , � 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION � � a � A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. :_ � B. Herbicide Treatrnent: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and �' ' written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted- � aggregate base be.fore applying paving materials. � ' � C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. � yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). �' � E � 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 4 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. � Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. � ' � 33 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING � ' r A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepazed surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place � asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of � mix. Place each course to required grade,cross section,and thickness when compacted. � � # � 1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F(121 deg C). � 2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and � � tears in asphalt-paving mat. � � B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a �. ' lesser width are required. � � C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools � ' to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent � segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. � � � , � � ASPHALT PAVING 321216-3 � i � � � � 3.4 JOINTS � A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix � asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. � 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses,a minimum of 24 inches(60U mm). 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes � work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations." 3.5 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without � excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory- plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. � 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F(85 deg C). ' B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and � outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rollin : Be in intermediate rollin immediatel after breakdown rolling while � g g g Y hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: � 1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041,but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. � D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. � E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled � and hardened. G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become � marked. � 3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the � following tolerances: ' � ASPHALT PAVING 321216-4 � � � � � � � ' � 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch(l3 mm). � 2. Surface Course: Plus l/4 inch {6 mm),no minus. � e i ' . . � B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within �, the following tolerances as determined by usmg a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied �' � transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: � � '' � � � 1. Base Course: l/4 inch(6 mm). � 2. Surface Course: lJ8 inch(3 mm). � , � � 3.7 PAVEMENT MARKING � � ', ' A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified � � with Architect. � � ', ' B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. �' � C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. � ' � D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions � indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide � ' a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mil.s(0.4 mm). F � 1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 � kg/L). ` ' � 3.8 FIELD QUALIT'Y CONTROL � � � A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. � � ' B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken. � C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements � � indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. � � � t � � 3.9 DISPOSAL �' A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and � legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfilL �' � � END OF SECTION 321216 � ' � � �'. ' � � � ' � � � ASPHALT PAVING 321216- 5 � � � (f I, � � ' � � � � � ' � SECTION 321313 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT � r � � � PART 1 -GENERAL � � 1 � � l.l SUMMARY A. Section Includes: � � � 1. Response and return aprons 2. Curbs and gutters. �. � 3. Walks. � � � B. Related Sections: �' � ' 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade and base coursse requirements. � � � � � 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS � � � A. Geotechnical Engineering Report for Proposed West Vail Fire Station, 2399 North Frontage �' ' Road West, Vail, Colorado as prepared by Koechlein Consulting Engineers, Inc. Job No. 09- � 033. � � � 1.3 REFERENCES �; � � A. State of Colorado, Depariment of Transportation (CDOT): State Department of Highways ,: � Standard Construction Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2005. � � 1.4 SUBMITTALS �' � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � € � � B. Shop Drawings: Layout of expansion/contraction and isolation joints per ACI 325.12R-02. � � s C. LEED Submittals: � i � 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation a indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. �` ' Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. � 2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a � replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each design � � mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain portland �: cement replacements,to determine amount of portland cement replaced. � � ' D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. ; �: a:: � � � � CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 - 1 � � � � � E. Other Action Submittals: � 1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other � circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.5 UALITY ASSURANCE � Q A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- � mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 341 (AC[ 301 M)unless otherwise indicated. � PART2 -PRODUCTS � 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT � A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than � 25 percent. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. � C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade b0(Grade 420); deformed. � E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn. � F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M. G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening � reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSPs "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified. � 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS � A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: � 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type II. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. � � CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 -2 � � ' � � � ' B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, provide aggregates uniformly graded from a single � source. � ' � C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. � � D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. � ' E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other � admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of � ' cementitious material. ` � � �, � , 2.3 CURING MATERIALS ;' � A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene € sheet. � ' � B. Water: Potable. � � , C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne,monomolecular,film forming,manufactured for application � to fresh concrete. � �; � D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, � dissipating. �� r , E. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, � dissipating. � �: � ' 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS ° � � A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips. � ' � B. Fiber Reinforcement: Synthetic fiber, monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and �' designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, (1/2 to 1 '/2 � , inches(13 to 3 8 mm)long. x � � , � F ' 2.5 PAVEMENT MARKINGS ' � A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, � complying with FS TT-P-1952,Type II, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. � ' � 1. Color: White. � � k , t 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES � � �; ' A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to CDOT Class P with the following ; properties: s t ' � � � � ' CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 -3 � � € �. � ; 1. Modulus of Rupture @ 28 days: 600 psi minimum. � 2. Strength Requirements: ASTM C94 3. Cement Type: Type I or II Portland. 4. Concrete Aggregate: ASTM C33 and CDOT Section 703. � 5. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). 6. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 7. Slump Limit: 4 inches(100 mm),plus or minus 1 tqC�i�ZS I11Tll�. � 8. Air Content: 6 percent to 8 percent. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than � Portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. C. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. � 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to � ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of � excess yielding. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. � 3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION � A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can � remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. � 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT � A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and ; supporting reinforcement. � � � CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 -4 i i , � 9 , 3 � � ' � 3.4 JOINTS ' � � F ' A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with 5 faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to g centerline unless otherwise indicated. � � � � � ' B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at £ � locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving � terminates at isolation joints. � � ' � � C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, � catch basins,manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects,and where indicated. � � , � D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete � ' thickness: � E. Edging: After initial floating,tool edges of paving,gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an � edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface � ' , finishes.Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces. � �:. � ' 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT � A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. � ' B. Comply with ACI 30l (ACI 30l M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, � and consolidating concrete. � � , C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push � or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. � s ' D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off. �: � � E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform � , surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further � disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treahnents. � � �; ' F. Walks: Minimum 4" thick, with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 50 feet and � tooled control joints at intervals equal to width of walks or maximum 5 feet o.c. Provide �;; fibermesh reinforcing. Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as noted herein. Pitch walks �: '/4"per foot for drainage unless otherwise indicated. � , �: G. Paving: Minimum 8"thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide expansion joints at intervals of �! 50 feet each wall or as indicated on the drawings, and tooled control joints at 10'-0" o.a � ' Provide reinforcing per CDOT requirements. Place pacing over compacted subgrade as k: specified in Section 02300. Provide minimum 2% slope for drainage unless indicated � otherwise. � � € � ' � � � x , CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 - 5 � � � � �: � 3.6 FLOAT FINISHING � A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and � concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true � planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granulartexture. 1. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float- � finished concrete surface l/16 to I/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffia 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING � A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot � temperatures. ; B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. � C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (] kg/sq.m x h) before and during � finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete � surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound or a � combination of these. 3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES � A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: � 1. Elevation: 3/4 inch(19 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm),minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch � (l 3 mm). 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches(75 mm). 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch(6 mm),no minus. � 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch(3 mm),no minus. 3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING � A. Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of[28] <Insert number> days and be dry before starting pavement marking. � B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. � CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 -6 � . � � � , �. � � � ' C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with � uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet � , film thickness of 15 mils{0.4 n�m). � � � 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL , A. Testin A enc : Owner will en a e a ualified testin agency to erform tests and inspections. g g Y gg 9 g P € �. , B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to � ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: � � € ' 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu.yd.(76 cu.m) s or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. � � £ a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests � ' for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly �` selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. � � , 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, � but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform � additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. � ' 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample,but not � less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. � 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M;one test hourly when air temperature is � , 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when it is 80 deg F (27 deg C} and above, and one � test for each composite sample. �' 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of � ' three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. _ 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and � two specimens at 28 days. � , a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two �: specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. �: � � , C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive i compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no ' compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi �. � (3.4 MPa). � : D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor � , within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project �: identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and � inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, � concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break � , for both 7-and 28-day tests. � E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be ' ' permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. E � ; ' � �: � % CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 - 7 � ' � �: � � F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when � test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. ' G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. � H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine � compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. I. Prepare test and inspection reports. � 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION � A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. � B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by � removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep � paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 321313 � � � � � � � � � CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 - 8 ' ' � ' � SECTION 322800 MISCELLANEOUS SITE IMPROVEMENTS � � � � �� PART 1 GENERAL , � '� 1.1 SUNIMARY � V � A. Section Includes: ;� � 1. Outdoor Bike Rack � � , 2. Indoor Bike Rack � a � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � _� � A. General Requirements: Section 013300. .� € t B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions,materials, and anchorage. � � � ' � .� 13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION ; ,� ' � � A. General Requirements: Section 016000. � � � � , PART 2 PRODUCTS � C � 2.1 BIKE RACKS t , � � A. Outdoor Bike Rack: Bike Bike Rack made by Dero, www.dero.com, 800-298-4915, powder coat � finish, color to be selected from manufactures full range of colors, surface mount, tamper proof � � � anchars. � B. Indoor Bike Rack: Track Rack made by Dero, www.dero.com, 800-298-4915, 12 ga galvanized �: steel, stainless steel trolley assembly and 1/4" zinc-plated steel hooks. Provide 96 inch track with ' 10 hooks and required mounting hardware. � PART 3 EXECUTION � , � 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION � ' A. Verify that conditions axe satisfactory for installation of Miscellaneous Site Improvements. r � � B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. � ' � 3.2 SITE FURNISHINGS � ' A. Outdoor Bike Rack: Secure in position securely anchored to concrete paving as recommended by � manufacturer. B. Indoor Bike Rack: Secure to concrete or concrete block wall as recommended by manufacturer. �' ' � END OF SECTION E: 4: � � � MISCELLANEOUS SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322800-1 I � � t � � �� R � ' � � # � � k � � € � � ' � 1 � � SECTION 323223—SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS � i ' PART 1 -GENERAL � � � � ' 1.1 SUMMARY � � t A. This Section includes the following. _ ��i � � � 1. Segmental Retaining Wall Units(SRV� � 2. Geosynthetic Reinforcement. � 3. Drainage Systems. � � � � B. See Division 31 Section"Earth Moving"for excavating and backfilling. � S � ' 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS � A. Segmental Retaining Wall Units � � ' 1. ASTM C 1372—Standard specification for segmental retaining wall units. ' � 2. ASTM C 140—Standard test methods of sampling and testing concrete masonry units. � ' B. Geosynthetic Reinforcement ' � � 1. ASTM D 4595—Tensile properties of geotextiles by the wide width strip method. � 2. ASTM D 5262—Test method for evaluating unconfined creep behavior of geosynthetics. � , 3. GRI: GG1—Single rib geogrid tensile strength. � 4. GRI: GGS—Geogrid pull-out. � � � ' C. Soils � � 1. ASTM D 698—Moisture density relationship for soils,standard method. ' 2. ASTM D 422—Gradation of soils. } 3. ASTM D 424—Atterberg limits of soils. � ' i' D. Drainage Pipe �: �. � 1. ASTM D 3034—Specification for polyvinyl ch(oride(PVC)plastic pipe. `` ' 2. ASTM D 1248—SpeciScation for corrugated plastic pipe. � E. Engineering Design �' � , 1. "NCMA Design Manua1 for Segmental Retaining Walls",Second Edition. � f! F. Where specifications and reference documents conflicts,the Architect/Engineer shall make the ` , final determination of applicable document. � ; € � , � SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223- 1 �' , � i � �. ! � � � 13 SUBMITTALS � A. Materials Submittals: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's certification two (2) weeks prior to the start of work stating that SRW units the geosynthetic reinforcement meet the � requirements of Section 2 of this specification. B. Design Submittal: The Contractor sha11 su6mit two(2) sets of detailed design calculations and � final retaining wall plans for approval at least two (2) weeks prior to the beginning of wall construchon. All calculations and drawings sha11 be prepazed and sealed by a Professional Civil Engineer(P.E.)—(Wall Design Engineer),experienced in SRW design and licensed in the state of which the wall is to be built. � • 1. The design analysis for the final, P.E.-sealed retaining wall plans prepared by the Wall Design Engineer shall consider the external stability against sliding and overturning, internal stability and facial stability of the reinforced soil mass and shall be in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and these specifications. The internal and e�ernal � stability analysis shall be performed in accordance with the"NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls,"using the recommended minimum factors of safety in this manual. � 2. Eactemal stability analysis for bearing capacity,global stability, and total and differential settlement shall be the responsibility of the Owner and the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Geotechnical Engineer shall perform bearing capacity, settlement estimates, and global stability analysis based on the final wall design provided by the Wall Design � Engineer and coordinate any required changes with Wall Design Engineer. 3. While vertical spacing between geogrid layers may vary, it shall not exceed 2A feet matcimum in the wall design. 4. The geosynthetic placement in the wall design sha11 have 100% continuous coverage � parallel to the wall face. Gapping between horizontally adjacent layers of geosynthetic (partial coverage)will not be allowed. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING � A. Contractor shall check materials upon delivery to assure that specified type and grade of � materials have been received and proper color and texture of SRW units have been received. B. Contractor shall prevent excessive mud,wet concrete,epoxies,and like materials that may�x themselves,from coming in contact with materials. � C. Contractor shall store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Contractor sha11 protect materials from damage. Damage materials shall not be incorporated � into the retaining walL � � SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-2 � „ � � � ' E � � � � � � � ' t � � e � P ' � E: , E ( [ { ' � � � ; ' � � I � ,i ' � i � 6 , � � � PART2-PRODUCTS { ' i 2.1 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UIVITS � � ' A. SRW units sha11 be machined formed,Portland cement concrete blocks specifically designed for � retaining wall applications. SRW units currently approved for this project aze: � � 1. Available Products: � ' ` a. Versa Lok;Mosaic with weathered option. � b. Keystone;Centruy Wa11-"Vail Blend” � � � � � �-� ' � � B. Color of SRW units shall be selected&om manufacturer's full range. � ' C. Finish of SRW units shall be split face. � ti D. SRW unit faces shall be of straight geometry. � � � E. SRW unit height shall be 6 inches. � F. SRW units(not including aggregate fill in unit voids) shall provide a minimum weight of 105- psf watl face area. _ ' F G. SRW units shall be solid through the full depth of the unit. # � ' H. SRW uilits shall have a depth(front face to rear)to height ration of 2:1,minimum. � I. SRW units shall be interlocked with connection pins,designed with proper setback to provide r 8:1 vertical to horizontal batter(a 7 degree cant from vertical). � t � J. SRW units shall be capable of erected with the horizontal gap between adjacent units not � exceeding 1/8 inches. € ' K. SRW units shall be capable of providing overlap of units on each successive course of that wa11s �, meeting at comer are interlocked and continuous. SRW units that require comers to be mitered � shall not be allowed. > t; ' ` [: � SEGMENTAL RETAII�TING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-3 i ' ¢ � � � � � � L. SRW units shall be capable of providing a split-face,textured surface for all vertical surfaces � that will be exposed after completion of wall,including any exposed sides and backs of units. M. SRW units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that vvc�uld interfere with the � proper placing of the unit or significantly impair the strength or permanence of fhe structure. Cracking or excessive chipping may be grounds for rejection. Units showing.cracks longer than 1/2" shall not be used within the wa�l. Units showing ehips visible at a distance of 30 feet from � the wall shall not be used within the walL N. Concrete used to manufacture SRW units shall have a minimum 28 days compressive strength of 3,000 psi and a maximum moisture absorption rate, by weight, of 8% as determined in � accordance with ASTM C 1372. Compressive strength test specimens shall conform to the saw-cut coupon provisions of ASTM C 140. O. SRW units' molded dimensions shall not differ more than tl/8 inch from that specified, in accordance with ASTM C 1372.� Comme�[.t�:t 2.2 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL LTNIT CONNECTION PINS � A. SRW units shall be interlocked with connection pins. The pins sha11 consist of glass-reinforced nylon made for the expressed use with the SRW units supplied. ' � 2.3 GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT A. Geosynthetic reinforcement shall consist of geogrids or geotextiles manufactured as a soil � reinforcement element. The manufacturers/suppliers of the geosynthetic reinforcement shall have demonstrated construction of similaz size and types of segmental retaining walls on previous projects. � B. The type, strength, and placement location of the reinforcing geosynthetic shall be as determined by the Wall Design Engineer, as shown on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans. � 2.4 LEVELING PAD A. Material for leveling pad shall consist of compacted sand, gravel, or combination thereof � (USCS soil types GP, GW, SP, and SV� and shall be a minimum of 6 inches in depth. Lean concrete with a strength of 200-300 psi and 3 inches thick maximum may also be used as a � leveling pad material. The leveling pad should extend laterally at least a distance of 6 inches from the toe and heel of the lowermost SRW unit. � � � SEGIvIENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-4 � I � � � ' � � � E � , � � � � ( � � � ; i ' � � � i � ` ' � 2.5 DRAINAGE AGGREGATE � A. Drainage aggregate shall be angular,clean stone or granular fill meeting the following gradation � ` ' as determined in accordance with ASTM D 422. � { � F Sieve Percent Passine � ' 1 inch 100 � 3/4 inch 75—100 � ( No.4 0—60 � � ; ' No.40 0—50 � i No.200 0—5 � � � 2.6 DRAINAGE PIPE � ' � A. The drainage collection pipe shali be a perforated or slotted PVC, or corrugated HDPE pipe. The drainage pipe shall be wrapped with a geotextiles to funcrion as a filter. li ' B. "Drainage pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034 and/or ASTM D 1248. ' � I� 2.7 REINFORC,ED(INFILL)SOIL � i ' � A. The reinforced soil materials hall be free of debris. Unless otherwise noted on the final, P.E. � ' sealed,retaining wall plans prepared by the Wall Design Engineer,the reinforced material shall � consist of the inorganic USCS soil types GP, GW, SW, SP, SM, meeting the following � gradation,as determined in accordance with ASTM D 422: � � , Sieve Petcent Passin¢ 4 4 inch 100 ;' No.4 20—100 � t No.40 0—60 � No.200 0—35 � � ' B. The maximum particle size of poorly-graded gravels(GP)(no fines)should not exceed 3/4 inch � unless expressly approved by the Wa11 Design Engineer and the long-term design strength � (LTDS) of the geosynthetic is reduced to account for additional instaliation damage from n particles lazger than this maximum. � ' C. The plasticity of the fine fraction shall be less than 20. � � � ' ' � � � , � � � SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-5 �. ' � � � � � � � PART 3-EXECUTION � 3.1 EXCAVATION / � A. Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the project grading plans. Contractor shall take precautions to minimize over-excavation. Over-excavation sha11 be filled � with compacted infill material, or as directed by the Engineer/Architect, at the Contractor's expense. B. Contractor shall verify location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. � Contractor shall ensure all surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation. Excavation support,if required,is the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.2 FOUNDATION PREPARATION � A. Following the excavation, the foundation soil shall be examined by the Owner's Engineer to assure actual foundation soil strength meets or exceeds the assumed design beazing strength. � Soils not meeting the required strength shall be removed and replaced with infill soils, as directed by the Owner's Engineer. B. Foundation soil shall be proof-rolled and compacted to 95% standard Proctor density and � inspected by the Owner's Engineer prior to placement of leveling pad materials. 3.3 LEVELING PAD CONSTRUCTION � A. Leveling pad sha11 be laced as shown on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans with a minimum thickness of 6 inches. The leveling pad should extend laterally at least a distance of 6 � inches from the tow and heel of the lower most SRW unit. B. Granular leveling pad material sha11 be compacted to provide a firm, level-bearing surface on which to place the first course of units. Well-graded sand can be used to smooth the top 1/4 to � i/2 inch of the leveling pad. Compaction will be with mechanical plate compactors to achieve 95%of maximum standard Proctor density(ASTM D 698). , 3.4 SRW UNIT INSTALLATION � A. All SRW units shall be installed at the proper elevation and orientation as shown on the final, P.E. sealed wall plans and details or as directed by the Wall Design Engineer. The SRW units � shall be installed in general accordance with the manufacturer's recommendarions. The specifications and drawings shall govern in any conflict between the two requirements. � � SEGIvIENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-6 ' � � S ' i � � , s � _ � � � � $ � � ¢ ' � � � � ` ' B. First course of SRW units shall be placed on the leveling pad. The units shall be leveled side- � � to-side, front-to-rear and with adjacent units, and aligned to ensure intimate contact with the � leveling pad. The first course is the most important to ensure accurate and acceptable results. � � ' To gaps shall be left between the front of adjacent units. Alignment may be done by means of a ; � string line or offset from base line to the back of the units. � � C. All excess debris shall be cleaned from top of units and the next course of units installed on top � ; ' � of the units below. � z �� ' D. Two connection pins sha11 be inserted through the pinholes of each upper course unit into receiving slots in lower course units. Pins shall be fWly seated in the pin slot below. Units shall � � ' be pushed forwazd to remove any looseness in the unit-to-unit connection. �� E. Prior to placement of the next course,the level and alignment of the units shall be checked and corrected,where needed. � ' F. Layout of curves and corners shall be installed in accordance with the wall plan details or in � general accordance with SRW manufactiue's installation guidelines. Walls meeting at comers F ' shall be interlocked by overlapping successive courses. � � G. Procedures C through F shall be repeated until reaching top of wall units,just below the height � _ of the cap units. Geosynthetic reinforcement, drainage materials, and reinforced backfill shall � ': ' be placed in sequence with unit installation as described in Secrions 3.5,3.6,and 3.7. � i ? � ¢ � 3.5 GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT � z ' A. All geosynthetic reinforcement sha11 be installed at the proper elevation and orientation as � � shown on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plan profiles and details, or as directed by the � Wall Design Engineer. s � ' ` � B. At the elevations shown on the final plans,(after the units,drainage material,and backfill have F been placed to this elevation) the geosynthetic reinforcement shall be laid horizontally on =, r ' compacted infill and on top of the concrete SRW units,to within 1 inch of the front face of the � � unit below. Embedment of the geosynthetic in the SRW units shall be�consistent with SRW manufacturer's recommendations. Correct orientation of the geosynthetic reinforcement shall � � be verified by the Contractor to be in accordance with the geosynthetic manufacturer's � � , recommendations. The highest strength direction of the geosynthetic must be perpendicular to � � the wall face. � � C. Geosynthetic reinforcement layers shall be one continuous piece for their enfire embedment � � ' length. Splicing of the geosynthetic in the design strength direction (perpendiculaz to the walt � � face) shall not be permitted. Along the length of the wall, horizontally adjacent sections of � geosynthetic reinforcement shall be butted in a manner to assure 100 percent coverage parallel = to the wall face. � � ' � s ' � E � SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS • 323223-7 � � 1 � � � � � � � � � � D. Traced construction equipment shall not be operated directly on the geosynthetic reinforcement. � A minimum°of 6 inches of backfill is required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the geosynthetic. Turning should be kept to a minimum. Rubber-tired equipment may pass over the geosynthetic reinforcement at slow speeds(tess than 5 mph). E. The geosynthetic reinforcement shall be free of wrinkles prior to placement of soil fill. The � nominal tension shall be appiied to the reiuforcement and secured in place with staples, stakes or by hand tensioning until reinforcement is covered by 6 inches of fill. � 3.6 DRAINAGE MATERIALS A. Drainage aggregate shall be installed to the line, grades, and sections shown on the final P.E. � sealed retaining wall plans. Drainage aggregate shall be placed to the minimum thickness shown on the construction plans between and behind units (a minimum of one cubic foot for each exposed square foot of wall face unless otherwise noted on the final wall plans.) � B. Drainage collection pipes shall be installed to maintain gravity flow of water outside the reinforced soil zone. The drainage collection pipe shall daylight into a storm sewer or along a � slope,at an elevation lower than the lowest point of the pipe within the aggregate drain. 3.7 BACKFILL PLACEMENT � A. The reinforced backfill shall be placed as shown in the fmal wall plans in the maximum compacted lift thickness of 10 inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95%of standard Proctor density(ASTM D 698)at a moisture content within 2%of optimum. The backfill shall � be placed and spread in such a manner as to eliminate wrinkles or movement of the geosynthetic reinforcement and the SRW units. B. Only hand-operated compaction equipment shall be allowed within 3 feet of the back of the � wall units. Compaction within the 3 feet behind the wall units shall be achieved by at least three(3)passes of a lightweight mechanical tamper,plate,or roller. C. At the end of each day's operation, the Contractor shall slope the last level of backfill away � from the wa11 facing and reinforced backfill to direct water runoff away from the wall face. D. At completion of wall construction, bacl�ill shall be placed level with final top of wall . elevation. If final grading,paving, landscaping, and/or storm drainage installation adjacent to � the wall is not placed immediately after wall completion,temporary grading and drainage shall be provided to ensure water runoff is not directed at the wa11 nor allowed to collect or pond behind the wall until final construction adjacent to the wall is completed. � 3.8 SRW CAPS A. SRW caps shall be properly aligned and glued to underlying units with adhesive, a flexible, � high-strength concrete adhesive. Rigid adhesive or mortar is not acceptable. � SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-8 � � � c ' � � � , t � e 3 � � ' � � { ; ' B. Caps shall overhang the top cowse of units by 3/4 to 1 inch. Slight variation in'overhang is � � allowed to correct alignment at the top of the wall. ; j ' , 3.9 CONSTRUCTION ADJACENT TO COMPLETED WALL ! � � '� A. General Contractor is responsible for ensuring that construction by others adjacent to the wall � '� ' does not disturb the wall or place temporary construction loads on the wall that exceed design ! � loads,including loads such as water pressure,temporary grades,or equipment loading: Heavy ; ,.� paving or grading equipment shali be kept a minimum of 3 feet behind the back of the wall face. � ; ' Equipment with wheel loads in excess of 150 psf live load shall not operated within 10 feet of � ' the face of the retaining wall during construction adjacent to the wall. Care should be taken by :� the General Contractor to ensure water runoff is directed away from the wall structure until final � grading and surface drainage collection systems aze completed. � , � � END OF SECTION 323223 � , � ' � 9 � ; � i ' � � , ' ' \ i � i, � ' I '� � , :� ;� ' ;� ' � � ' � 3 ' � # '� � SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 323223-9 � ' � . � � � � _: � � SECTION 328400-IRRIGATION g � � PART 1: GENERAL � 1.01 SCOPE: � � � Furnish all labor,materials, supplies,equipment,tools, and transportation, and perform all �, operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the detailed design and complete installation of the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings,the � ,' installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: � A. Procurement of all applicable licenses,permits, and fees. � , B. Coordination of Utility Locates("Call Before You Dig"). F: C. Detailed design of the irrigation system. k D. Connection of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system. �; � E. Provision and connection of electrical power supply to the booster pumps. F. Maintenance period. � � G. Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire. � � 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED: � ' Items of work specifically excluded or covered under other sections are: �. � A. Installation of water tap for irrigation. � � B. Provision of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system. � 1.03 RELATED WORK: � � � A. Division 1-General Requirements: � � , 1. Section 013300 -Submittal Procedures � 2. Section 017700-Closeout Procedures € 3. Section 017839 -Project Record Documents � ' � � B. Division 2-Site Work: � � 1. Section 328400—Turf and Grasses �; '�, � 2. Section 329300 -Plants � ; �i � f ; � � � � � � � � � , � � � € � , s � IRRIGATION 328400- 1 3 � � � ' � � � d � � 1.04 DESIGN REQUIItEMENTS: � A. Consultant Desi�n: 1. Intent: The intent of the irrigation design documents presented herein is to � provide the Irrigation Contractor a starting point for the preparation of detailed installation drawings. The documents set the desired level of excellence, flexibility,and efficiency expected of the irrigation system. All required ' coordination for the installation of the irrigation system has been completed. Water taps have been located per A/P-3.0-tap size to be 1 1/2". Connection to irrigation system to be made by the plumbing subcontractor. Power for � controllers has been arranged. Coordinate location with electrical subcontractor-connection to controller to be made by electrical subcontractor. � B. Contractor Requirements: 1. General Requirements: Utilizing direction indicated on the irrigation plan as a � basis,provide detailed irrigation system installation drawings for the sprinkler and drip irrigation systems including but not limited to sleeving and mainline pipe sizing; remote control valve locations and sizing; lateral pipe routing and � sizing; sprinkler and drip irrigation layout;controller size and stationing;control wire routing and sizing. 2. Remote Control Valves: � a. Individual turf zones must have a capacity for a maximum flow of�� GPM. b. Individual drip zones must have a capacity for a ma�cimum flow of 20 GPM. c. 1-inch remote control valves must have a flow capacity between 0 to 25 ' GPM. d. Spray sprinklers and rotary sprinklers should be installed on separate remote control valves. ' e. Areas with different exposures must be on separate remote control valves. For example,turf in a parking island should be on a separate lateral from turf in a pedestrian area. � 3. Pipe: a. Mainline pipe velocities must not exceed 5 FPS. Lateral pipe velocities � must not exceed 7.5 FPS. b. Maximum allowable variation between the highest and lowest sprinkler � operating pressures on an individual lateral must not exceed 10%. c. Minimum mainline pipe size is 1 %-inch. Minimum sprinkler lateral pipe size is 1-inch. Minimum drip lateral pipe size is 3/-inch � IRRIGATION 328400-2 � � � � � � �. � ' � 4. Sprinkler Layout Guidelines: � ' ; � a. Use pop-up spray sprinklers on turf areas and annual planting beds. Use p pop-up spray sprinklers in areas less than 30 feet in width or in areas, � i which are oddly shaped. � b. Use pop-up rotary sprinkles in turf areas. Use pop-up rotary sprinklers in = areas greater that 30 feet in width. � ' c. Use a sprinkler nozzle and spacing combination such that the scheduling � � coefficient for every sprinkler lateral is between 1.1 and 1.2. If a � maximum scheduling coefficient of 1.2 can not be achieved, use a , sprinkler nozzle and spacing combination to achieve the minimum � scheduling coefficient possible. � d. Trim out all hardscape areas. Layout sprinklers to minimize overspray ' onto sidewalks, buildings, and attractions. e. Spray sprinklers on an individual zone must have matched precipitation rate nozzles. � ', ' f. Nozzles for rotary sprinklers on an individual zone must approximate a � uniform precipitation rate. � � 5. Controller Stationing/Sequencing � ' � a. Assign only one remote control valve per controller station. b. Assign station numbers in a logical manner to allow maintenance ', ' personnel to easily inspect the operation of the system on a regular basis. � 1.05 SUBMITTALS: � � ' A. Submit materials list manufacturer's data, and sho drawin s under provisions of � , , P g ; ! Section 01300-Submittals. ` ; � ! , B. Materials List: Include pipe, fittings,mainline components,water emission components, � � and control system components. Quantities of materials need not be included. � � ' 3 � C. Manufacturers'Data: Submit manufacturers'catalog cuts, specifications,and operating � � instructions for equipment shown on the materials list. ! � , D. Detailed Irrigation Layout Drawings/Shop Drawings: � 1. Obtain from the Owner's Representative CAD drawing files showing the � � ' • proposed landscape plan. Complete detailed irrigation layout drawings using � � CAD techniques. � � 2. Submit layout drawings showing remote control valve locations and sizing, � i , lateral pipe routing and sizing, sprinkler layout,emitter layout, controller sizes, � � and controller stationing. � 3. Submit hydraulic calculations showing friction loss calculations from the point of � � � connection to the most remote water emission device for the worst case spray � � sprinkler and rotary sprinkler laterals. List the highest and lowest sprinkler � � operating pressures on the lateral. � � � � � � IRRIGATION 328400-3 � � , � $ 6 ! 4. Submit uniformity evaluation charts for each sprinkler/nozzle/spacing � combination showing the scheduling coefficient for the critical 1%, 5%, 10% window size. � 5. Submit control wire diagrams including sizing and calculations verifying that the control wire size is in accordance with valve manufacturer's printed recommendations. 1.06 Ri�LES AND REGULATIONS: � A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric � Code,the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association,and applicable laws and regulations of the goveming authorities. B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or � larger size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations,provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. � C. If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings,these quantities are provided for information onlv. It is the Contractor's responsibility to � determine the actual quantities of all material,equipment,and supplies required by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage. 1.07 TESTING: � A. Notify the Owner's Representative three days in advance of testing. B. Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to a � pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solvent-welded PVC joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before testing. � C. Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the Owner's Representative. , D. Furnish clean, clear water,pumps, labor,fittings,and equipment necessary to conduct tests or retest. ' E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: 1. Subject mainline pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated operating � pressure for two hours. Test with mainline components installed. 2. Subject lateral pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated operating pressure. � 3. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings. 4. Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe,fitting, � joint,valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test. ; 5. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. � IRRIGATION 328400-4 � ' � � 4 � � � F. Operational Test: � 1. Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. The Owner's �: ' Representative will visually observe operation,water application patterns,and � leakage. �: � 2. Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid,wiring, or appurtenance to correct operational deficiencies. � 3. Replace,adjust,or move water emission devices to correct operational ar �` coverage deficiencies. � ' 4. Replace defective pipe,fitting,joint,valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. � 5. Repeat test(s)until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests,replace � ' components, and conect deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner. � � G. Control Svstem Grounding: � � 1. Test for proper grounding of control system per manufacturer's � recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer's guidelines �. ' for acceptance. 2. Replace defective wire, grounding rod,or appurtenances. Repeat the test until the manufacturer's guidelines are met. � � 1.08 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW: � The purpose of on-site reviews by the Owner's Representative is to periodically observe the work � ' in progress,the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents,and to address � questions with regard to the installation. � � A. Scheduled reviews such as those for irrigation system layout or testing must be scheduled � with the Ovcmer's Representative as required by these specifications. � � � B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project. C. A review will occur at the completion of the irrigation system installation and Project � Record(As-Built)Drawing submittal. � 1.09 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT: � � � The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation materials of � prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. , A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guazantee/warranty irrigation materials,equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused � � by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner's � Representative. � � B. Contract documents govem replacements identically as with new work. Make � replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. �. � , IltRIGATION 328400- 5 � , � � ! C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and � replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. PART 2: MATERIALS � 2.01 QUALIT'Y: terials which are new and without flaws or defects of an e,and which are the best of � Use ma , Y tYP their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITLJTIONS: � A. Acceptable equipment manufacturer is Rain Bird or approved equal.The Owner prior to � bidding must approve alternative equipment. B. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes,and may be � increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.03 SLEEVING: � A. Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or wiring bundle. B. Sleevin material beneath edestrian avements shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with � S P P solvent welded joints. C. Sleevin beneath drives and streets shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded � g joints. , � 2.04 PIl'E AND FITTINGS: � A. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid,unplasticized polyvinyl chloride(PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation ' Foundation(NSF)approved pipe,extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B,ASTM Standard D 1784,with an integral belled end. � 2. Use Class 200, SDR-21,rated at 200 PSI,conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at higher pressures than Class 200 in the case of small nominal diameters,which are not � manufactured in Class 200. 3. Use solvent weld pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter less than 3- inches or where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40,Type l, ' PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to AST'M Standard D2564. � IRRIGATION 328400-6 � ' � � � � � � � B. Lateral PiQe and Fittin�s: � 1. Use ri id un lasticized ol in 1 chloride PVC 1120 1220 National Sanitation � � g , P P 3'�' Y � ) � Foundation(NSF)approved pipe,extruded from material meeting the � requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A.or 12454-B,ASTM Standard � ' D1784,with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding. � 2. Use Class 160, SDR-26,rated at 160 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and � � tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use solvent weld pipe for lateral pipe. Use Schedule 40,Type 1,PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to � ' ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe. Use primer approved by the � pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564,of a � type approved by the pipe manufacturer. ' C. S ecialized Pi e and Fittin s: �' � 1. Copper pipe: Use Type "K"rigid conforming to ASTM Standard B88.Use wrought copper or cast bronze fittings, soldered or threaded per the installation � details. Use 95%tin and 5%antimony solder. � � 2. Use a dielectric union wherever a copper-based metal(copper,brass, and bronze) � is joined to an iron-based metal(iron, galvanized steel,and stainless steel). � 3. Low Density Polyethylene Hose: � � a. Use pipe specifically intended for use as a flexible swing joint. � Inside diameter: 0.490+0.010 inch. �, Wall thickness: 0.100±0.010 inch. 1 Color: Black. �! b. Use spiral barb fittings supplied by the same manufacturer as the hose. � � 4. Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 80 � nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings. � 5. Joint sealant: Use only teflon-type tape or teflon based paste pipe joint sealant on � � plastic threads. Use nonhardening,nontoxic pipe joint sealant formulated for use on water-carrying pipes on metal threaded connections. � ' 2.05 MAINLINE COMPONENTS: � A. Backflow Prevention Assemblv: Acceptable manufacturer for the backflow prevention device is Febco or approved equal.Acceptable manufacturer for the backflow enclosure f is Strongbox. B. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Install with double swing joint arrangement. � ' Acceptable manufacturer and model is Rain Bird model5-LRC. Acceptable manufacturer for valve box is Ametek or Carson-Brooks. � ' � � � ' � � ,' � IRRIGATION 328400- 7 � � ' � � 1 � � 2.06 SPRINKLER IlZRIGATION COMPO�iENTS: A. Remote Control Valve(RCVZAssembly for Sprinkler Laterals: Use wire connectors and � waterproofing sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with hot-stamped black letters on a yellow background. Install a separate valve box � over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly.Acceptable manufacturer and model for remote control valve is Rain Bird PEB or approved equal . Acceptable manufacturer for valve box is Ametek or Carson-Brooks. � B. Snrinkler Assemblv: as presented in the installation details.Acceptable manufacturer and ' model for pop-up spray sprinklers in shrubs is Rain Bird 1812.Acceptable manufacturer � and models for pop-up rotary sprinklers are Hunter PGJ-12 and MP2000 at locations indicated on drawings or approved equal. 2.07 CONTROL SYSTEM COMI'ONENTS: � A. Control Units: � 1. Description: Acceptable manufacturer and model is Rain Bird ESP-MC. 2. Basic Capabilities: � �b.\j 100%solid state electrical components. � C. 24 VAC transformer capable of operating 9 solenoids simultaneously. d. Non-volatile memory. e. Manual activation of remote control valves. � f. Pedestal or wall mounted in plastic cabinet. 1. Surge protection: Provide standard level surge protection. � 3. Lightning protection: Provide three 5/8"x 8 foot copper clad tJL listed grounding rods and three CADWELD connectors at each controlle�location. Use#6 AWG bare copper wire. � 4. Wire markers: Prenumbered or labeled with indelible nonfading ink,made of permanent,nonfading material. 5. Electrical conduit:Use PVC Schedule 40 conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D-1785.Fittings for PVC conduit shall � be Schedule 40,Type 1,PVC solvent weld fittings,ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. � w. � _ - ; � �. . - .: . � IRRIGATION 328400- 8 , ' # � � � � � ' C. Control Wire: � � � � , 1. Use American Wire Gauge(AWGj No. 14 solid copper,Type iTF or PE cable, UL approved for direct underground burial from the satellite control unit to each � � remote control valve. � 2. Color: Use white for common ground wire. Use easily distinguished colors for � ' other control wires. Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of �; the active control wire. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length. � 3. Splices: Use 3M DBY splices � , 4. Warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids,or other � destructive chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches � wide colored yellow and imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC � ' LINE BELOW." � � 2.08 OTHER COMPONENTS: � ' ' A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide the following operating keys, servicing tools, and spare � parts. � € ' 1. Two(2)operating keys for each type of manually operated valve. � 2. Two(5)of each servicing wrench or tool needed for complete access,adjustment � and repair of all rotary sprinklers. � ' 3. Two(5)quick coupling keys, each with attached hose swivel ell for operation of f the quick coupling valves. � � ' B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or � installation details which are part of the irrigation system,even though such items may � not have been referenced in these specifications. ° ' � PART 3: EXECUTION � � 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS: � i � A. Site Inspections: � � � � 1. Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Representative prior to beginning � work. � ' ' 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. � � � B. Utility Locates("Call Before You Di�"): � ° ' 1. Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground � utilities. - � ' ' 2. Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at � no additional cost to the contract price. � � � ' C. Irri atg ion System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the � staking has been completed. Notify the Owner's Representative one week in advance of � review. The Owner's Representative at this review will identify modifications. � � � � IRRIGATION 328400-9 � ' � E � � 3.02 LAYOUT OF WORK: � A. Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include:mainline pipe, remote control valves, isolation valves, quick coupling valves, sprinklers,and controllers. � B. Install all mainline pipe and mainline components inside of project property lines. 3.03 EXCAVATION TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING: � A. Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work � space for installing connections and fittings. B. Minimum cover(distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade): � 1. 18-inch over mainline pipe less than 3-inch. 2. 18-inch over control wire. � 3. 12-inch over lateral pipe to pop-up spray sprinklers. 4. 18-inch over lateral pipe to rotary sprinklers. C. Maintain at least 15-feet clearance from the centerline of any tree. -�� .. _ ��, e�rr_ A._ . � E. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested. � F. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from ' rubbish,vegetable matter, frozen materials,and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum � dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects,which may damage the pipe. G. Backfill unsleeved pipe in either of the following manners: � 1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding � soiL 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil. � H. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways,walks,curbs, etc., in sleeves. Minimum compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density,ASTM D698- � 78.Use of water for compaction azound sleeves, "puddling",will not be permitted. I. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site � grades. J. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owner's � Representative for trench depth adjustments. IRRIGATION 328400- 10 � ' ' � � � � 3.04 SLEEVING AND BORING: g � � � A. Install sleeving at a depth,which permits the encased pipe,or wiring to remain at the specified burial depth. B. Extend sleeve ends 12-inches beyond the edge of the paved surface. Cover pipe ends and � , mark with stakes. Mark concrete with a chiseled"x"at sleeve end locations. � � C. Bore for sleeves under obstructions,which cannot be removed. Employ equipment and � tmethods designed for horizontal boring. � � 3.05 ASSEMBLING PIl'E AND FITTINGS: � , A. General: �: � ' 1. Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. � ' 3. Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within the � limits of the curvature of the pipe. Minimum radius of curvature and offset per 20 foot length of pipe by pipe size are shown in the following table. All ' curvature results from the bending of the pipe lengths. No deflection will be � allowed at a pipe joint. � ' � SIZE RADIUS OFFSET PER � ' 20'LENGTH � 1 '/z" 25' 7'-8" � �' ' � B. Mainline Pipe and Fittin�s: � 1. Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. � , 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: � a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in a manner recommended by ' the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in pipe. � ' c. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. � 3. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted. � � C. Lateral Pipe and Fittin�s: �' 1. Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. � ' 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: � � a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in the manner recommended � by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. � , � IRRIGATION 328400- 11 ' � � � b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water � in the pipe. c. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. � D. �ecialized P�e and FittinQS: � 1. Copper Pipe: � a. Buff surfaces to be joined to a bright finish. Coat with solder flux. b. Solder so that a continuous bead shows around the joint circumference. � 2. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in � accordance with accepted industry practices. 3. Insert a dielectric union wherever a copper-based metal(copper,brass,bronze) and an iron-based metal(iron,galvanized steel, and stainless steel)are joined. � 4. Low Density Polyethylene Hose: Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory-formed threads. Field-cut threads are not permitted. � b. Use only Teflon-type tape or teflon based paste. c. When connection is plastic-to-metal,the plastic component shall have � male threads and the metal component shall have female threads. 6. Make metal-to-metal,threaded connections with Teflon-type tape or pipe joint compound applied to the male threads only. � 3.06 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS: A. Backflow Prevention Assembl : Install at each point of connection. Install assembly so � that its elevation,orientation, access,and drainage conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and applicable health codes. � B. 4uick Cou�ling Valve Assembly: 1. Install one quick coupling valve immediately downstream of each Backflow � Prevention Assembly for winterization of the irrigation system. 2. Install adjacent to shrub beds for miscellaneous watering needs and adjacent to sidewalks for washing. Maximum spacing between quick coupling valves is 150 � feet. 3. Locate at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. � 3.07 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve(RCV)Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: � 1. Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly. � 2. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Install connectors and sealant per the manufacturer's recommendations. ' IRRIGATION 328400- 12 ' � ' � s � � ' 3. Install only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 12-inches from �: and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies � ' together where practical. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. � Allow at least 12-inches between valve boxes. � 4. Adjust RCV to regulate the downstream operating pressure. � , 5. Attach ID tag with controller station number to control wiring. � � B. Sprinkler AssemblX: � 1. Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly. � , 2. Install per the installation details. � 3. Locate rotary sprinklers 6-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved � ' areas. �. 4. Locate spray sprinklers 3-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved � areas. � ' 5. Install sprinklers perpendicular to the fmish grade. � 6. Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best � performance. E , 7. Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance. � € 3.08 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: � � � E A. Control Units: � � � 1. Owner's Representative will determine their exact site locations upon � ' commencement of contract. � 2. Lightning protection if installed e�cternal to the building: Drive each grounding � rod into soil its full length. If rock prevents driving,bury at least four feet deep. � ' Space rods 16 inches apart in a straight line away from the controller. Connect#6 � AWG copper grounding wire to rod using CADWELD connection. A grouping � of grounding rods may be used for grouped control units. � ' 3. Attach wire markers to the ends of control wires inside the controller unit � housing. Label wires with the identification number(from detailed design � drawings)of the remote control valve to which the control wire is connected. � , 4. Connect control wire to the corres ondin�control unit terminal � .� . �: �� t; �, � . �. , . �� .�.. a��,.,. � � � . � ' ��:«ar�:.�.�.t��.�:z� � � � �E . y � . . .a �"rt4�;S�. S ,.. r,, a.v .i.n .. . "`e�,. , ,... �.,a .... .. ..., .. >._. ..-n.. .. � h- C. Control Wire: � ' � 1. Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Bundle with � �ipe wra ping ta e s�aced at 10-foot mtervals. & � � �,.� � �... £ '-,«�� `��` `� � ��„ � � � � g� � � .... �. � ,.�: .. ,.d>., �-� ..:>._ s. , x.:L.. _x,._,'�., „__ _.,,. ,. .;...� .. .�v , �. •. . ...,,..._ ,--.. a� ,,.�:� �,...,.,s.. . �.-,�..._....,,.,.,� � ' � IRRiGATION 328400- 13 � ' � � � � � � �� ., , w�,. "� � � 3. Provide a 30-inch excess length�of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at eaeh�90 �� degree change of direction,at both ends of sleeves,and at 100-foot intervals � along continuous runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop. Coil 30-inch length of wire within each remote control valve box. 4. Install common ground wire and one control wire for each remote control valve. � Multiple valves on a single control wire is not permitted. 5. If a control wire must be spliced,make splice with wire connectors and waterproof sealant, installed per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice in � a valve box,which contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 10-inch round valve box.Use same procedure for connection to valves as for in-line splices. � 6. Install wire parallel with and below mainline pipe. 7. Protect wire not installed with PVC mainline pipe with a continuous run of warning tape placed in the backfi116-inches above the wiring. � 3.09 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools and Snare Parts: �� 1. Prior to completion of construction, supply to the Owner all operating keys, servicing tools, spare parts,and any other items indicated in these specifications. � B. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may � not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.10 PROJECT RECORD(AS-BUILT)DRAWINGS: � A. Submit Record Drawings under provisions of Section 017$39-Project Record : Documents.The Contractor is responsible for documenting changes to the design. � Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one co�mplete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as-built information is recorded. B. Record i e and wirin network alterations. Record work,which is installed differently � PP g than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points,of each irrigation system valve, � each backflow prevention device, controller,each sleeve end, and other irrigation components enclosed within a valve box. C. Prior to construction completion,transfer the information contained on the project � drawings maintained on site onto the design drawings. Label each sheet"Record ' Drawing". � D. Turn over the"Record Drawings"to the Owner's Representative. Completion of the Record Drawings will be a prerequisite for the Review at the completion of the irrigation � s stem installation. b ,� IRRIGATION 328400- 14 � . ' � � t �; I3.11 WIl�ITERIZATION AND SPRING START-UP: A. Winterize the irrigation system the first fall following construction and start-up the & , irrigation system the following spring. Repair any damage caused in improper winterization at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate the winterization and start- � up with the landscape maintenance personnel. �, ' � 3.12 MAINTENANCE: � ' A. Upon completion of construction and Review by the Owner's Representative,maintain � irrigation system for a duration of 30 calendar days. Make periodic examinations and � adjustments to irrigation system components so as to achieve the most desirable � , application of water. � B. Following completion of the Contractor's maintenance period,the Owner will be � ' responsible for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the � guarantee/warranty period,for performing necessary minor maintenance,for trimming � around sprinklers,for protecting against vandalism,and for preventing damage after the � , landscape maintenance operation. � � 3.13 CLEANUP: � A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery,tools, excess materials, � ' � and rubbish. � ' END OF SECTION � � � � , � � € � ' � � R � ' � � ' � i � ' � � � , ¢ g4 F � ' { � � � , � � IRRIGATION 328400- 15 � ' £ , . � , �: � ' � � SECTION 329200 -TURF AND GRASSES � ' � � PART 1 -GENERAL � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY � � , A. Section Includes: � r 1. Seeding. � , 2. Sodding. �; � ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, � twigs,and detritus. � , � B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. � � ' C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand �, with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. � � ' D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying,repelling, or mitigating a � pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and � molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, � defoliant,or desiccant. � ' �' E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, � animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents �< ' (gophers,moles,and mice),unwanted plants(weeds),fungi,bacteria,and viruses. � �F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface � ' soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. � � , G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface � of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. � � H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic � ' matter and soil organisms. �; �' I. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project � , site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as � urban environments,the surface soil can be subsoil. ; � , � �. ' � � � , TURF AND GRASSES 329200- 1 �.' �` � � � 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � B. Certification of grass seed. ' 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. � C. Product certificates. � 1.4 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE A. Installer's Field Su ervision: Re uire Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor � P q on Project site when work is in progress. 1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed,commercial. � B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a � qualified soil-testing laboratory. 1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. � 2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, � viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. � 1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis,name and address of manufacturer,and indication of conformance with state and federal laws,as applicable. � B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgass Sod Transplanting and Installation" � in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. � � � TURF AND GRASSES 329200-2 , � # , � � e � € ' € €t �' � ' � � � 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE �: €: , A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape � Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is � planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following � ' periods: � �` 1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of substantial completion. C , � a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or y if turf is not fully established,continue maintenance during next planting season. t , �. 2. Sodded Turf: Not applicable—no sodded turf is specied in this project. � � I PART2-PRODUCTS � �' � ' 2.1 SEED �, � � A. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows: � ' � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following � Pawnee Buttes Seed Inc Dry Native Mountain Revegetation Mix: � , � (10%) Fringed Bromegrass � (10%)Nodding Brome � ' (20%) Slender Wheatgrass � (10%) Steambank Wheatgrass �` (2.5%) Canby Bluegrass � ' (7.5%) Arizona Fescue � (10%) Indian Ricegrass � (5%) Thickspike Wheatgrass � ' (5%) Bluebunch Wheatgrass � (2.5%) Bottlebrush Squirreltail � ' (2.5%) Sandburg Bluegrass � (15%) Sheep Fescue � Pawnee Buttes Seed Inc Low Grow Native Grass Mix: � ' � (10%) Big Bluegrass, Sherman � (10%) Sandberg/Canby Bluegrass � ' (10%) Indian Rice Grass � (30%)Arizona Fescue, Redondo � , (40%) Sheep Fescue, Ovina � TURF AND GRASSES 329200—3 � ' �: � � 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD-None � 23 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS � A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: � 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. � 2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a � minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No.40 sieve. � C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade,unadulterated. � E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. � F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve. � G. Sand: Clean, washed,natural or manufactured,and free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water � absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. � 2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS � A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19- � mm)sieve; soluble salt content of 7 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular � texture,with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or � of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of � uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. � TURF AND GRASSES 329200-4 ' � � � � � � � , � E. Manure: Well-rotted,unleached,stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, ' soil,weed seed, and material hannful to plant growth. � � � ' 2.5 FERTILIZERS � A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of lpercent nitrogen and � 10 percent phosphoric acid. �' ' � B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available � phosphoric acid. � ' � � � ' C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: �' � � 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent � potassium,by weight. � � � D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble � nitrogen,phosphorus,and potassium in the following composition: � � 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous,and 10 percent potassium,by � , weight. � � � , � 2.6 PLANTING SOILS � � � � , A. Stockpiled Native Topsoil: � 1. Quantity: A substantial quantity of native topsoil will result from construction on � ' site. Approximate quantity is unknown. � � 2. Stockpiling: Stripped topsoil will be stockpiled on the site under Civil work. � , � 3. Composition: Fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of rocks, � sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster,concrete and other deleterious materials. � 3; ' � 4. Analysis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the proposed topsoil from � an accepted, accredited Testing Agency at Contractor's cost. � � � 5. Test Results: Request Testing Agency to send one(1)copy of test results directly � to Landscape Architect and one(1)copy to Owner. � , � � � � ' � � , TURF AND GRASSES 329200-5 � � � � B. Imported Topsoil: � 1. Quantity: Import topsoil as soon as an msufficient quantity of native soil is veri- fied. Contractor shall calculate the quantity of topsoil needed to complete the work. � 2. Cost: Paid for by Contractor on a unit price cost per cubic yard. Obtain authori- zation before ordering. �`.� ii� 3. Stockpiling: Stockpile on site as directed by Owner. 4. Composition: To match or exceed in quality of native stockpiled topsoil, as de- � termined by analysis similar to that described above. Imported topsoil shall be amended as necessary per soils analysis report. � 5. Samples: Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the specifications. di tel remove re'ected to soil off the site at Contractor's � 6. Re�ected Topsoil: Imme a y � p expense. Cost of failed sample is responsibility of Contractor. � 2.7 SOII.,MIXES A. Native Plantin�Medium: � To be used for all seeded areas, shrub beds and tree pits-Amount per Cubic Yard: � 40%Topsoil 40% Subsoil � 20%Compost ` B. Flower Bed Mix: � Planting Beds for Perennials-Amount per Cubic Yard: 80%Topsoil � 20%Compost Materials 2.8 MULCHES � A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of � wheat,rye, oats, or barley. B. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture,and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. � � TURF AND GRASSES 329200-6 � � ' � � E ' � C. Muck Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely � divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing � ' capacity af 1100 to 2000 percent. � D. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; � ' moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble k salt content of 3 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of � substances toxic to plantings. � � ' � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � , � 3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION g � ' A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones � larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots,rubbish, and other extraneous matter and � legally dispose of them off Owner's property. � � � 1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. � 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil � amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. � � 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades � after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is � frozen,muddy,or excessively wet. _ ' � a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. �., � � B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, b , grading, or surface-soil stripping operations,prepare surface soil as follows: � � € � 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation,and turf. Do not muc into surface soil. � 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers � according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soiL � Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. ' 3. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's � property. � � � C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly � fine te�cture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove � ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be � ' planted in the immediate future. � � D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry � before planting. Do not create muddy soil. � ' � E. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded z � , or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. � � ; , �' � � ' TURF AND GRASSES 329200-7 � � � � 3.2 SEEDING � A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by : sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against � existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at rates specified in �Sheets L-l.l and L-13) per the plant planting schedule and � legend C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil,roll lightly, and water with fine spray. � D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches thickness in loose � thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand,blower,or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. � E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch and roll surface smooth. � 3.3 TURF MAINTENANCE � A. Maintain and establish turf by watering,fertilizing,weeding,mowing,trimming,replanting,and ; performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and � replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height � appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. C. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with � authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before � each application is performed. 3.4 SATISFACTORY TURF � A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand � of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq.ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches. � 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even- colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and : surface irregularities. � � TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 8 � � � � � � ' � �: �. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue � , maintenance until turf is satisfactory. � � �; ' END OF SECTION 329200 � � � � i � � � 1 � �: � 1 � � � � 1 � 1 � �: � 1 � 1 � � 1 e � � 1 � � � � 1 � � 1 � � i � � I � � 1 � �: , TURF AND GRASSES 329200-9 � ' ' �. SECTION 329300-PLANTS � , � � PART 1 -GENERAL ; � ' � 1.1 SUMMARY �; � A. Section Includes: � � 1. Plants. � ' 2. Planting soils. � 1.2 DEFINITIONS ' A. Backfill: The earth used to re lace or the act of re lacin earth in an excavation. P P g � � � B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, � twigs,and detrrtus. ' C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. � D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand � ' with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soiL �: E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mrtigatmg a � pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and � � � molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. � F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, � � animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents � (gophers,moles, and mice),unwanted plants(weeds), fungi,bacteria,and viruses. � � G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; im orted to soil; or manufactured to soil that is modified with soil amendments and � P P P � ' perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the � ' stem or trunk. � � I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top � � surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic � , matter and soil organisms. � � i � � � PLANTS 329300- 1 � � � K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. � In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments,the surface soil can be subsoiL � 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. � B. Samples of mineral mulch. � C. Product certificates. D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for � maintenance of plants during a calendar year. 1.4 QUALI TY ASSURANCE � A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor � on Project site when work is in progress. 1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. � B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. � 1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil � amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. � b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable � requirements in ANSI Z60.1. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. � 1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until � planting. � � PLANTS 329300 -2 . � , � �: ' � � ' B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from � sun scald, drying,wind burn, sweating,whipping,and other handling and tying damage. Do not � bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide �. � protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery � and handling. � ' C. Handle planting stock by root balL � D. Store bulbs,corms,and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting. � ' � E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate , aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. � � 1.6 WARRANTY � � A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in � ' materials,workmanship,or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: � 1 � a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of � adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond �. Contractor's control. � , b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. � F 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion � � � a. Trees, Shrubs,Vines,and Ornamental Grasses: 24 months b. Ground Covers,Biennials,Perennials,and Other Plants: 12 months � ' � 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE � � A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. � Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants aze installed and � continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than � maintenance period below. � � 1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: Six months from date of planting completion. � ' 2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Three months from date of planting completion � � � ' � � � � � , � � PLANTS 329300-3 � � � � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL � A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings � and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated ' when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, � injuries,abrasions,and disfigurement. B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, � which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. 2.2 INORG ANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS � A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium � carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of � 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. � B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegadable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a m�imum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. � C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. � D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade,unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. � F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent � passing through No. 50 sieve. G. Sand: Clean,washed,natural or manufactured,and free of toxic materials. � H. Diatomaceous Earth. Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite.with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. � � � PLANTS 329300-4 � � ' � I23 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS � � A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; � i moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; � soluble salt content of 7 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free � of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: � � � B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular tearture, � with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. � � �. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or � of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. �; ' D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of ' uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil,or toxic materials. � E. Manure: Well-rotted,unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by � volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, � � soil,weed seed, debris,and material harmful to plant growth. ` � � ' 2.4 FERTILIZERS � A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and � ' 10 percent phosphoric acid. � : B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available � ' phosphoric acid. � � C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of � fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea � , � formaldehyde,phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: � � 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent � � potassium,by weight. � � D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble � , nitrogen,phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: � � 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium,by � weight. # � ; E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade � planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting � ' nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. i � 1. Size: 10-gram tablets. � � 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent 4 potassium, by weight plus micronutrients. � � � ' � � PLANTS 329300-5 � ' � ; � ! 2.5 PLANTING SOILS � A. �A. Stockpiled Native Topsoil: 1. Quantity: A undetermined quantity of native topsoil will result from construction on site.Approximate quantity is unknown. � 2. Stockpiling: Stripped topsoil will be stockpiled on the site under Civil work. 3. Composition: Fertile, friable,well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of rocks, � sticks,oils,chemicals,plaster,concrete and other deleterious materials. 4. Analysis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the proposed topsoil from � an accepted,accredited Testing Agency at Contractor's cost. 5. Test Results: Request Testing Agency to send one(1)copy of test results directly � to Landscape Architect and one(1)copy to Owner. B. Imported Topsoil: � 1. Quantity: Import topsoil as soon as an insufficient quantity of native soil is veri- fied. Contractor shall calculate the quantity of topsoil needed to complete the � work. 2. Cost: Paid for by Contractor on a unit price cost per cubic yard. Obtain authori- � zation before ordering. 3. Stockpiling: Stockpile on site as directed by Owner. � 4. Composition: To match or exceed in quality of native stockpiled topsoil, as de- termined by analysis similar to that described above. Imported topsoil shall be � amended as necessary per soils analysis report. 5. Samples: Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the specifications. � 6. Rejected Topsoil: Immediately remove rejected topsoil off the site at Contractor's expense. Cost of failed sample is responsibility of Contractor. � 2.6 SOIL MIXES � A. Native Plantin�Medium: To be used for all seeded areas, shrub beds and tree pits-Amount per Cubic Yard: � 40%Topsoil � 40% Subsoil 20%Compost � PLANTS 329300 - 6 � � � � � �' � � �: B. Flower Bed Mix: �' Planting Beds for Perennials-Amount per Cubic Yard: �: ' � 80%Topsoil � � 20%Compost Materials � , �', 2.7 MLJLCHES � � ;' � �; A. Organic Mulch: Pine Beetle Kill Wood Mulch available from the Town of Vail Public �' � Works. � � �; B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, sta.ble, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; �; � moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble � salt content of 3 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of � substances toxic to plantings. � � � 2.8 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS � ' A.Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq.yd. minimum. � � B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven � ' polypropylene fabric,4.8 oz./sq.yd. � � �. € � PART 3 -EXECUTION � � p � 3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLIS�IMENT � ' � A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches Remove stones larger than 4 �; inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally ' dispose of them off Owner's property. � 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. � � 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil � amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soiL �: 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades � � after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or � excessively wet. � � B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly � r fine texture. Roll and rake,remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. � � � � � � � �: ' � � � ' PLANTS 329300- 7 � � � � 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS � A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom � leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. � 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate � vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the-root flare to the ' bottom of the root ball. � B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil per the mix ratios specified in section 2.7 above in this specification. � 3.3 TREE, SHRUB,AND VINE PLANTING A. Before lanting,verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. � P B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not � break. C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch adjacent finish � grades. 1. Use planting soil specified in Section 2.5 for backfill. � 2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting � operation. 3. Container Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. � 4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. � 5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. � 6. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips;do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 7. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. � D. Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch adjacent finish grade. � 1. Use planting soil specified in Section 2.5 for backfill. : � PLANTS 329300 - 8 � � t � � �. 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill � around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and � � placing layers above roots. �. 3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside , soil-covered roots about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots. { 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. � � E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the � surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the � � surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. � � � , 3.4 TREE, SHRUB,AND VINE PRLTNING � � A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. � � B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural € and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; �. remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural � ' character. � ' 3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines per spacing on � ' planting plan. B. Use planting soil specified in 2.5 for.backfill. �: , C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. � � D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around � ' plants to hold water. �' E. Water thoroughly after planting,taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. � F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery � from transplanting shock. � � � 3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING �. � A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. �' Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure � f seams with galvanized pins. � � � � � � � ag F PLANTS 329300-9 � , � � � � B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. � 1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 4 inch average thickness, with 24 inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 � inches of trunks or stems. 3.7 PLANT MAINTENANCE � A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers,resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations � as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. � B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and � pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with � authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before � each application is performed. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or � replace damaged plantings: END OF SECTION 329300 � � � � � � � PLANTS 329300- 10 � . _ � ' � � � � � � � SECTION 334600- SUBDRAINAGE � E i � PART 1 -GENERAL � � , � � 1.1 SUNIMARY �. � � A. Section Includes: �' � 1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. � , 2. Geotextile filter fabrics. � � � 1.2 SUBMITTALS � � A. Product Data: 1. Perforated piping � � 2. Geotextile filter fabrics. � � � t � PART 2 -PRODUCTS � � �: � 2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS � ; ' � A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for 4 coupled joints. � � � 2.2 SOIL MATERIALS � � � A. Soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthmoving." � � � � � 23 TRENCH LINER � , x c , A. Sheet Trench Liner: Polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397,not less than 10 mils(0.25 mm)thick. � ' t � = 2.4 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS � � ' A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from � � I 10 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (448Q to 13 440 L/min. per sq. tn) when tested according to ' � ' ASTM D 4491. � � � B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament. � � � 1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2. � � 2. Styles: Flat and sock. _ � � � � i SUBDRAINAGE 334600- 1 � r X � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 EARTHWORK � A. Excavating,trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthmoving." � 3.2 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing � forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches(150 mm)deep and 12 inches(300 mm)wide. - il filter fabric in trench and overla trench sides. � B. Lay flat style geotext e p C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, � to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches(100 tnm). D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections � with adhesive or tape. E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation � subdrainage. F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. � G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches (1�0 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches(3U0�nm)of finish grade. � H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. . I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at � least 4 inches(l QO mm). J. Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers � not exceeding 6 inches (1�0 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building. � 33 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with � unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other � requirements indicated. 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm)unless otherwise indicated. 2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping leveL 3. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. � SUBDRAINAGE 334600-2 � E � ' � � � � 4. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing � upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. � ' � B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and �. fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. � LC. Install thermoplastic piping accarding to ASTM D 2321. � � � � 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION � A. Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose � , banded,coupled, or push-on joints. � B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special � � couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials � and dimensions of both pipes. � � � 3.5 CONNECTIONS � � A. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation and underslab subdrainage to stormwater � � sump and sump pumps. Comply with requirements for sump pumps specified in Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps." � � � 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � � x; , A. Tests and Inspections: , � 1. After installing drainage course to top of pipmg, test dram piping with water to ensure � free flow before backfilling. � � 2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are � satisfactory. � � � � B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. � � C. Prepare test and inspection reports. � €- ' � 3.7 CLEANING � � A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work � progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place � plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. � � ; a_ � END OF SECTION 334600 k ' � �. � SUBDRAINAGE 334600-3 � � � g: